JP7036155B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is common to have an effect for making the player predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a lottery is performed based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry section provided in the game area, a variable display of the pattern is performed on the display device, and the winning result is obtained by the lottery. In the case of, it is known that the player shifts to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device (for example). See Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2009-261415

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the interest of a game.

The invention according to claim 1 in order to solve the above problems includes a launching operation means operated for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area and a launching operating means.
A first variable ball entry means provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered and a second state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to enter. ,
A second variable ball entry means provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered and a second state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to enter. ,
A predetermined ball entry portion where a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and
A predetermined passage portion through which a game ball that has entered the predetermined entry portion flows down, and a predetermined passage portion.
A predetermined detection means for detecting a game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion, and
A predetermined granting means for giving a privilege to a player when a game ball is detected by the predetermined detecting means, and a predetermined granting means.
A game ball provided in the predetermined passage portion on the downstream side of the detection region by the predetermined detection means, and the game ball passing through the detection region is guided to any one of a plurality of regions including the first region and the second region. Guidance means to make it so
When the game ball flows into the first region, the first variable ball entering means is brought into the first state, and the first giving means.
When the game ball flows into the second region, the second variable ball entering means is brought into the first state, and the second giving means.
Equipped with
The predetermined ball entry unit, the first variable ball entry means, and the second variable ball entry means are located in a region where the game ball can flow down when the launch operation means is operated with the maximum operation amount in the game area. It is characterized by being provided .

According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the main structure of a pachinko machine by disassembling. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (A) is a vertical sectional view of the first special figure winning device in the non-accepted state, and (b) is a vertical sectional view of the first special figure winning device in the accepted state. (A)-(j) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display device. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display device. It is a vertical sectional view for demonstrating the internal structure of a branch winning apparatus. It is a front view of the game board which shows the right side area enlarged. It is the side view of the 1st distribution mechanism and the vertical sectional view around the 1st distribution mechanism. (A)-(c) It is a front view of the rotating body for distribution. (A)-(h) It is a time chart which shows how the game ball is guided by the 1st distribution mechanism and the 2nd distribution mechanism. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a winning or failing lottery. (A) It is explanatory drawing for explaining the distribution table for 1st special drawing, and (b) is explanatory drawing for explaining the distribution table for 2nd special drawing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of each jackpot result. (A1) to (f1) are time charts showing the winning mode of the game ball in the first high probability state, and (a2) to (f2) are time charts showing the winning mode of the game ball in the second high probability state. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary electric control process which is executed by MPU of a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary figure fluctuation start processing executed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during change of a normal figure executed by the MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during operation of a general electric power | execution which is executed in MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the control process of the 1st special figure winning apparatus executed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the control process of the 2nd special figure winning apparatus executed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning detection process executed by the MPU of a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control process which is executed in MPU of a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure variation start processing executed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary figure fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU of the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during change of a normal figure executed by the MPU of a main control unit. It is a front view of the game board which enlarges and shows the right side area in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board which enlarges and shows the right side area in 4th Embodiment. (A) to (d) are time charts showing how a game ball is guided by the first distribution mechanism. (A) to (e) It is a time chart which shows the winning mode of a game ball in a high frequency support mode. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary electric control process which is executed by MPU of a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary figure fluctuation start processing executed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during change of a normal figure executed by the MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during operation of a general electric power | execution which is executed in MPU of a main control unit. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process executed by the MPU of a main control unit, and (b) is the flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the display continuation period executed by the MPU of a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the effect determination process which is executed in MPU of a voice light emission control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the game round start process executed by the MPU of the voice light emission control device. (A) to (c) Show the flow of the game when the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism in the shortest firing cycle in the high frequency support mode and the game times corresponding to the disengagement result are continuous. It is a time chart. It is a front view of the game board which enlarges and shows the right side area in 5th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in an exploded manner. In addition, in FIG. 2, the configuration in the gaming area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine main body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. .. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plates on all four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment. In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an indispensable configuration, and the outer frame 11 may be provided in the island equipment of the game hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can rotate forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at the rotating tip portion thereof, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so as to be in a locked state. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 16 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

The front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 17 so that almost the entire area of the game area PA can be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 17 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 17a is fitted therein. The window panel 17a is formed colorless and transparent by glass, but is not limited to this, and may be formed colorless and transparent by synthetic resin, and the gaming area PA is formed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 17a. It may be colored and transparent as long as it is visible.

A display light emitting unit 18a is provided above the window unit 17. Further, a pair of left and right speaker units 18b are provided to output sound effects and the like according to the game state. Further, below the window portion 17, an upper bulging portion 19a bulging toward the front side and a lower bulging portion 19b are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 19a, and a lower plate that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 19b. The upper plate has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 27 side while arranging them in a row. In addition, the lower plate has a function of storing excess game balls in the upper plate.

The configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the guiding means is provided by the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26. As a guide rail is configured. The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by the guide rail.

By the way, the game ball launching mechanism 27 launches a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b for supplying the game ball stored in the upper plate of the upper bulging portion 19a onto the launch rail 27a, and a launching device 27b. It includes a solenoid 27c, which is an electric actuator that launches a game ball supplied on the rail 27a toward the guide rail. The solenoid 27c is driven and controlled by the rotation operation of the firing operation device 28 provided on the front door frame 14, and the game ball is launched.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening has a general winning section 31, a first special drawing normal winning section 32, a first special drawing winning device 33, a second special drawing winning device 34, a special electric winning device 35, a through winning section 36, and a branch winning device 37. A variable display unit 40, a special figure unit 45, and a normal figure display unit 46 are provided, respectively.

Even if a ball is entered into the through winning unit 36, the game ball is not paid out. On the other hand, with respect to the general winning unit 31, the first special drawing normal winning unit 32, the first special drawing winning device 33, the second special drawing winning device 34, the special electric winning device 35, and the branch winning device 37, it is determined that a winning ball will occur. A number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, when the number of prize balls is entered into any of the first special figure normal winning section 32, the first special figure winning device 33, the second special drawing winning device 34, and the branch winning device 37. 3 prize balls are paid out, 10 prize balls are paid out when the general winning unit 31 is entered, and 10 prize balls are paid out, and when the special electric winning device 35 is entered. 15 prize balls will be paid out.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and a game ball that has not entered various winning portions or the like is discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. Further, a large number of nails 24b are planted on the game board 24 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members such as a windmill are arranged.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only is the ball discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the flow of the game area PA is continued without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish it from the entry of a game ball into the out opening 24a, the general winning section 31, the first special drawing normal winning section 32, the first special drawing winning device 33, and the second special drawing section are described. Figure Winning a ball to the winning device 34, the special electric winning device 35, the through winning section 36, and the branch winning device 37 is also referred to as winning.

The variable display unit 40 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PA. Since the peripheral edge of the variable display unit 40 protrudes in front of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the gaming board 24, a region where the gaming ball launched into the gaming area PA can flow down is partitioned. Specifically, in the game area PA, the upper region PA1 which is a region above the predetermined height position of the variable display unit 40 and the upper region PA1 which is continuously below the variable display unit 40 and above the variable display unit 40. The left region PA2, which is the left region, the right region PA3, which is a region to the right of the variable display unit 40 and is continuous below the upper region PA1, and the left region PA2 and the right region PA3, respectively. On the other hand, it is continuously divided into a lower region PA4 which is a region below the variable display unit 40.

As the first launch operation, the player operates the launch operation device 28 with a rotation amount in the first range that is less than the reference rotation amount, so that the game ball moves to the left of the lateral center position in the upper region PA1. Start to flow down. In this case, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper region PA1 → the left region PA2 → the lower region PA4. On the other hand, as the second launch operation, the player operates the launch operation device 28 with a rotation amount in the second range that is equal to or greater than the reference rotation amount, so that the player operates the launch operation device 28 on the right side of the center position in the lateral direction in the upper region PA1. The game ball begins to flow down. In this case, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper region PA1 → the right region PA3 → the lower region PA4. That is, by adjusting the rotation operation amount of the launch operation device 28, the player can play the game so that the game ball flows down the left side region PA2 of the left side region PA2 and the right side region PA3, and also the right side region. The game can be performed so that the game ball flows down the PA3. By the way, when the launch operation device 28 is operated with the maximum momentum, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper region PA1 → the right region PA3 → the lower region PA4.

The first special figure normal winning section 32 is installed in the lower region PA4. The first special figure normal winning part 32 is opened upward, and a member such as an opening / closing member for preventing the game ball from entering the first special figure normal winning part 32 is not provided. Then, in the situation where the game ball is launched in the same mode, the probability of winning the first special figure normal winning unit 32 is constant regardless of the game state. In other words, the first special figure normal winning unit 32 is always capable of entering a game ball that flows down the game area PA toward the first special figure normal winning unit 32. Further, the first special figure normal winning unit 32 is arranged directly under the stage 40a formed in the variable display unit 40, and the game ball that has flowed into the stage 40a through the guidance passage formed in the variable display unit 40. Therefore, the game ball discharged from the center of the stage 40a to the outside of the variable display unit 40 is easy to win in the first special figure normal winning section 32. The first special figure normal winning unit 32 is provided with a detection sensor 32a, and the detection sensor 32a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first special figure normal winning unit 32.

Here, as described above, the first special figure normal winning unit 32 is provided in the lower region PA4, but the right side of the first special drawing normal winning unit 32 on the upstream side toward the right region PA3. A regulation nail 24c is provided so as to prevent the game ball flowing down the region PA3 from reaching the normal winning portion 32 of the first special figure. Further, the entrance of the guide passage to the stage 40a is provided for the left side region PA2, and is not provided for the right side region PA3. With these configurations, when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, it is possible to win a prize in the first special figure normal winning unit 32, but the right side area PA3 is played. When the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the ball flows down, it is not possible to win a prize in the first special figure normal winning unit 32. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball flows down the right region PA3 because the regulation nail 24c is not provided or the entrance of the guide passage to the stage 40a is provided with respect to the right region PA3. Even when the launch operation device 28 is operated so as to perform the above-mentioned configuration, the first special figure normal winning unit 32 may be configured to be able to win a prize.

The first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are installed in the right area PA3. That is, when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 cannot win a prize, and the right side area PA3 If the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down, a prize can be won.

The configuration of the first special figure winning device 33 will be described with reference to FIG. 4 (a). FIG. 4A is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first special figure winning device 33 in the non-accepted state. The configuration of the second special figure winning device 34 is the same as the configuration of the first special figure winning device 33, and in the following description, the first special figure winning device will be described when explaining each member of the second special figure winning device 34. The code of each corresponding member of 33 is used as it is.

The first special figure winning device 33 discharges the base unit 51 in which the discharge passage 53 for discharging the game ball flowing in from the game area PA to the rear of the game board 24 is formed, and the game ball flowing down the game area PA. It is provided with a guidance unit 52 for guiding to the passage 53. The entrance portion 53a of the discharge passage 53 has an opening area of one game ball or more, and is opened toward the front of the pachinko machine 10. A detection sensor 54 is provided on the exit portion 53b side of the discharge passage 53, and the detection sensor 54 detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first special figure winning device 33.

The guidance unit 52 receives the game ball flowing down the front region of the entrance portion 53a in the game area PA from below, and guides the received game ball into the discharge passage 53, and into the discharge passage 53. Guide drive unit 56 for displacing the guide member 55 between the initial position where the guidance of the game ball is disabled and the guidance position where the guidance is possible (hereinafter, the guide drive unit of the first special figure winning device 33). 56 is also referred to as a drive unit 56a for winning a first special figure, and a guide drive unit 56 of the second special figure winning device 34 is also referred to as a drive unit 56b for winning a second special figure), and a guide member 55 is arranged at an initial position. A non-blocking position that does not block the inflow of the game ball into the discharge passage 53 in a situation where the guide member 55 is arranged at the guide position and is arranged at a blocking position that blocks the inflow of the game ball into the discharge passage 53. The blocking member 57, which is arranged in the above, is provided. The guide member 55 and the blocking member 57 are arranged so as to face each other with a predetermined distance in the vertical direction so that the guide member 55 faces downward. A transmission unit 58 is provided to the guide member 55 and the blocking member 57 so as to transmit the driving force of the guide driving unit 56.

When the guide driving unit 56 is in the non-driving state, the guide member 55 is arranged at the initial position and the blocking member 57 is arranged at the blocking position by the urging force of the urging means such as a spring (not shown). In this case, the guide member 55 and the blocking member 57 are completely buried in the discharge passage 53 and do not protrude into the game area PA. As a result, the game ball flowing down the front region of the inlet portion 53a of the discharge passage 53 in the game area PA is not guided into the discharge passage 53 by the guide member 55 and the blocking member 57, that is, the game ball is the first. The game area PA flows downward without entering the special figure winning device 33. Further, since the blocking member 57 is arranged at the blocking position, the substantially opening area of the inlet portion 53a of the discharge passage 53 is less than one game ball. As a result, in the situation where the guide member 55 is arranged at the initial position, it is possible to reliably prevent the game ball from entering the first special figure winning device 33.

When the guide drive unit 56 is in the drive state, the guide member 55 and the blocking member 57 are displaced against the urging force of the urging means, the guide member 55 is arranged at the guide position, and the blocking member 57 is not. It is placed in the blocking position. FIG. 4B is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first special figure winning device 33 in the guided state.

When the guide member 55 is arranged at the guide position, the tip end side of the guide member 55 projects from the inlet portion 53a of the discharge passage 53 toward the game area PA. This amount of protrusion is such that the game ball flowing down the front area of the entrance portion 53a in the game area PA can be received from below. Since the upper surface of the tip end side of the guide member 55 is inclined downward toward the inlet portion 53a of the discharge passage 53, the game ball received from below on the tip end side of the guide member 55 is the upper surface of the guide member 55. Will be guided into the discharge passage 53. Further, when the blocking member 57 is arranged in the non-blocking position, the blocking member 57 is displaced so that the tip portion thereof is located above the blocking position, so that the game of rolling on the upper surface of the guide member 55. The ball flows into the discharge passage 53 without interfering with the blocking member 57. As a result, the guide drive unit 56 is put into the drive state, and the game ball flowing down the front area of the entrance portion 53a in the game area PA enters the first special figure winning device 33.

Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the first special drawing shows a state in which the guide driving unit 56 of the first special drawing winning device 33 is in the non-driving state, the guide member 55 is arranged at the initial position, and the blocking member 57 is arranged at the blocking position. It is called a non-accepting state of the winning device 33 (or a closed state of the first special drawing winning device 33, a non-induction state of the first special drawing winning device 33), and the guide drive unit 56 of the first special drawing winning device 33 is in a driving state. The state in which the guide member 55 is arranged in the guide position and the blocking member 57 is arranged in the non-blocking position is the acceptance state of the first special figure winning device 33 (or the open state of the first special figure winning device 33, the first It is called the guidance state of the special figure winning device 33). Further, the state in which the guide drive unit 56 of the second special figure winning device 34 is in the non-driving state, the guide member 55 is arranged at the initial position, and the blocking member 57 is arranged at the blocking position is the state of the second special drawing winning device 34. It is called a non-accepting state (or a closed state of the second special drawing winning device 34, a non-induction state of the second special drawing winning device 34), and the guide drive unit 56 of the second special drawing winning device 34 is in the driving state and the guide member. The state in which the 55 is arranged in the guide position and the blocking member 57 is arranged in the non-blocking position is the acceptance state of the second special figure winning device 34 (or the open state of the second special figure winning device 34, the second special figure winning device). 34 induction state).

The first special figure winning device 33 includes a cover member 59 provided so as to face the entrance portion 53a of the discharge passage 53 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The cover member 59 is formed in a gate shape so as to form a vertical passage portion 59a in the front region of the entrance portion 53a in the game region PA, and the game ball passing through the front region of the entrance portion 53a at the same time is 1 It is provided so as to limit the number of the game balls to one and to restrict the movement of the game ball forward and laterally of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, when the guidance unit 52 of the first special figure winning device 33 is in the guided state, it is prevented that a plurality of game balls are simultaneously guided into the discharge passage 53 of the first special figure winning device 33. At the same time, it is possible to reliably guide the game ball passing through the front region of the inlet portion 53a into the discharge passage 53 in the guidance state. On the other hand, when the guidance unit 52 of the first special figure winning device 33 is in the non-guidance state, the game ball that has flowed into the passage portion 59a of the cover member 59 passes in the vertical direction without flowing into the entrance portion 53a. do. This game ball will continue to flow down the game area PA as it is.

A winning lottery is performed based on the occurrence of a prize in the first special figure winning device 33, and a winning lottery is performed based on the occurrence of a prize in the second special figure winning device 34. In addition, a winning lottery is performed based on the occurrence of a prize in the first special figure normal winning unit 32 provided in the lower region PA4. When the winning lottery is performed, the special figure unit 45 displays the variation of the pattern, and finally the result corresponding to the result of the winning lottery is displayed.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, the special figure unit 45 is provided in the lower right corner of the game area PA where the game ball does not pass. The special figure unit 45 is provided with a first special figure display unit 45a and a second special figure display unit 45b. In the first special figure display unit 45a, a winning lottery is performed based on the occurrence of a prize in the first special figure normal winning unit 32 or the first special figure winning device 33, so that the pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. Further, in the second special figure display unit 45b, a winning lottery is performed based on the occurrence of a prize in the second special figure winning device 34, so that the pattern is variablely displayed. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed.

The first special figure display unit 45a and the second special figure display unit 45b are configured by a segment display unit in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Instead, it may be composed of other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. Further, the patterns displayed on the first special figure display unit 45a and the second special figure display unit 45b include a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, and a plurality of types of characters. Is displayed, or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are displayed is conceivable.

In the special figure unit 45, a first special figure hold display unit 45c and a second special figure hold display unit 45d are provided at positions adjacent to the first special figure display unit 45a and the second special figure display unit 45b. .. The number of game balls that have won the first special figure normal winning unit 32 or the first special figure winning device 33 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the first special figure holding display unit 45c. It has become. Further, the number of game balls that have won a prize in the second special figure winning device 34 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the second special figure holding display unit 45d.

Incidentally, the display range of the first special figure display unit 45a is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 41 described later. Further, the display range of the second special figure display unit 45b is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 41. Further, the display range for both the first special figure display unit 45a and the second special figure display unit 45b is also narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 41. Further, the entire display range of the first special figure display unit 45a, the second special figure display unit 45b, the first special figure hold display unit 45c, and the second special figure hold display unit 45d is also displayed by the symbol display device 41. The area is narrower than the surface. As a result, the player's attention to the symbol display device 41 is higher than that of the first special figure display unit 45a, the second special figure display unit 45b, the first special figure hold display unit 45c, and the second special figure hold display unit 45d. It will be possible to increase.

When the first special figure display unit 45a performs variable display of the pattern, the symbol display device 41 provided in the variable display unit 40 performs the display effect accordingly, and the second special figure display unit 45b performs the display effect accordingly. Even when the variable display of the pattern is performed, the display effect is performed in accordance with the variable display of the pattern on the symbol display device 41. In the symbol display device 41, not only the display effect according to the variable display on the special figure display units 45a and 45b, but also the display effect during the open / close execution mode and the display effect during the demo display, which shift after winning the prize, etc. Is done.

About the symbol display device 41 In detail, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display device. You may.

In the symbol display device 41, when the first special symbol display unit 45a starts the variable display of the pattern, the effect for the game is started, and when the first special symbol display unit 45a ends the variable display of the symbol. The production for the game is finished. Further, in the symbol display device 41, when the variation display of the pattern is started in the second special symbol display unit 45b, the effect for the game round is started, and the variation display of the pattern ends in the second special symbol display unit 45b. In some cases, the production for the game round ends.

The display contents when the effect for playing games is performed on the symbol display device 41 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing individual symbols displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a display surface of the symbol display device 41.

As shown in FIGS. 5 (a) to 5 (j), a pattern which is a kind of a pattern consists of nine main patterns with numbers "1" to "9" and a shell-shaped pattern. It is composed of sub-designs. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as an octopus are assigned numbers "1" to "9" to form a main symbol.

As shown in FIG. 6A, on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set as a plurality of display areas. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. .. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol string Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the above, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols. Then, on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

As shown in FIG. 6B, on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are displayed. It is designed to be stopped and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 6A, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 are formed on the display surface of the symbol display device 41. It is set.

When a variable display of symbols is performed on the display surface of the symbol display device 41 as an effect for game rotation, the variable display is started so that the symbols of the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. To. Then, the variable display is switched to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbols are statically displayed in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3. .. When the variation display of the symbols is completed and the result of the internal lottery is the second high accuracy correspondence result of 16R described later, the same odd-numbered symbol combination is formed on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. .. If the result of the internal lottery is the first high-accuracy response result of 8R, the second high-accuracy response result of 8R, or the low-accuracy response result, which will be described later, the same even number on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. A combination of symbols is formed.

It should be noted that, based on the winning of the first special drawing winning unit 32, the first special drawing winning device 33 or the second special drawing winning device 34, any of the special drawing display units 45a and 45b and the symbol display device 41 The period from the start of the variation display to the display of a predetermined result and the end of the variation display corresponds to one game. Further, the mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern to be variablely displayed by the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned symbol, and may be configured such that only numbers are variablely displayed as the symbol, for example.

If a big hit is won in the winning lottery based on the winning of the 1st special figure normal winning section 32, the 1st special drawing winning device 33 or the 2nd special drawing winning device 34, the special electric winning device 35 will be won. Shift to the open / close execution mode that is possible. As shown in FIG. 3, the special electric winning device 35 is provided in the lower region PA4 at a position below the first special drawing normal winning portion 32 and above the out port 24a. The position where the special electric winning device 35 is provided in the lower area PA4 is such that when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2 and the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. It is a position where a prize can be won regardless of whether the launch operation device 28 is operated.

The special electric winning device 35 is provided with a large winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24, and is provided with an opening / closing door 35a for opening and closing the large winning opening. The opening / closing door 35a is arranged in either the closed state or the open state by being driven by the drive unit 35b for special electric power. Specifically, the opening / closing door 35a is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize, and is switched to an open state in which the game ball can win a prize when the opening / closing execution mode is set. It should be noted that although it is not impossible to win a prize in the closed state, it may be configured in a state in which it is more difficult for the prize to occur than in the open state. The special electric winning device 35 is provided with a detection sensor 35c, and the detection sensor 35c detects a game ball that has won a prize in the special electric winning device 35.

The internal lottery for whether or not to shift to the open / close execution mode is executed with the winning of the first special figure winning device 33 or the second special figure winning device 34 as an opportunity as described above. As described above, the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 can be switched between the non-accepted state in which the game ball cannot be won and the accepted state in which the game ball can be won. It is a composition. In this configuration, the game ball is sent to the branch winning device 37 as an opportunity to switch the first special figure winning device 33 from the non-accepted state to the accepted state and the second special figure winning device 34 from the non-accepted state to the accepted state. It is generated by winning a prize. Further, the branch winning device 37 is provided so as to be able to switch between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter, as will be described in detail later. The trigger for switching the branch winning device 37 from the closed state to the open state is generated when a game ball wins a prize in the through winning unit 36.

The through winning unit 36 and the branch winning device 37 are installed in the right side region PA3. That is, when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, the through winning unit 36 and the branch winning device 37 cannot win a prize, and the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. When the launch operation device 28 is operated as described above, a prize can be won.

The through winning portion 36 has a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball passes through the through hole in the vertical direction, so that the through winning portion 36 is won. The through winning unit 36 is provided with a detection sensor 36a, and the detection sensor 36a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the through winning unit 36.

The branch winning device 37 is switched to the open state based on the winning of the through winning section 36. Specifically, with the winning of the through winning unit 36 as a trigger, the pattern display unit 46 performs variable display of the pattern. Regarding the normal map display unit 46, in detail, the normal map display unit 46 is provided in the lower right corner of the game area PA, which is an area through which the game ball does not pass. The normal figure display unit 46 is composed of a segment display unit in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be composed of other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. Further, as the pattern displayed on the general map display unit 46, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are displayed. Is displayed.

In the normal drawing display unit 46, the variable display of the pattern is performed based on the occurrence of a prize in the through winning unit 36. Then, in the first high-probability state or the second high-probability state, which will be described later, the result corresponding to the branch winning device 37 being opened when the variation display of the pattern ends is displayed. Further, in the low probability state, an internal lottery is performed based on the occurrence of a prize in the through winning unit 36, and the variable display of the pattern is started on the general drawing display unit 46. Then, if the result of the internal lottery is winning, the result corresponding to the opening of the branch winning device 37 when the variable display of the pattern ends is displayed, and if the result of the internal lottery is out of order, the result of the pattern is displayed. When the variation display ends, the result corresponding to the fact that the branch winning device 37 is not opened is displayed.

The number of prizes won in the through winning unit 36 is not stored on hold. That is, if a prize is awarded to the through winning unit 36 in a situation where it is possible to start the variable display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 46, the variable display of the pattern is displayed on the general map display unit 46 based on the winning. However, even if a prize is awarded to the through prize unit 36 in a situation where it is not possible to start the variable display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 46, the prize is invalidated and the prize is awarded. No processing is executed.

The configuration of the branch winning device 37 will be described with reference to FIG. 7 in addition to FIG. FIG. 7 is a vertical sectional view for explaining the internal configuration of the branch winning device 37.

As shown in FIG. 3, the branch winning device 37 is provided with a branch entrance 61 having a size that allows the game ball to pass through, and is in a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass through the branch entrance 61 and the game ball passes through the branch entrance 61. A branch side opening / closing member 62 for switching to a possible open state is provided. The branch side opening / closing member 62 is opened by being driven by a drive unit 63 for branch entrance through a link mechanism (not shown).

The game ball winning the branch entrance 61 is guided to the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, and then enters the branch passage 65 formed in the base body 64 of the branch winning device 37 as shown in FIG. Derived. The branch passage 65 is continuous with the entrance region 65a formed so as to extend vertically downward from the entrance portion of the branch passage 65 and the downstream end portion of the entrance region 65a, and the passage direction extends over the middle position of the branch passage 65. The upstream passage area 65b set to have a downward slope in the lateral direction and the first lead-out area 65c set to be continuous with the downstream end of the upstream passage area 65b so that the passage direction is vertically downward. The first derivation region 65d, which is branched from the middle position of the first derivation region 65c, and the first derivation region 65c and the second derivation region 65d are continuously connected to the downstream end portions of the first derivation region 65d. It is provided with a game ball that has passed through 65c and a discharge area 65e for discharging the game ball that has passed through the second derivation area 65d to the back surface side of the game board 24.

The entrance region 65a, the upstream passage region 65b, the first lead-out region 65c, and the second lead-out region 65d all have dimensions in the direction orthogonal to the passage direction, which are equal to or more than one game ball and less than two game balls. It has become. This prevents the game balls from passing through the respective regions 65a to 65d in a state where a plurality of game balls are lined up in a direction orthogonal to the passage direction.

At the boundary between the entrance region 65a and the upstream passage region 65b, a branch winning detection sensor 66a for detecting a game ball that has won a prize in the branch winning device 37 is provided. The branch winning detection sensor 66a is an electromagnetic induction type sensor, and when a game ball is present in the detection area, the HI level signal is output to the main control device 101 described later, and the game ball is present in the detection area. If not, the LOW level signal is output to the main control device 101 described later. The type of the branch winning detection sensor 66a is arbitrary, and the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

When the main control device 101 receives a signal corresponding to the detection of the game ball from the branch prize detection sensor 66a, the three game balls corresponding to the number of prize balls for the prize to the branch prize device 37 are paid out. Execute the process to make it. Specifically, a prize ball command for paying out three game balls is transmitted to the payout control device 107, which will be described later. In this way, the branch winning detection sensor 66a is provided in the entrance area 65a, and when the game ball is detected by the branch winning detection sensor 66a, the game ball corresponding to the winning to the branch winning device 37 is paid out. By making the configuration in which the process for performing the game is executed, it is possible to immediately pay out the game ball when a prize is awarded to the branch winning device 37.

At the branching point of the first out-licensing region 65c to the second out-licensing region 65d, a switching piece 67 for guiding the game ball flowing into the first out-licensing region 65d to the second out-licensing region 65d is provided. The switching piece 67 is rotatably supported in a region opposite to the second lead-out region 65d side with respect to the first lead-out region 65c in the base body 64, and the entire switching piece 67 is retracted to the outside of the first lead-out region 65c. It is possible to displace between the retracted position and the guided position protruding into the first derivation area 65c. The driving force of the switching drive unit 68 is transmitted to the switching piece 67 through a transmission unit (not shown). When the switching drive unit 68 is in the non-drive state, the switching piece 67 is arranged in the retracted position by the urging force of an urging means such as a spring (not shown), and the switching drive unit 68 is in the drive state. The switching piece 67 is displaced against the urging force and placed at the induction position.

When the switching piece 67 is arranged at the retracted position, the game ball that has flowed into the branch passage 65 flows down the first lead-out region 65c without being guided to the second lead-out region 65d. Then, the game ball is detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b provided downstream from the branch position by the switching piece 67 in the first lead-out area 65c, and then is discharged to the back side of the game board 24 through the discharge area 65e. To. On the other hand, when the switching piece 67 is arranged at the guidance position, the game ball flowing into the branch passage 65 is received from below by the switching piece 67. The upper surface of the switching piece 67 in the state of being arranged at the guidance position is inclined downward toward the second lead-out region 65d. As a result, the game ball received from below by the switching piece 67 flows into the second out-licensing region 65d due to its own weight, and flows down the second out-licensing region 65d. Then, the game ball is detected by the second trigger detection sensor 66c provided in the second lead-out area 65d, and then discharged to the back side of the game board 24 through the discharge area 65e.

The first trigger detection sensor 66b and the second trigger detection sensor 66c are electromagnetic induction type sensors, and when a game ball is present in the detection area, the HI level signal is output to the main control device 101 described later for detection. When the game ball does not exist in the area, the LOW level signal is output to the main control device 101 described later. The types of the first trigger detection sensor 66b and the second trigger detection sensor 66c are arbitrary, and the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

Even if the main control device 101 receives a signal corresponding to the detection of the game ball from the first trigger detection sensor 66b, the main control device 101 does not execute the process for paying out the game ball. Similarly, even if the main control device 101 receives a signal corresponding to the detection of the game ball from the second trigger detection sensor 66c, the main control device 101 does not execute the process for paying out the game ball. On the other hand, as described above, the main control device 101 executes a process for paying out the game ball when a signal corresponding to the detection of the game ball is received from the branch winning detection sensor 66a. That is, when a prize is generated in the branch winning device 37, the winning game ball is immediately detected by the branch winning detection sensor 66a, so that the processing for paying out the game ball is executed. Then, after the process is executed, the game ball is detected by either the first trigger detection sensor 66b or the second trigger detection sensor 66c. As a result, when a prize is awarded to the branch winning device 37, the process for executing the payout of the game ball is immediately executed, while the first trigger detection sensor 66b and the second trigger are executed. It is possible to increase the degree of freedom when designing the passage configuration until the game ball is detected in any of the detection sensors 66c.

When the main control device 101 receives a signal corresponding to the detection of the game ball from the first trigger detection sensor 66b, the main control device 101 basically executes a process for putting the first special figure winning device 33 into the receiving state. As a result, it becomes possible to win a prize in the first special figure winning device 33. Further, when the main control device 101 receives a signal corresponding to the detection of the game ball from the second trigger detection sensor 66c, the main control device 101 basically executes a process for putting the second special figure winning device 34 into the receiving state. As a result, it becomes possible to win a prize in the second special figure winning device 34.

The internal space of the branch winning device 37 is formed by assembling the base body 64 and the transparent cover 69 (see FIG. 3) back and forth. The transparent cover 69 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The transparent cover 69 forms a passage wall on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 in the branch passage 65. Further, the switching piece 67 exists at a position between the base body 64 and the transparent cover 69. The surface of the transparent cover 69 is exposed on the front side of the game board 24 as shown in FIG. More specifically, the transparent cover 69 is provided so that the surface of the transparent cover 69 is flush with the area around the transparent cover 69 on the board surface of the game board 24. That is, the surface of the transparent cover 69 constitutes a part of the game area PA. By providing the transparent cover 69 in this way, the game ball that has flowed into the branch winning device 37 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, the operating position of the switching piece 67 can also be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, it is also possible to visually recognize whether the game ball flowing into the branch winning device 37 is detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b or the second trigger detection sensor 66c from the front of the pachinko machine 10. However, since the drive unit 63 for the branch entrance and the drive unit 68 for switching are provided on the back side of the base body 64, they cannot be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The branch winning detection sensor 66a, the first trigger detection sensor 66b, and the second trigger detection sensor 66c are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10, but some or all of these detection sensors 66a to 66c are invisible. It may be configured as such.

The branch winning device 37 is attached to the game board 24 from the back side of the game board 24, and the screw fixing portion of the branch winning device 37 to the game board 24 exists on the back side of the game board 24. .. Therefore, in order to remove the branch winning device 37 from the game board 24, it is necessary to perform a screw fixing release operation from the back side of the game board 24. Further, the screw fixing portion is set so that the release operation for fixing the screws between the base body 64 and the transparent cover 69 can be performed when the branch winning device 37 is removed from the game board 24. Therefore, when separating the base body 64 and the transparent cover 69 for the maintenance of the branch winning device 37, it is necessary to first remove the branch winning device 37 from the back side of the game board 24. This makes it difficult to illegally remove the transparent cover 69 from the base body 64.

Next, the flow of the game ball in the right side area PA3 of the game area PA will be described. FIG. 8 is a front view of the game board 24 showing the right side region PA3 in an enlarged manner.

As described above, the right side region PA3 is provided with the first special figure winning device 33, the second special figure winning device 34, the through winning section 36, and the branch winning device 37. The first special figure winning device 33, the second special figure winning device 34, the through winning section 36, and the branch winning device 37 are all arranged at intermediate positions in the vertical direction of the right side region PA3, and further, the through winning section 36. Is arranged on the left side, the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37 is arranged on the center side in the horizontal direction, and the first special drawing winning device 33 and the second special drawing winning device 34 are arranged on the right side.

On the upstream side of the first special figure winning device 33, the second special figure winning device 34, the through winning unit 36, and the branch winning device 37 in the right side area PA3, the game ball that has flowed into the right side area PA3 from the upper area PA1 is passed through. A distribution unit 70 for sequentially distributing to the winning unit 36 side, the branch entrance 61 side of the branch winning device 37, and the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special drawing winning device 34 side is provided. .. The distribution unit 70 includes a first distribution mechanism 71 and a second distribution mechanism 72. The configuration of the first distribution mechanism 71 will be described. FIG. 9 is a side view of the first distribution mechanism 71 and a vertical sectional view around the first distribution mechanism 71. The configuration of the second distribution mechanism 72 is the same as the configuration of the first distribution mechanism 71, and in the following description, the first distribution mechanism 71 corresponds to the description of each member of the second distribution mechanism 72. The code of each member is used as it is.

As shown in FIG. 9, the first distribution mechanism 71 includes a distribution rotating body 81 for distributing the game balls flowing in from the upstream. 10 (a) to 10 (c) are front views of the rotating body 81 for distribution. As shown in FIGS. 10A to 10C, the distribution rotating body 81 includes a shaft portion 82, and the shaft portion 82 is located at the center position in the axial direction of the shaft portion 82 with respect to the shaft portion 82. The ball distribution portion 83 is integrally formed so as to project outward. The ball distribution portion 83 projects outward from the shaft portion 82 over the entire axis.

The rotating body 81 for distribution is arranged so that the axial direction of the shaft portion 82 is the lateral direction of the pachinko machine 10 and the horizontal direction, and the shaft portion 82 is received by a bearing portion (not shown). It is rotatably supported around the axial direction of the portion 82. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9, the shaft portion 82 of the distribution rotating body 81 exists behind the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the board surface of the game board 24, but the ball distribution of the distribution rotating body 81 A part of the portion 83 that exists in front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the shaft portion 82 projects forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24 through the opening 24d formed in the game board 24. Since the distance between the portion of the ball distribution portion 83 protruding forward of the pachinko machine 10 and the peripheral portion of the opening 24d is less than the radius of the gaming ball, the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area PA It is designed so as not to be sandwiched between the ball distribution portion 83 and the peripheral portion of the opening 24d.

A game ball flowing down the game area PA and guided above the ball distribution unit 83 collides with a portion of the ball distribution unit 83 protruding forward of the pachinko machine 10. .. Although the detailed configuration will be described later, the outer peripheral surface of the ball distribution portion 83 is formed so that the collision force from above is used as the rotational force of the distribution rotating body 81. Therefore, each time the game ball collides with the ball distribution unit 83 from above, the distribution rotating body 81 rotates in a predetermined direction. This predetermined direction is a counterclockwise direction when viewed in the state of FIG.

In this way, the distribution rotating body 81 rotates in a predetermined direction each time the game ball collides with the ball distribution unit 83 from above, but the distribution rotation occurs only by 120 ° due to the collision of one game ball. The rotation amount is limited so that the body 81 rotates, and the rotation position of the distribution rotating body 81 is maintained at the position where the rotation amount is limited. Specifically, the first distribution mechanism 71 includes a rotation control piece 84. The rotation control piece 84 is provided at a position on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the distribution rotating body 81. The rotation control piece 84 includes a shaft portion 85, and also includes a regulation plate portion 86 integrally formed so as to project in a direction orthogonal to the shaft portion 85. The rotation control piece 84 is arranged so that the axial direction of the shaft portion 85 is the same as the axial direction of the distribution rotating body 81, and the shaft portion 85 is received by a bearing portion (not shown). It is rotatably supported around the axial direction of 85.

The rotation control piece 84 is provided with a spring member 87 as an urging means for urging the rotation control piece 84. The rotation restricting piece 84 is urged by the spring member 87 to the side that rotates counterclockwise when viewed in the state of FIG. 9, but the restricting plate portion 86 hits the rotation stop member 88 from the original side in the urging direction. Further rotation of the rotation restricting piece 84 is prevented by the contact. The position where the regulation plate portion 86 abuts on the rotation stop member 88 from the original side in the urging direction is the initial position of the rotation restriction piece 84.

The ball distribution portion 83 of the distribution rotating body 81 so as to be able to abut on the regulation plate portion 86 of the rotation regulation piece 84 arranged at the initial position from the front side in the urging direction by the spring member 87. The contact protrusions 89a to 89c are integrally formed on the surface. The abutting protrusions 89a to 89c are provided at intervals of 120 ° when viewed in the rotation direction of the distribution rotating body 81. Incidentally, these contact projections 89a to 89c are provided at positions that do not interfere with the distribution of the game ball described later by the ball distribution unit 83.

The regulation plate portion 86 of the rotation regulation piece 84 arranged at the initial position exists on the passing trajectory of each of the contact projections 89a to 89c accompanying the rotation of the distribution rotating body 81. Therefore, when the rotating body 81 for distribution rotates in a predetermined direction, the contact protrusions 89a to 89c existing at positions close to the regulation plate portion 86 hit the regulation plate portion 86 from the original side in the rotation direction. Contact.

Here, the urging force for urging the rotation restricting piece 84 to the initial position is such that when one game ball collides with the ball distribution portion 83 from above, one contact protrusion 89a to 89c is a restricting plate portion. The abutting protrusions 89a to 89c can be pushed out in the rotational direction so that the abutting protrusions 89a to 89c can move to a position on the front side in the rotational direction with respect to the abutting protrusions 89a to 89c. The contact protrusions 89a to 89c arranged at the next position are set to a force that prevents further movement by abutting on the regulation plate portion 86 that has returned to the initial position. That is, when one game ball collides with the ball distribution portion 83 from above in the state of FIG. 9, the distribution rotating body 81 rotates in a predetermined direction due to the rotational force due to the collision, so that the contact projection 89a Pushes out the regulation plate portion 86. As a result, the rotation control piece 84 rotates in the counter-urgency direction from the initial position. After that, as the distribution rotating body 81 rotates in a predetermined direction, the contact projection 89a further moves in the predetermined direction, so that the contact projection 89a moves to a position where it does not abut on the regulation plate portion 86. Then, the rotation control piece 84 returns to the initial position. After that, the contact projection 89b located on the original side in the rotation direction in the predetermined direction abuts on the regulation plate portion 86 with respect to the contact projection 89a that was initially in contact with the regulation plate portion 86. At this time, since the rotational force of the distribution rotating body 81 due to the collision of one game ball is weakened to some extent, the distribution rotating body is brought into contact with the abutting protrusion 89b against the regulation plate portion 86. The rotational force of 81 is received by the rotation restricting piece 84. As a result, further rotation of the distribution rotating body 81 is prevented. Further, since the distribution rotating body 81 is formed so that the center of gravity exists at the center of rotation, the contact projection 89b abuts on the regulation plate portion 86 to further rotate the distribution rotating body 81. If is blocked, the ball will stand by at the blocked rotation position until a new game ball collides with the ball distribution unit 83.

With the above configuration, each time one game ball collides with the ball distribution unit 83 from above, the distribution rotating body 81 rotates by 120 ° and stands by at the position rotated by 120 °. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 10A to 10C, the outer peripheral surface of the ball distribution unit 83 has different ball vibrations at 120 ° intervals when viewed in the rotation direction of the distribution rotating body 81. Divisions 91 to 93 are formed. Then, at each stop position of the rotating body 81 for distribution at every 120 °, a portion where different ball distribution regions 91 to 93 are formed protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24. It becomes. Each ball distribution region 91 to 93 will be described below.

FIG. 10A shows a state in which the portion of the ball distribution unit 83 in which the first ball distribution region 91 is formed protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24. In the first ball distribution region 91, the flow direction of the game ball that has collided with the ball distribution unit 83 from above is changed to the left, and the force at the time of the collision of the game ball is applied to the rotation of the distribution rotating body 81. The left-facing guide portion 95 is integrally formed so as to change into a force. The left-facing guide portion 95 projects outward from the peripheral surface of the outer peripheral surface of the ball distribution portion 83. Further, the left-facing guiding portion 95 is formed continuously from the edge wall portion 95a extending around the axis along the right edge of the outer peripheral surface of the ball distribution portion 83 and the rotating body for distribution. When the 81 is rotated by the force of the game ball, it is provided with an inclined wall portion 95b that is present on the left edge side of the outer peripheral surface of the ball distribution portion 83 toward the rotation destination side. When a game ball flows into the position of the ball distribution portion 83 from above in a situation where the first ball distribution region 91 is present at the front position, the game ball is moved to the right by the edge wall portion 95a. It collides with the inclined wall portion 95b in a regulated state. By colliding with the inclined wall portion 95b, the game ball receives a drag force toward the left, changes the flow direction toward the left of the ball distribution portion 83, and is left of the ball distribution portion 83. It flows downward from the position of. Further, the rotating body 81 for distribution rotates by 120 ° in the counterclockwise direction when viewed in the state of FIG. 9 due to the collision force of the game ball received by the inclined wall portion 95b.

FIG. 10B shows a state in which the portion of the ball distribution unit 83 in which the second ball distribution region 92 is formed protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24. In the second ball distribution region 92, the flow direction of the game ball that has collided with the ball distribution unit 83 from above is maintained downward as it is, and the force at the time of the collision of the game ball is applied to the distribution rotating body 81. The central guide portion 96 is integrally formed so as to change to a rotational force. The central guiding portion 96 projects outward from the peripheral surface of the outer peripheral surface of the ball distribution portion 83. Further, the central guide portion 96 is a pair of edge wall portions 96a and 96b extending around the axis along each of the left edge and the right edge on the outer peripheral surface of the ball distribution portion 83, and the second ball distribution region 92. It is provided with an intermediate step portion 96c formed so as to project slightly outward at an intermediate position in the vertical direction. When the game ball flows into the position of the ball distribution portion 83 from above in the situation where the second ball distribution region 92 exists at the front position, the game ball is formed by the pair of left and right edge wall portions 96a and 96b. It collides with the intermediate stage 96c while the movement to the left and right is restricted. Although the game ball receives a drag toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 by colliding with the intermediate stage portion 96c, it is directed toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 by the window panel 17a arranged in front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the game board 24. The movement is restricted, and it flows down vertically as it is. Further, the rotating body 81 for distribution rotates by 120 ° in the counterclockwise direction when viewed in the state of FIG. 9 due to the collision force of the game ball received by the intermediate stage portion 96c.

FIG. 10C shows a state in which the portion of the ball distribution unit 83 in which the third ball distribution region 93 is formed protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24. In the third ball distribution region 93, the flow direction of the game ball that has collided with the ball distribution unit 83 from above is changed to the right, and the force at the time of the collision of the game ball is applied to the rotation of the distribution rotating body 81. The right-facing guiding portion 97 is integrally formed so as to change into a force. The right-facing guiding portion 97 projects outward from the peripheral surface of the outer peripheral surface of the ball distribution portion 83. Further, the right-facing guiding portion 97 is formed continuously from the edge wall portion 97a extending around the axis along the left edge on the outer peripheral surface of the ball distribution portion 83 and the rotating body for distribution. When the 81 is rotated by the force of the game ball, it is provided with an inclined wall portion 97b that is present on the right edge side of the outer peripheral surface of the ball distribution portion 83 toward the rotation destination side. When a game ball flows into the position of the ball distribution portion 83 from above in a situation where the third ball distribution region 93 exists in the front position, the game ball moves to the left by the edge wall portion 97a. It collides with the inclined wall portion 97b in a regulated state. By colliding with the inclined wall portion 97b, the game ball receives a drag force toward the right, changes the flow direction toward the right of the ball distribution portion 83, and is to the right of the ball distribution portion 83. It flows downward from the position of. Further, the rotating body 81 for distribution rotates by 120 ° in the counterclockwise direction when viewed in the state of FIG. 9 due to the collision force of the game ball received by the inclined wall portion 97b.

With the above configuration, each time one game ball is supplied to the ball distribution unit 83 of the first distribution mechanism 71, the distribution direction of the game ball is changed from the left side of the first distribution mechanism 71 to the left side of the first distribution mechanism 71. Vertically downward of the first distribution mechanism 71 → right of the first distribution mechanism 71 → left of the first distribution mechanism 71 → vertically downward of the first distribution mechanism 71 → right of the first distribution mechanism 71 → The changes are sequentially made in the order of left side of the first distribution mechanism 71 → ... That is, the game balls supplied to the ball distribution unit 83 of the first distribution mechanism 71 are distributed to the left of the first distribution mechanism 71 at a ratio of one in three, and one in three. Is distributed vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71, and is distributed to the right of the first distribution mechanism 71 at a ratio of 1 in 3.

As shown in FIG. 8, the first distribution mechanism 71 having the above configuration is provided in the most upstream portion of the right side region PA3. The position where the first distribution mechanism 71 is provided in the right side region PA3 is formed so that the center frame 40b provided so as to surround the symbol display device 41 in the variable display unit 40 projects to the right. As a result, the game balls flowing from the upper region PA1 to the right region PA3 always pass through, and the game balls pass through one by one. As a result, the game ball flowing from the upper region PA1 to the right region PA3 is always supplied to the ball distribution unit 83 of the first distribution mechanism 71. Then, as already explained, the game balls supplied to the ball distribution unit 83 of the first distribution mechanism 71 are distributed to the left side of the first distribution mechanism 71 at a ratio of one in three, and three of them are distributed. It is distributed vertically downward of the first distribution mechanism 71 at a ratio of one to three, and is distributed to the right of the first distribution mechanism 71 at a ratio of one to three.

The right region PA3 is provided with a first guide rail 99a for guiding the game ball distributed to the left of the first distribution mechanism 71 to the lower left position of the first distribution mechanism 71. A second distribution mechanism 72 is provided at a position where the game ball is guided by the first guide rail 99a, and the game ball is distributed to the left of the first distribution mechanism 71 and guided by the first guide rail 99a. Reliably reaches the second distribution mechanism 72.

The second distribution mechanism 72 has the same configuration as the first distribution mechanism 71 as described above. Therefore, each time one game ball is supplied to the ball distribution portion 83 of the second distribution mechanism 72 by the first plumb bob rail 99a, the distribution direction of the game ball is to the left of the second distribution mechanism 72. → Vertically downward of the second distribution mechanism 72 → Right of the second distribution mechanism 72 → Left of the second distribution mechanism 72 → Vertically downward of the second distribution mechanism 72 → Right of the second distribution mechanism 72 → The left side of the second distribution mechanism 72 → ... is changed in this order. That is, the game balls supplied from above to the ball distribution unit 83 of the second distribution mechanism 72 by the first lead rail 99a are distributed to the left side of the second distribution mechanism 72 at a ratio of one in three. , One in three is distributed vertically below the second distribution mechanism 72, and one in three is distributed to the right of the second distribution mechanism 72.

The right region PA3 is provided with a second guide rail 99b for guiding the game ball distributed to the left of the second distribution mechanism 72 to the lower left position of the second distribution mechanism 72. A through winning portion 36 is provided at a position where the game ball is guided by the second guide rail 99b, and the game ball distributed to the left of the second distribution mechanism 72 and guided by the second guide rail 99b is reliable. To win the through prize section 36. As described above, the through winning unit 36 has a through hole that penetrates in the vertical direction, and the game ball passes through the through hole in the vertical direction, so that the through winning unit 36 is awarded a prize. Then, the game ball that has passed through the through hole of the through winning portion 36 in the vertical direction is not discharged from the game area PA, and continues to flow down the game area PA as it is. In this case, since the game ball that has passed through the through winning section 36 flows vertically downward, the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37 existing on the right side of the through winning section 36, the first special figure winning device. It is not guided to 33 and the second special figure winning device 34.

The right region PA3 is provided with a third guide rail 99c for guiding the game ball distributed vertically below the second distribution mechanism 72 to a position vertically below the second distribution mechanism 72. A branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37 is provided at a position where the game ball is guided by the third guide rail 99c, and the branch entrance 61 is distributed vertically below the second distribution mechanism 72 and guided by the third guide rail 99c. The game ball surely wins the branch winning device 37 if the branch winning device 37 is in the open state. As described above, the game ball winning the branch winning device 37 is immediately detected by the branch winning detection sensor 66a, and then the first trigger detection sensor 66b and the second derivation existing on the downstream side of the first derivation region 65c. After being detected by any of the second trigger detection sensors 66c existing in the region 65d, the sensor is discharged to the back side of the game board 24. When the game ball is detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b, the first special figure winning device 33 is in the accepting state, and when the game ball is detected by the second trigger detection sensor 66c, the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state.

On the other hand, when the game ball is guided by the third guide rail 99c while the branch winning device 37 is closed, the game ball continues to flow down the game area PA without winning the branch winning device 37. do. In this case, since the game ball that has passed in front of the branch-side opening / closing member 62 of the branch winning device 37 flows vertically downward, the through winning section 36 existing on the side of the branch winning device 37, the first It is not guided to the special figure winning device 33 and the second special drawing winning device 34.

The right region PA3 is provided with a fourth guide rail 99d for guiding the game ball distributed to the right of the second distribution mechanism 72 to the lower right position of the second distribution mechanism 72. The first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction at a position where the game ball is guided by the fourth guide rail 99d. Further, the fourth guide rail 99d includes a game ball distributed vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71 by the first distribution mechanism 71 and a game ball distributed to the right of the first distribution mechanism 71. The first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are formed so as to be guided to a position where they are arranged side by side.

The first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction so that the first special figure winning device 33 faces upward. The passage portion 59a by the cover member 59 in the first special figure winning device 33 and the passage portion 59a by the cover member 59 in the second special figure winning device 34 are present on the same axis, and these passage portions 59a are fourth. It exists on the same axis as the exit portion of the guide rail 99d. Further, the distance between the exit portion of the fourth guide rail 99d and the entrance portion of the passage portion 59a of the first special drawing winning device 33 is less than one game ball, and the first special drawing winning device 33. The distance between the exit portion of the passage portion 59a and the entrance portion of the passage portion 59a of the second special figure winning device 34 is also less than one game ball. Therefore, when the game ball guided by the fourth guide rail 99d is surely guided to the passage portion 59a of the first special figure winning device 33 and the game ball does not win the first special figure winning device 33. The game ball is reliably guided to the passage portion 59a of the second special drawing winning device 34.

When the game ball is guided to the passage portion 59a of the first special figure winning device 33 by the fourth guide rail 99d when the first special figure winning device 33 is in the receiving state, the game ball is the first special figure. The winning device 33 will be won. Further, when the first special figure winning device 33 is in the non-accepted state and the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepted state, the game ball is entered into the passage portion 59a of the first special figure winning device 33 by the fourth guide rail 99d. Is guided, the game ball passes through the passage portion 59a of the first special figure winning device 33, flows into the passage portion 59a of the second special figure winning device 34, and flows into the second special figure winning device 34. You will win a prize.

On the other hand, when the game ball is guided by the fourth guide rail 99d in a situation where both the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are in the non-accepting state, the game ball is the first special figure. After passing through the passage portions 59a of both the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 without winning any of the drawing winning device 33 and the second special drawing winning device 34, the game area PA is used as it is. Continue to flow. In this case, the game ball that has passed through the passage portions 59a of both the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 will flow vertically downward, so that the first special figure winning device 33 and the first special figure winning device 33 2 It is not guided to the branch entrance 61 of the through winning unit 36 and the branch winning device 37 existing on the right side of the special figure winning device 34.

Next, a state in which the game ball is guided by the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 11A shows the timing at which the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71, and FIG. 11B shows the period during which the game ball is distributed to the left by the first distribution mechanism 71. FIG. 11 (c) shows a period in which the game ball is distributed vertically downward by the first distribution mechanism 71, and FIG. 11 (d) shows the game ball being distributed to the right by the first distribution mechanism 71. The period is shown, FIG. 11 (e) shows the timing at which the game ball is supplied to the second distribution mechanism 72, and FIG. 11 (f) shows the game ball being distributed to the left by the second distribution mechanism 72. The period is shown, FIG. 11 (g) shows the period in which the game ball is distributed vertically downward by the second distribution mechanism 72, and FIG. 11 (h) shows the game toward the right by the second distribution mechanism 72. Indicates the period during which the spheres are distributed.

As shown in FIG. 11A, the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t1. At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 11B, the state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a state of distributing the game ball toward the left. Therefore, the game ball supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 is distributed toward the left side of the first distribution mechanism 71. In this case, when the game ball targeted for distribution collides with the ball distribution unit 83 of the first distribution mechanism 71, the ball distribution unit 83 rotates by 120 °, and at the timing of t2, FIG. 11 As shown in (b) and FIG. 11 (c), the first distribution mechanism 71 changes from a state in which the game ball is distributed to the left to a state in which the game ball is distributed vertically downward. That is, when the game ball is distributed once in the first distribution mechanism 71, the distribution direction of the game ball by the first distribution mechanism 71 is changed to the next order.

The game ball distributed to the left of the first distribution mechanism 71 is guided by the first guide rail 99a provided in the game area PA. Since the second distribution mechanism 72 is provided at the guidance destination by the first guide rail 99a as described above, the game ball is mounted on the second distribution mechanism 72 at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 11 (e). Will be supplied. At the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 11 (f), the state of the second distribution mechanism 72 is a state of distributing the game ball toward the left. Therefore, the game ball supplied to the second distribution mechanism 72 is distributed toward the left side of the second distribution mechanism 72. In this case, when the game ball targeted for distribution collides with the ball distribution unit 83 of the second distribution mechanism 72, the ball distribution unit 83 rotates by 120 °, and at the timing of t3, FIG. 11 As shown in (f) and FIG. 11 (g), the second distribution mechanism 72 changes from a state in which the game ball is distributed to the left to a state in which the game ball is distributed vertically downward. That is, when the game ball is distributed once in the second distribution mechanism 72, the distribution direction of the game ball by the second distribution mechanism 72 is changed to the next order.

The game ball distributed to the left of the second distribution mechanism 72 is guided by the second guide rail 99b provided in the game area PA. Since the through winning section 36 is provided at the guidance destination by the second guide rail 99b as described above, this game ball will surely win the through winning section 36. When a prize is awarded to the through winning unit 36, the variable display of the pattern is started on the general drawing display unit 46.

Then, at the timing of t4, the game ball is supplied again to the first distribution mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. 11A. At the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 11C, the state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a state in which the game ball is distributed vertically downward. Therefore, the game ball supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 is distributed vertically downward of the first distribution mechanism 71. In this case, when the game ball targeted for distribution collides with the ball distribution unit 83 of the first distribution mechanism 71, the ball distribution unit 83 rotates by 120 °, and at the timing of t5, FIG. 11 As shown in (c) and FIG. 11 (d), the first distribution mechanism 71 changes from a state in which the game ball is distributed vertically downward to a state in which the game ball is distributed to the right. That is, when the game ball is distributed once in the first distribution mechanism 71, the distribution direction of the game ball by the first distribution mechanism 71 is changed to the next order. The game ball supplied vertically downward by the first distribution mechanism 71 is guided to the juxtaposed area of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 by the fourth guide rail 99d provided in the game area PA. At this timing, both the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are in the non-accepting state, so that both the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 can be used. Game balls do not win.

Then, at the timing of t6, the game ball is supplied again to the first distribution mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. 11A. At the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 11D, the state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a state of distributing the game ball toward the right. Therefore, the game ball supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 is distributed toward the right side of the first distribution mechanism 71. In this case, when the game ball targeted for distribution collides with the ball distribution unit 83 of the first distribution mechanism 71, the ball distribution unit 83 rotates by 120 °, and at the timing of t7, FIG. 11 As shown in (a) and FIG. 11 (d), the first distribution mechanism 71 changes from a state in which the game ball is distributed to the right to a state in which the game ball is distributed to the left. That is, when the game ball is distributed once in the first distribution mechanism 71, the distribution direction of the game ball by the first distribution mechanism 71 is changed to the next order. The game ball supplied to the right by the first distribution mechanism 71 is guided to the juxtaposed area of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 by the fourth guide rail 99d provided in the game area PA. At this timing, both the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are in the non-accepting state, so that both the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 can be used. Game balls do not win.

Then, at the timing of t8, the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 again as shown in FIG. 11A. At the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 11B, the state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a state of distributing the game ball toward the left. Therefore, the game ball supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 is distributed toward the left side of the first distribution mechanism 71. In this case, as in the case of the timing of t2, the first distribution mechanism 71 moves to the left at the timing of t9, as shown in FIGS. 11 (b) and 11 (c). It changes from a state in which the game balls are distributed toward the vertical direction to a state in which the game balls are distributed vertically downward.

The game ball distributed to the left of the first distribution mechanism 71 is guided by the first guide rail 99a, so that the game ball is connected to the second distribution mechanism 72 at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 11 (e). Is supplied. At the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 11 (g), the state of the second distribution mechanism 72 is a state in which the game ball is distributed vertically downward. Therefore, the game ball supplied to the second distribution mechanism 72 is distributed vertically downward of the second distribution mechanism 72. In this case, when the game ball targeted for distribution collides with the ball distribution unit 83 of the second distribution mechanism 72, the ball distribution unit 83 rotates by 120 °, and at the timing of t10, FIG. 11 As shown in (g) and FIG. 11 (h), the second distribution mechanism 72 changes from a state of distributing the game ball vertically downward to a state of distributing the game ball toward the right. That is, when the game ball is distributed once in the second distribution mechanism 72, the distribution direction of the game ball by the second distribution mechanism 72 is changed to the next order.

The game balls distributed vertically below the second distribution mechanism 72 are guided by the third guide rail 99c provided in the game area PA. As described above, the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37 is provided at the guidance destination by the third guide rail 99c. Further, in the case of any of the high probability states described later, when the game ball is supplied to the right area PA3 of the game area PA with the shortest firing cycle (specifically, 0.6 seconds), the timing of t9. By then, the variable display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 46 has been completed, and the branch winning device 37 is surely in the open state. Therefore, the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 three times after the game balls won in the through winning unit 36 are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 are the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second. The branch winning device 37 is in an open state at the timing of being guided to the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37 through the distribution mechanism 72, and a prize is generated for the branch winning device 37. The game ball that has won the branch winning device 37 is immediately detected by the branch winning detection sensor 66a, and the shortest firing cycle of the game ball (specifically, 0. It is detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b or the second trigger detection sensor 66c before a period shorter than 6 seconds) elapses.

After that, the same situation as the timing of t4 to the timing of t7 occurs at the timing of t11 to the timing of t14. As a result, the state of the first distribution mechanism 71 changes from the state of distributing the game ball vertically downward as shown in FIGS. 11 (c) and 11 (d) to the right side at the timing of t12. At the timing of t14, as shown in FIGS. 11 (b) and 11 (d), the state of distributing the game ball to the right changes to the state of distributing the game ball to the left. do. Further, both the game ball supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t11 and the game ball supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t13 are the juxtaposed areas of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34. Will be guided to. In this case, the game balls supplied to the second distribution mechanism 72 at the timing of t9 are the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t11, and the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 are juxtaposed areas of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34. Before being guided to, the branch winning device 37 has already won a prize and has been detected by either the first trigger detection sensor 66b or the second trigger detection sensor 66c. When the game ball is detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b, the first special figure winning device 33 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and when the game ball is detected by the second trigger detection sensor 66c, the second special figure is changed. Figure The winning device 34 changes from the closed state to the open state. Then, when the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are in the open state, they are closed from the open state on condition that two game balls have won a prize. Therefore, the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t11 and the timing of t13 and guided through the fourth guide rail 99d are the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34. Of these, the side that is open will win a prize. Since two game balls are awarded to the special figure winning devices 33 and 34, the transition condition to the closed state is satisfied, and the open state is changed to the closed state.

Then, at the timing of t15, the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 again as shown in FIG. 11A. At the timing of t15, as shown in FIG. 11B, the state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a state of distributing the game ball toward the left. Therefore, the game ball supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 is distributed toward the left side of the first distribution mechanism 71. In this case, as in the case of the timing of t2 and the timing of t9, the first distribution mechanism 71 has the timing of t16 as shown in FIGS. 11 (b) and 11 (c). Changes from a state in which the game ball is distributed to the left to a state in which the game ball is distributed vertically downward.

The game ball distributed to the left of the first distribution mechanism 71 is guided by the first guide rail 99a, so that the game ball is connected to the second distribution mechanism 72 at the timing of t16 as shown in FIG. 11 (e). Is supplied. At the timing of t16, as shown in FIG. 11 (h), the state of the second distribution mechanism 72 is a state of distributing the game ball toward the right. Therefore, the game ball supplied to the second distribution mechanism 72 is distributed toward the right side of the second distribution mechanism 72. In this case, when the game ball targeted for distribution collides with the ball distribution unit 83 of the second distribution mechanism 72, the ball distribution unit 83 rotates by 120 °, and at the timing of t17, FIG. 11 As shown in (f) and FIG. 11 (h), the second distribution mechanism 72 changes from a state in which the game ball is distributed to the right to a state in which the game ball is distributed to the left. That is, when the game ball is distributed once in the second distribution mechanism 72, the distribution direction of the game ball by the second distribution mechanism 72 is changed to the next order.

The game ball distributed to the right of the second distribution mechanism 72 is guided by the fourth guide rail 99d provided in the game area PA. As already described, the guide destinations of the fourth guide rail 99d have parallel areas of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34. In this case, at the timing when the game ball supplied to the second distribution mechanism 72 is guided to the juxtaposed region of the special figure winning devices 33, 34 at the timing of t16, these first special figure winning devices 33 and the second Since both of the special figure winning devices 34 are in the non-accepting state, no game ball is won in any of the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34.

However, the game ball supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t11 is placed in the juxtaposed area of the special figure winning devices 33, 34 before the special figure winning devices 33, 34 to be opened are opened. When guided, the game ball does not win the special figure winning devices 33 and 34. In this case, at the timing when the game ball supplied to the second distribution mechanism 72 is guided to the juxtaposed region of the special figure winning devices 33, 34 at the timing of t16, one of the special figure winning devices 33, 34 is still present. Since the game ball is in the open state, the game ball will win a prize in the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 in the open state. As a result, the detection timing of the game ball in the first trigger detection sensor 66b or the second trigger detection sensor 66c is delayed from the expected timing depending on the movement mode of the game ball in the branch winning device 37. Even if the transition of the winning devices 33 and 34 to the open state is delayed, the distribution state in the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 is before returning to the distribution state toward the through winning unit 36. In addition, it is possible to reliably generate a prize for two game balls, which is the maximum number of prizes, in the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 that are the targets of opening.

After that, the same situation as the timing of t4 to the timing of t7 and the timing of t11 to t14 occurs from the timing of t18 to the timing of t21. As a result, the state of the first distribution mechanism 71 changes from the state of distributing the game ball vertically downward as shown in FIGS. 11 (c) and 11 (d) to the right side at the timing of t19. At the timing of t21, as shown in FIGS. 11 (b) and 11 (d), the state of distributing the game ball to the right changes to the state of distributing the game ball to the left. do.

In this case, all of these game balls will be guided to the juxtaposed area of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34. At this induced timing, both the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are in the non-accepting state, so that the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device are in a non-accepting state. No game ball wins in any of the 34.

Here, the first distribution mechanism 71 sequentially changes the distribution state of the game balls each time the game balls are supplied, but the distribution state makes one round by supplying three game balls. Similarly, in the second distribution mechanism 72, the distribution state of the game ball is sequentially changed each time the game ball is supplied, but the distribution state makes one round by supplying three game balls. Further, only the game balls distributed to the left by the first distribution mechanism 71 are supplied to the second distribution mechanism 72. Then, in order for the combination of the distribution states of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 to make one round, it is necessary to supply nine game balls to the first distribution mechanism 71. Speaking in the state of FIG. 11, the timing of t21 is the timing when nine game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 counting from the timing of t1, and the first distribution mechanism is at the timing of t21. By changing the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t22 by the game ball supplied to 71, the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 becomes the distribution state at the timing of t1. At the timing of t22, the distribution state of the second distribution mechanism 72 is also the distribution state at the timing of t1. That is, in any of the high-probability states described later, a winning cycle of winning the through winning unit 36 → winning the branch winning device 37 → winning the first special figure winning device 33 or the second special figure winning device 34 occurs. In order to make it happen, it is necessary to supply nine game balls to the right area PA3.

In this case, the number of prize balls for one game ball to the first special figure winning device 33, the second special figure winning device 34, and the branch winning device 37 is three. Further, when the first special drawing winning device 33 and the second special drawing winning device 34 are opened, the winning of two game balls is generated and the second special drawing winning device 34 is closed. Furthermore, when the game balls are supplied to the right region PA3 with the shortest firing cycle (specifically, 0.6 seconds), within the range of the nine game balls for generating the winning cycle. After the game ball that will win the branch winning device 37, there will be two game balls that will win the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 that are in the open state. As a result, in any of the high-probability states described later, the nine game balls for generating the winning cycle generate a winning of one game ball in the branch winning device 37, and the game is opened. It is possible to generate a prize for two game balls in the special figure winning devices 33 and 34, and in this case, nine game balls are paid out. Therefore, it is possible to continue the above-mentioned winning cycle without reducing the number of game balls possessed by the player.

As shown in FIG. 8, the second distribution mechanism 72 is provided in the guidance passage by the fourth guide rail 99d for guiding the game balls distributed by the first distribution mechanism 71 to the juxtaposed area of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34. The passage length dimension of the passage region below is set larger than the passage length dimension of the guidance passage by the third guide rail 99c for guiding the game ball distributed by the second distribution mechanism 72 to the branch entrance 61. ing. As a result, from the time when the game ball distributed vertically downward by the first distribution mechanism 71 passes through the lateral position of the second distribution mechanism 72 until it reaches the juxtaposed area of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34. It is possible to secure the time required for the game ball to be longer than the time required for the game balls distributed vertically downward by the second distribution mechanism 72 to win a prize at the branch entrance 61. As a result, it is possible to secure a long minimum period required for the game ball to reach the juxtaposed area of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 after the winning of the branch winning device 37 is generated.

Even if a game ball enters the branch winning device 37, the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 are in the accepting state until the game ball is detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b or the second trigger detection sensor 66c. There is no. In this case, since the shortest period required for the game ball to reach the juxtaposed area of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 after the winning to the branch winning device 37 is generated is secured for a long time, the branch winning device is secured. By the time the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 reach the juxtaposed area of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 in the order following the game balls to be won in 37, one of the special figure winnings It is possible to ensure that the transition to the acceptance state is completed in the devices 33 and 34.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 101 that controls the main control of the game is mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24). The main control device 101 has a main control board housed in a board box. The substrate box may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening, or may be provided with a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are inseparably bonded, and a bonding portion that requires destruction of a predetermined portion at the time of separation is configured, or an adhesive layer remains on the bonding target at the time of peeling. It is conceivable that a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of what has been done is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box can be considered.

The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main control device 101. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 102 made of a transparent synthetic resin, and a payout mechanism unit 103 and a control device collective unit 104 are attached to the back pack 102.

The payout mechanism unit 103 includes a tank 105 in which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 106 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 105. The game ball paid out from the payout device 106 is discharged to the upper plate or the lower plate through the payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 106. The payout mechanism unit 103 is provided with, for example, a back pack board having a power switch for turning on and off the power supply while supplying a main power supply of 24 volt AC.

The control device collective unit 104 generates and outputs predetermined electric power required by the payout control device 107 having a function of controlling the payout device 106 and various control devices, and is accompanied by the operation of the launch operation device 28 by the player. It is equipped with a power supply / launch control device 108 for controlling the launch of a game ball. The payout control device 107 and the power supply / launch control device 108 are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction so that the payout control device 107 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 101 includes a main control board 111 that controls the main control of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 115 that monitors the power supply. The MPU 112 is mounted on the main control board 111. The MPU 112 is a ROM 113 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 112, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 113 is executed. A certain RAM 114, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built-in. It is not essential that the ROM 113 and the RAM 114 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 112, and each may be individually chipped. This also applies to MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 101.

The MPU 112 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power failure monitoring board 115 provided in the main control device 101 is connected to the input side of the MPU 112, and a payout control device 107 is connected to the input side. A power supply / emission control device 108 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 115, and power is supplied to the MPU 112 via the power failure monitoring board 115.

Various sensors such as various prize detection sensors 32a, 35c, 36a, 54, 66a, 66b, 66c (hereinafter, also referred to as various prize detection sensors 32a to 66c) are connected to the input side of the MPU 112. The various winning detection sensors 32a to 66c include the general winning section 31, the first special drawing normal winning section 32, the first special drawing winning device 33, the second special drawing winning device 34, the special electric winning device 35, the through winning section 36, and the like. A detection sensor provided in a winning-corresponding ball-winning section such as a branch winning device 37 is included, and a winning determination is made for each winning-winning ball-winning section in the MPU 112. Further, in the MPU 112, various lottery is executed based on the winning of the first special drawing normal winning section 32, the first special drawing winning device 33, the second special drawing winning device 34, or the through winning section 36.

A payout control device 107, a power failure monitoring board 115, and a voice emission control device 121 are connected to the output side of the MPU 112. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 107 based on the winning determination result for the winning ball corresponding to the prize. Various commands such as fluctuation commands, type commands, and opening commands are output to the voice emission control device 121. Details of these various commands will be described later.

On the output side of the MPU 112, a drive unit 56a for winning a first special figure and a second special figure winning device 34 for operating the first special figure winning device 33 between the accepted state and the non-accepted state are received. 2nd special figure winning drive unit 56b for operating between A branch entrance drive unit 63 for opening and closing the side opening / closing member 62, a switching drive unit 68 for operating the switching piece 67 of the branch winning device 37, a special figure unit 45, and a normal drawing display unit 46 are connected. ing. Incidentally, the special figure unit 45 is provided with a first special figure display unit 45a, a second special figure display unit 45b, a first special figure hold display unit 45c, and a second special figure hold display unit 45d. Are all connected to the output side of the MPU 112. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 111, and the MPU 112 executes drive control of various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

That is, when the opening condition of the branch winning device 37 is satisfied, the MPU 112 executes the drive control of the branch entrance drive unit 63 so that the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37 is opened, and the switching piece. The drive control of the switching drive unit 68 is executed in the MPU 112 so that the 67 executes a predetermined operation described later. Further, when the game ball is detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b of the branch winning device 37, the driving unit for the first special drawing winning is set in the MPU 112 so that the first special drawing winning device 33 is in the accepting state. The drive control of 56a is executed. Further, when the game ball is detected by the second trigger detection sensor 66c of the branch winning device 37, the driving unit for the second special drawing winning is set in the MPU 112 so that the second special drawing winning device 34 is in the accepting state. The drive control of 56b is executed. Further, in the open / close execution mode, the drive control of the special electric drive unit 35b is executed in the MPU 112 so that the special electric winning device 35 is opened / closed. Further, during the game round, the display control of the special figure unit 45 is executed in the MPU 112. Further, when a prize is won in the through winning unit 36, the display control of the normal drawing display unit 46 is executed in the MPU 112.

The power failure monitoring board 115 relays between the main control board 111 and the power supply / emission control device 108, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / emission control device 108. The payout control device 107 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 106 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 101.

The power supply / launch control device 108 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the operating power required for each of the main control board 111, the payout control device 107, and the like is generated, and the generated operating power is supplied. By the way, the power supply / emission control device 108 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor, and even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply unit for power failure is mainly used. Power for storage retention is supplied to the RAM 114 of the control device 101. Further, the power supply / launch control device 108 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 27, and the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

The voice emission control device 121 includes a voice emission control board 122 on which the MPU 123 is mounted. The MPU 123 is a ROM 124 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 123, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 124 is executed. A certain RAM 125, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are built-in.

The MPU 123 determines the content of the effect to be executed in the game times, the opening / closing execution mode, and the like, based on the command received from the main control device 101. Then, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 18a provided on the front door frame 14 is performed, and the sound output control of the speaker unit 18b provided on the front door frame 14 is performed so that the operation corresponding to the determined content is performed. I do.

The MPU 123 is electrically connected to the display control device 126. The MPU 123 transmits to the display control device 126 a command including the content of the effect determined based on the command received from the main control device 101 and a command including the content of the notification corresponding to the command received from the main control device 101. The display control device 126 executes the display control of the symbol display device 41 based on the command received from the MPU 123 of the voice emission control device 121.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery with MPU 112 of the main control device 101>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery with the MPU 112 of the main control device 101 will be described with reference to FIG.

The MPU 112 uses various counter information during the game to draw a winning lottery, set the display of the first special figure display unit 45a, set the display of the second special figure display unit 45b, set the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, and so on. The display of the figure display unit 46 is set, and specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, the hit random number counter C1 used for the lottery for the occurrence of hits and the jackpot used for determining the jackpot type. The type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery when the symbol display device 41 deviates and fluctuates, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, and each special figure display unit. The variable type counter CS for determining the display duration in the 45a and 45b and the symbol display device 41 is used. Further, the normal electric random number counter C4 used for lottery as to whether or not to open the branch winning device 37 in the low probability state described later is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the lottery counter area 131 of the RAM 114.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 has won a prize in the first special figure normal winning unit 32, the first special figure winning device 33, or the second special figure winning device 34. In this case, it is stored in the special figure holding area 132. The special figure holding area 132 includes a first special drawing holding area 133, a second special drawing holding area 134, and an execution area 135 for special drawing.

The first special figure holding area 133 includes a first area 133a, a second area 133b, a third area 133c, and a fourth area 133d, and is attached to the first special figure normal winning unit 32 or the first special drawing winning device 33. Each numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the areas 133a to 133d as the reserved information on the special figure side according to the winning history.

In this case, in the first area 133a to the fourth area 133d, when the first special figure normal winning unit 32 or the first special figure winning device 33 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first area 133a → Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of the second area 133b → the third area 133c → the fourth area 133d. By providing the four areas 133a to 133d in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls to the first special figure normal winning unit 32 or the first special figure winning device 33 can be reserved and stored. It has become.

The number of items that can be stored in the first special figure holding area 133 is not limited to four, and may be arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as two, three, or five or more. , May be singular.

The second special figure holding area 134 includes a first area 134a, a second area 134b, a third area 134c, and a fourth area 134d, and a winning random number counter is provided according to the winning history of the second special drawing winning device 34. The numerical information of C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the areas 134a to 134d as the reserved information on the special figure side.

In this case, in the first area 134a to the fourth area 134d, when the winning of the second special figure winning device 34 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area 134a → the second area 134b → the third area 134c → Each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the fourth area 134d. By providing the four areas 134a to 134d in this way, up to four winning histories of the game ball to the second special figure winning device 34 can be reserved and stored.

The number of items that can be stored in the second special figure holding area 134 is not limited to four, and may be arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as two, three, or five or more. , May be singular.

The execution area 135 for the special figure stores the reserved information for the target for performing the hit / miss judgment, the distribution judgment, etc. for the special figure when the variable display is started by any of the special figure display units 45a and 45b. It is an area. Specifically, when the variable display of the first special figure display unit 45a is started, the hold information stored in the first area 133a of the first special figure hold area 133 moves to the execution area 135 for the special figure. Will be done. On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special figure display unit 45b is started, the hold information stored in the first area 134a of the second special figure hold area 134 is moved to the execution area 135 for the special figure.

The information corresponding to the normal electric random number counter C4 is stored in the execution area 136 for the normal drawing provided in the RAM 114 when the through winning unit 36 is won. The execution area 136 for the normal figure is the normal electric random number counter C4 referred to in the lottery process of whether or not to open the branch winning device 37 when the through winning unit 36 is won in the low probability state described later. This is the area where numerical information is stored. In the execution area 136 for the normal drawing, when a prize is generated in the through winning unit 36 during the winning valid period in which the through winning unit 36 is valid in the low probability state described later, the normal electric random number counter C4 Numerical information of is stored.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

First, the hit random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 599, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. In particular, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the first special figure holding area 133 of the special figure holding area 132 at the timing when the game ball wins the first special figure normal winning unit 32 or the first special figure winning device 33. Then, the game ball is stored in the second special figure holding area 134 of the special figure holding area 132 at the timing when the game ball wins the second special figure winning device 34. Then, the hit / fail determination process is performed using the value of the stored random number counter C1.

The value of the random number that is won in the winning / failing determination process is stored in the ROM 113 as a winning / failing table. In the win / fail table, a jackpot result and a miss result are set as the win / fail result. The jackpot result is a winning / failing result that triggers a transition to an opening / closing execution mode in which the special electric winning device 35 is controlled to open / close, and a transition to a winning / failing lottery mode and a support mode. The deviation result is a winning / failing result that does not trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode and also does not trigger the transition to the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode.

As the pass / fail table, there are a pass / fail table for the low probability mode and a pass / fail table for the high probability mode. That is, the pachinko machine 10 is acquired based on the hold information acquired based on the winning of the first special drawing winning unit 32 or the first special drawing winning device 33 and the winning of the second special drawing winning device 34. The same winning / failing table is referred to by the pending information, and in any case, there are a low probability mode and a high probability mode as the lottery mode in the winning / losing lottery.

Specifically, each hit / fail table is described in detail. In the hit / miss table for the low probability mode, the value of the random number that results in the big hit is two (for example, "5" and "305"). Other than that, it is a random number value that results in a deviation. In the hit / fail table for the high probability mode, the number of random numbers that result in big hits is set to be larger than in the case of the hit / miss table for the low probability mode, and specifically, 20 (for example, "5", "34", "65", "130", "163", "192", "220", "245", "276", "305", "334", "365", "392", "420" , "470", "495", "520", "558", "575", "599"). In this case, the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that wins the big hit in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that wins the big hit in the high probability mode.

If the probability of a jackpot result is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and values of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary, and in the situation of the low probability mode, the jackpot result is obtained. The value group of the winning random number counter C1 may or may not be included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 in which the big hit is won in the high probability mode. ..

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the first special figure holding area 133 of the special figure holding area 132 at the timing when the game ball wins the first special figure normal winning unit 32 or the first special figure winning device 33. Then, when the game ball wins the second special figure winning device 34, it is stored in the second special figure holding area 134 of the special figure holding area 132. Then, the distribution determination process is performed using the value of the stored jackpot type counter C2.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of jackpot results are set, and each of these jackpot results is (1) the contents of the opening / closing execution mode, (2) the contents of the winning / failing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode is completed, and (3) opening / closing. At least one of the three contents, that is, the contents of the support mode after the end of the execution mode, is different.

The opening / closing execution mode is a gaming state in which a prize can be won in the special electric winning device 35 by executing the opening / closing control of the special electric winning device 35. In the open / close execution mode, the round game is executed a predetermined number of times. The round game means that the opening times in which the special electric winning device 35 is opened are executed a predetermined number of times up to a predetermined special electric opening period, and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls are executed in the special electric winning device. It is a game that continues until one of the conditions of winning a prize in 35 is satisfied. Specifically, the upper limit of the number of round games in the open / close execution mode is set to 16, and in each round game, the special electric winning device 35, which has a special electric opening period of 29 sec and an upper limit of 10 pieces, is opened by 1. Only executed once. In this case, as described above, in the situation where the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. Since it is controlled, the special electric opening period in each round game is longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of one round game. Therefore, if the game balls aiming at winning the special electric winning device 35 are normally launched, the number of game balls equal to or larger than the upper limit number will be won in the special electric winning device 35 in each round game. Then, every time a prize is awarded to the special electric winning device 35, the number of game balls corresponding to the special electric winning device 35 is paid out. Therefore, when the transition to the open / close execution mode occurs, the player is given the benefit of increasing the number of game balls that can be used by the player.

The support mode is a type of gaming state that determines the frequency with which the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is executed and the execution mode of the opening / closing control when a prize is won to the through winning unit 36. As the support mode, a low frequency support mode, a first high frequency support mode, and a second high frequency support mode are set. In the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode, the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is executed more frequently in response to the occurrence of a prize in the through winning unit 36 than in the low-frequency support mode.

Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode, the numerical information of the Fuden random number counter C4 is acquired when a prize is won in the through winning unit 36, and the acquired numerical information is the numerical information corresponding to the open winning. In this case, the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is executed. The probability of winning the open prize is arbitrary, but is set to, for example, 1/20. Further, in the low frequency support mode, the transition to the open state of the branch winning device 37 occurs only once, and the opening continuation period of the branch winning device 37 at the opening times is a short period equal to or less than the firing cycle of the game ball. It is set to 1 second. Therefore, even if the through winning unit 36 is won in the low frequency support mode and the open winning is achieved, the probability that the branch winning device 37 will be won is low. Further, as already explained, even if a prize is generated in the through winning unit 36 and an open winning is achieved, the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is not immediately started, but the winning in the through winning unit 36 is an opportunity. The opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is started when the variation display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 46 is completed. In this case, the variable display period of the variable display of the pattern is constant at 0.7 seconds.

In the first high-frequency support mode, when a prize is won in the through winning unit 36, the open lottery process is not executed, and the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is surely executed. Further, in the first high-frequency support mode, the transition to the open state of the branch winning device 37 occurs only once, and the opening continuation period of the branch winning device 37 in the opening times is the firing cycle of the game ball × n (n is). It is set to 0.8 seconds, which is a long term of 1 or more). Therefore, when a prize is given to the through winning unit 36 in the first high frequency support mode, there is a high probability that a prize will be given to the branch winning device 37. The open state of the branch winning device 37 ends when one game ball wins the branch winning device 37 even if the opening continuation period has not elapsed.

As described above, the branch winning device 37 is provided with the switching piece 67, and when the switching piece 67 is arranged at the retracted position, the game ball winning the branch winning device 37 is sent to the first trigger detection sensor 66b. When the switching piece 67 is arranged at the guidance position, the game ball that has won the branch winning device 37 is detected by the second trigger detection sensor 66c. In this configuration, when the switching piece 67 is in a state where the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is executed, the switching waiting period (specifically, 0.9 seconds) from the start timing of the first opening of the branch winning device 37. Is held in the retracted position until the evacuation position elapses, and after the switching standby period elapses, the retracted position is switched to the guided position and held in the guided position. In the case of such a configuration, in the first high-frequency support mode, the open state of the branch winning device 37 is started while the switching piece 67 is held in the retracted position, and the opening continuation period of the branch winning device 37 elapses. The switching piece 67 is held in the retracted position until the timing after the timing. Furthermore, in the first high-frequency support mode, even if a prize is awarded to the branch winning device 37 at the timing when the opening continuation period of the branch winning device 37 elapses, the switching piece 67 holds the game ball in the retracted position. It passes through the switching position of the game ball by the switching piece 67 within the range of the specified period. Therefore, the game ball that has won the branch winning device 37 in the first high-frequency support mode is surely detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b, and the game ball is detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b. The first special figure winning device 33 is opened.

Further, even if a prize is won in the through winning unit 36, the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is not immediately started, but in the general drawing display unit 46 started with the winning in the through winning unit 36. When the variation display of the pattern is completed, the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is started. In this case, in the first high-frequency support mode, the variation display period of the pattern is constant at 1.5 seconds, which is a time longer than twice the firing cycle of the game ball. The details will be described later, but since this fluctuation display period is set to 1.5 seconds, the game ball is supplied to the right region PA3 with the shortest firing cycle (specifically, 0.6 seconds). In, the game balls in the order three times after the game balls winning in the through winning unit 36 are branched at the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37 by the first distribution mechanism 71, the second distribution mechanism 72, and the third guide rail 99c. The branch winning device 37 is in the open state at the timing of being guided to.

In the second high-frequency support mode, when a prize is won in the through winning unit 36, the open lottery process is not executed, and the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is surely executed. Further, in the second high frequency support mode, the transition to the open state of the branch winning device 37 occurs twice, and in the first opening time, the opening continuation period of the branch winning device 37 is the short period (0.1 seconds) described above. ), And in the second opening time, the opening continuation period of the branch winning device 37 is set to the above-mentioned long period (0.8 seconds). Therefore, the probability that the branch winning device 37 will be won in the first opening round is low, and the probability that the branch winning device 37 will be won in the second opening round is high. The open state of the branch winning device 37 ends when one game ball wins the branch winning device 37 even if the opening continuation period has not elapsed. In this case, if a prize is awarded to the branch winning device 37 in the first opening round, the second opening round is not executed. Between the first opening time and the second opening time, a closing continuation period in which the branch winning device 37 is maintained in the closed state is set, and this closing continuation period is 0.8, which is the same as the above-mentioned long period. It is set to seconds.

As described above, when the switching piece 67 of the branch winning device 37 is in a state where the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is executed, the switching waiting period (specifically, the switching waiting period) from the start timing of the first opening of the branch winning device 37. It is held in the retracted position until 0.9 seconds) elapses, and after the switching standby period elapses, it is switched from the retracted position to the guided position and held in the guided position. In the case of such a configuration, in the second high-frequency support mode, the branch winning device 37 is started in the second open state during the period in which the switching piece 67 is switched to the guiding position and held in the guiding position, and the switching piece 67 is held in the guiding position. The switching piece 67 is held at the induction position until the timing after the timing when the opening continuation period in the second open state elapses. Furthermore, in the second high-frequency support mode, even if a prize is awarded to the branch winning device 37 at the timing when the opening continuation period of the second open state elapses, the switching piece 67 of the game ball is in the guidance position. It passes through the switching position of the game ball by the switching piece 67 within the holding period. Therefore, the game ball that has won the branch winning device 37 in the second high-frequency support mode is surely detected by the second trigger detection sensor 66c, and the game ball is detected by the second trigger detection sensor 66c. Then, the second special figure winning device 34 is opened.

Further, even if a prize is won in the through winning unit 36, the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is not immediately started, but in the general drawing display unit 46 started with the winning in the through winning unit 36. When the variation display of the pattern is completed, the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is started. In this case, in the second high-frequency support mode, the variable display period of the pattern is constant at 0.7 seconds, which is a shorter time than in the first high-frequency support mode. Although the details will be described later, this fluctuation display period is set to 0.7 seconds, and the opening continuation period of the first opening time is 0.1 in the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 in the second high frequency support mode. Since the closing duration from the end of the first opening round to the start of the second opening round is set to 0.8 seconds, the shortest firing cycle (specifically, In the state where the game balls are supplied to the right area PA3 in (0.6 seconds), the game balls in the order three times after the game balls that win the through winning unit 36 are the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second swing. The branch winning device 37 is in the open state by the second opening turn at the timing of being guided to the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37 by the minute mechanism 72 and the third guide rail 99c.

The distribution destination of the type of the jackpot result with respect to the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the ROM 113 as a distribution table. The contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 (a) and 14 (b).

As shown in FIGS. 14A and 14B, the distribution table shows the types of jackpot results: low accuracy response result, 8R first high accuracy response result, and 8R second high accuracy response result. The correspondence result and the second high-accuracy correspondence result of 16R are set. FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each jackpot result.

In the low probability response result, the open / close execution mode is set in which eight round games occur. Further, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the low probability mode is set regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the shift to the open / close execution mode. In addition, this low-probability mode continues until the next jackpot result is reached and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode. Further, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the low frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before the shift to the open / close execution mode. This low frequency support mode will continue until the next big hit result and the resulting open / close execution mode. The game state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode is the low probability state. Further, in the open / close execution mode, the low frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before and after the shift to the open / close execution mode.

In the first high accuracy correspondence result of 8R, it becomes the open / close execution mode in which eight round games occur. Further, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode is set regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode shift. In addition, this high-probability mode continues until the next jackpot result is reached and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode. Further, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the first high-frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before the shift to the open / close execution mode. This first high-frequency support mode results in a big hit next, and continues until it shifts to the open / close execution mode. The winning / failing lottery mode is the high-probability mode, the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode, and the gaming state is the first high-probability state.

In the second high accuracy correspondence result of 8R, it becomes an open / close execution mode in which eight round games occur. Further, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode is set regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode shift. In addition, this high-probability mode continues until the next jackpot result is reached and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode. Further, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the second high-frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before the shift to the open / close execution mode. This second high-frequency support mode will continue until the next jackpot result is reached and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode. The winning / failing lottery mode is the high-probability mode, the support mode is the second high-frequency support mode, and the gaming state is the second high-probability state.

In the second high accuracy correspondence result of 16R, the opening / closing execution mode in which 16 round games are generated is set. Further, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode is set regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode shift. In addition, this high-probability mode continues until the next jackpot result is reached and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode. Further, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the second high-frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before the shift to the open / close execution mode. This second high-frequency support mode will continue until the next jackpot result is reached and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode.

As the distribution table, as shown in FIGS. 14 (a) and 14 (b), the distribution of the reserved information acquired based on the winning of the first special figure normal winning unit 32 or the first special drawing winning device 33. The distribution table for the first special figure used in the minute determination process and the second special figure used in the distribution determination process of the reserved information acquired based on the winning of the second special figure winning device 34. The distribution table and is set.

Specifically, each distribution table will be described. As shown in FIG. 14A, the distribution table for the first special figure has low accuracy correspondence results and 8R as the types of jackpot results to be distributed. The first high-accuracy correspondence result of 8R, the second high-accuracy correspondence result of 8R, and the second high-accuracy correspondence result of 16R are set. In the distribution table for the first special figure, "0 to 19" corresponds to the low accuracy correspondence result, "20 to 59" corresponds to the first high accuracy correspondence result of 8R, and "60". "-89" corresponds to the second high-accuracy correspondence result of 8R, and "90-99" corresponds to the second high-accuracy correspondence result of 16R. In the case of the distribution table for the first special figure, if the jackpot is won, the probability of achieving a low probability response result is 20%, and the probability of achieving the first high probability response result of 8R is 40%. , The probability of achieving the second high-accuracy response result of 8R is 30%, and the probability of achieving the second high-accuracy response result of 16R is 10%.

Open / close execution is executed when the low accuracy response result, the 1st high accuracy response result of 8R or the 2nd high accuracy response result of 8R is obtained based on the winning of the 1st special figure normal winning unit 32 or the 1st special figure winning device 33. In the mode, round games are performed up to eight times, and in each round game, the special electric winning device 35 is opened and closed once. That is, when any of the low accuracy response result, the 1st high accuracy response result of 8R, and the 2nd high accuracy response result of 8R, the operation mode of the special electric winning device 35 in the open / close execution mode is apparently the same. Further, in the game times when these game results are obtained, although the stop results different from each other are displayed on the first special figure display unit 45a, the display area is set larger than that of the first special figure display unit 45a. In the symbol display device 41, the stop result is displayed in an indistinguishable manner. Specifically, in any of the above game results, the symbol display device 41 stops and displays the same even-numbered symbol combination on any of the effective lines. In addition, in the open / close execution mode triggered by either the low accuracy response result, the 1st high accuracy response result of 8R, or the 2nd high accuracy response result of 8R, any jackpot result is triggered until the ending period is started. The effect is executed in a manner in which it is not possible to distinguish whether the mode is the open / close execution mode. As a result, when the open / close execution mode in which the eight round games are executed occurs, the player expects to shift to the first high probability state or the second high probability state after the end of the open / close execution mode. While playing the game, the game is played while expecting that the player is in the second high-probability state, which is advantageous for the player, among the first high-probability state and the second high-probability state. Become. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 14B, in the distribution table for the second special figure, a low accuracy correspondence result and a second high accuracy correspondence result of 16R are set as the types of jackpot results to be distributed. ing. In the distribution table for the second special figure, "0 to 19" corresponds to the low accuracy correspondence result, and "20 to 99" corresponds to the second high accuracy correspondence result of 16R. In the case of the distribution table for the second special figure, the probability of achieving a low probability response result is 20% and the probability of achieving a second high probability response result of 16R is 80% when a big hit is won. ..

In the distribution table for the first special figure and the distribution table for the second special figure, the probability that the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode is the same when the big hit is won. On the other hand, the probability that the open / close execution mode in which the round game occurs 16 times is generated in the distribution table for the second special figure is higher than that in the distribution table for the first special figure. Furthermore, the probability of the second high-accuracy response result, which triggers the transition to the second high-probability state, is also higher in the distribution table for the second special figure than in the distribution table for the first special figure. Therefore, the type of jackpot result that can be selected when a jackpot is won is larger than the case where a prize is generated in the first special figure normal winning unit 32 or the first special figure winning device 33 and an internal lottery is performed. , It is more advantageous for the player when the prize is generated in the second special figure winning device 34 and the internal lottery is performed.

The winning mode of the game ball in the first high probability state and the second high probability state will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. First, the winning mode of the game ball in the first high probability state will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 (a1) to 16 (f1). 16 (a1) shows the timing when the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 of the right side region PA3, FIG. 16 (b1) shows the timing of winning the through winning unit 36, and FIG. 16 (c1) shows the winning timing. FIG. 16 (d1) shows a period during which the branch winning device 37 is in an open state, and FIG. 16 (e1) shows a winning timing for the branch winning device 37. FIG. 16 (f1) shows a period in which the switching piece 67 of the branch winning device 37 is arranged at the induction position.

By continuously operating the launch operation device 28 in a situation where the game ball is stored in the upper plate of the upper bulging portion 19a, the game ball can be released in the shortest firing cycle (specifically, 0.6 seconds). It is supplied to the game area PA. In this case, if the amount of operation by the player of the launch operation device 28 is the maximum amount of operation, the game ball is supplied to the right area PA3, but the game ball supplied to the right area PA3 has already been described. All of them are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 as described above. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 16 (a1), at each of the timing of t1, the timing of t3, the timing of t4, the timing of t6, and the timing of t8, the game ball is sent to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle. Will be supplied.

At the timing of t1, each distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 is a distribution state for guiding the game ball to the through winning unit 36, so that the first distribution is performed at the timing of t1. The game ball supplied to the mechanism 71 wins the through winning section 36 at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 16 (b1). As a result, as shown in FIG. 16 (c1), the variable display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 46 is started at the timing of t2. The variable display period of this variable display of the pattern is 1.5 seconds.

After that, at the timing of t3 and the timing of t4, which are the situations where the variable display of the pattern is continued on the normal map display unit 46, the game ball is moved to the first distribution mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. 16 (a1). Will be supplied. In this case, since the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is the distribution state of guiding the game ball to the juxtaposed area of each special figure winning device 33, 34, the first is at the timing of t3 and the timing of t4. 1 The game ball supplied to the distribution mechanism 71 is guided to the juxtaposed area of each special figure winning device 33, 34. However, since neither the first special figure winning device 33 nor the second special drawing winning device 34 is in the non-accepting state, no game ball is won in any of the special drawing winning devices 33 and 34.

After that, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 16 (c1), the variable display of the pattern on the normal drawing display unit 46 ends. Since the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode in the first high-probability state, the branch winning device 37 is shown in FIG. 16 (d1) at the timing of t5 when the variable display of the pattern on the normal figure display unit 46 is completed. Is in the open state. This open state lasts for up to 0.8 seconds. Further, when the first opening of the branch winning device 37 is started at the timing of t5, the switching piece 67 is arranged at the retracted position as shown in FIG. 16 (f1).

After that, at the timing of t6 in which the branch winning device 37 is in the open state, the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. 16 (a1). In this case, since each distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 is a distribution state for guiding the game ball to the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37, the second distribution state is at the timing of t6. The game ball supplied to the 1 distribution mechanism 71 wins a prize in the branch winning device 37 at the timing of t7 as shown in FIG. 16 (e1).

The game ball that has won the branch winning device 37 at the timing of t7 finishes passing through the switching position of the game ball by the switching piece 67 in a period shorter than the shortest firing cycle. In this case, if no prize is given to the branch winning device 37, the open state of the branch winning device 37 is continued until the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 16 (d1). Further, even if the game ball wins the branch winning device 37 at the timing of t9, which is the timing when the branch winning device 37 shifts to the closed state, the switching piece 67 is held in the retracted position until the timing of t10 thereafter. The period from the timing of t9 to the timing of t10 is longer than the longest period required for the game ball winning the branch winning device 37 to finish passing through the switching position of the game ball by the switching piece 67. Therefore, the game ball that has won the branch winning device 37 in the first high probability state finishes passing through the switching position of the game ball by the switching piece 67 in the situation where the switching piece 67 is arranged in the retracted position. It will be detected by the trigger detection sensor 66b. When the game ball is detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b, the first special figure winning device 33 is in the accepting state.

Then, at the timing of t8, the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. 16 (a1). In this case, since the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is the distribution state of guiding the game ball to the juxtaposed area of each special figure winning device 33, 34, the first distribution mechanism is at the timing of t8. The game ball supplied to 71 is guided to the juxtaposed area of each special figure winning device 33, 34. In this case, since the first special figure winning device 33 is in the accepting state at this guidance timing, a prize is generated for the first special figure winning device 33.

Depending on the flow mode of the game ball that has won the branch prize device 37 at the timing of t7, the game ball supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t8 is the special figure prize device 33, 34. There is a possibility that the first special figure winning device 33 has not yet been accepted at the timing of being guided to the juxtaposed area. Even in this case, since the supply of the game ball supplied to the right side region PA3 to the through winning portion 36 is generated in a cycle of nine, each distribution of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 is performed. By the time the state becomes the distribution state for guiding the game ball to the through winning unit 36, four game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 even after the timing of t8. Then, all of these four game balls are guided to the juxtaposed area of each special figure winning device 33, 34. Therefore, by the time the game ball is guided to the through winning unit 36, two or more game balls will be guided to the first special figure winning device 33 which is in the accepted state. Therefore, by the time the game ball is guided to the through winning unit 36, the game ball is won by the maximum number of winning pieces in the first special figure winning device 33, and the first special figure winning device 33 is accepted. It will shift from the state to the non-accepted state. It is a condition that the pattern is not displayed in a variable manner in the normal drawing display unit 46, the branch winning device 37 is not in the open state, and the special drawing winning devices 33 and 34 are in the non-accepting state. As a result, the winning of the through winning section 36 is activated. In this case, as described above, the through winning section is completed by completing the winning of the maximum number of winning balls to the first special figure winning device 33 within the range of the nine gaming balls supplied to the right side region PA3. In the state where the game ball is guided to 36, it is possible to make it possible to enable the winning of the through winning unit 36.

Next, a winning mode of the game ball in the second high probability state will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 (a2) to 16 (f2). 16 (a2) shows the timing when the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 of the right side region PA3, FIG. 16 (b2) shows the winning timing to the through winning unit 36, and FIG. 16 (c2) shows the winning timing. FIG. 16 (d2) shows a period in which the branch winning device 37 is in the open state, and FIG. 16 (e2) shows a winning timing to the branch winning device 37. FIG. 16 (f2) shows a period in which the switching piece 67 of the branch winning device 37 is arranged at the induction position.

By continuously operating the launch operation device 28 in a situation where the game ball is stored in the upper plate of the upper bulging portion 19a, the game ball can be released in the shortest firing cycle (specifically, 0.6 seconds). It is supplied to the game area PA. In this case, if the amount of operation by the player of the launch operation device 28 is the maximum amount of operation, the game ball is supplied to the right area PA3, but the game ball supplied to the right area PA3 has already been described. All of them are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 as described above. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 16 (a2), at each timing of t11 timing, t13 timing, t16 timing, t17 timing and t20 timing, the first distribution mechanism 71 is played with the shortest firing cycle. The ball is supplied.

At the timing of t11, each distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 is a distribution state for guiding the game ball to the through winning unit 36, so that the first distribution is performed at the timing of t11. The game ball supplied to the mechanism 71 wins the through winning section 36 at the timing of t12 as shown in FIG. 16 (b2). As a result, as shown in FIG. 16 (c2), the variable display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 46 is started at the timing of t12. The variable display period of this variable display of the pattern is 0.7 seconds.

After that, the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. 16 (a2) at the timing of t13, which is the situation where the variable display of the pattern is continued on the normal map display unit 46. In this case, since the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is the distribution state of guiding the game ball to the juxtaposed area of each special figure winning device 33, 34, the first distribution mechanism is at the timing of t13. The game ball supplied to 71 is guided to the juxtaposed area of each special figure winning device 33, 34. However, since neither the first special figure winning device 33 nor the second special drawing winning device 34 is in the non-accepting state, no game ball is won in any of the special drawing winning devices 33 and 34.

After that, at the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 16 (c2), the variable display of the pattern on the normal drawing display unit 46 ends. Since the support mode is the second high-frequency support mode in the second high-probability state, the branch winning device 37 is shown in FIG. 16 (d2) at the timing of t14 when the variable display of the pattern on the normal figure display unit 46 is completed. Is the first open state. Since the open continuation period in this open state is 0.1 seconds, it is unlikely that a prize will be given to the branch winning device 37. Further, in this opening continuation period of 0.1 seconds, the game ball is guided toward the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37 in relation to each distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72. Will not be done. Therefore, the first open state of the branch winning device 37 started at the timing of t14 ends at the timing of t15 without the winning of the branch winning device 37, and the branch winning device 37 is closed.

Further, the switching piece 67 of the branch winning device 37 is arranged at the retracted position at the timing when the first open state of the branch winning device 37 is started when the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 16 (f2), the switching piece 67 is arranged at the retracted position at the timing of t14.

After that, at the timing of t16, which is the state of the closed continuation period in which the closed state of the branch winning device 37 is maintained, the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. 16 (a2). In this case, since the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is the distribution state of guiding the game ball to the juxtaposed area of each special figure winning device 33, 34, the first distribution mechanism is at the timing of t13. The game ball supplied to 71 is guided to the juxtaposed area of each special figure winning device 33, 34. However, since neither the first special figure winning device 33 nor the second special drawing winning device 34 is in the non-accepting state, no game ball is won in any of the special drawing winning devices 33 and 34.

After that, at the timing of t17, the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. 16 (a2). In this case, since each distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 is a distribution state for guiding the game ball to the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37, the first distribution state is at the timing of t17. 1 The game ball supplied to the distribution mechanism 71 is guided to the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37. In the configuration, the closing continuation period elapses at the timing of t18, which is the timing before the timing at which the game ball is guided to the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37, and the branch is branched as shown in FIG. 16 (d2). The winning device 37 is opened for the second time. Further, as shown in FIG. 16 (f2), the arrangement state of the switching piece 67 is switched from the retracted position to the guided position at the timing of t18.

At the timing of t19, which is the situation where the branch winning device 37 is in the second open state and the switching piece 67 is arranged at the induction position, the timing of t17, as shown in FIG. 16 (e2). The game ball supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 wins a prize in the branch winning device 37. Since the game ball finishes passing through the switching position of the game ball by the switching piece 67 in the situation where the switching piece 67 is arranged at the guidance position, the game ball is detected by the second trigger detection sensor 66c. When the game ball is detected by the second trigger detection sensor 66c, the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state.

After that, at the timing of t20, the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. 16 (a2). In this case, since the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is the distribution state of guiding the game ball to the juxtaposed area of each special figure winning device 33, 34, the first distribution mechanism is at the timing of t20. The game ball supplied to 71 is guided to the juxtaposed area of each special figure winning device 33, 34. In this case, since the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state at this guidance timing, a prize is generated for the second special figure winning device 34.

Depending on the flow mode of the game ball that has won the branch prize device 37 at the timing of t19, the game ball supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t20 is the special figure prize device 33, 34. There is a possibility that the second special figure winning device 34 has not yet been accepted at the timing of being guided to the juxtaposed area. Even in this case, since the supply of the game ball supplied to the right side region PA3 to the through winning portion 36 is generated in a cycle of nine, each distribution of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 is performed. By the time the state becomes the distribution state for guiding the game ball to the through winning unit 36, four game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 even after the timing of t20. Then, all of these four game balls are guided to the juxtaposed area of each special figure winning device 33, 34. Therefore, by the time the game ball is guided to the through winning unit 36, two or more game balls will be guided to the second special figure winning device 34 which is in the accepted state. Therefore, by the time the game ball is guided to the through winning unit 36, the game ball is won by the maximum number of winning pieces in the second special figure winning device 34, and the second special figure winning device 34 is accepted. It will shift from the state to the non-accepted state. It is a condition that the pattern is not displayed in a variable manner in the normal drawing display unit 46, the branch winning device 37 is not in the open state, and the special drawing winning devices 33 and 34 are in the non-accepting state. As a result, the winning of the through winning section 36 is activated. In this case, as described above, the through winning section is completed by completing the winning of the maximum number of winning balls to the second special figure winning device 34 within the range of the nine gaming balls supplied to the right side region PA3. In the state where the game ball is guided to 36, it is possible to make it possible to enable the winning of the through winning unit 36.

As described above, in the first high probability state, the game ball that has won the branch winning device 37 is reliably detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b, so that the first special figure winning device 33 is in the accepting state and the second high. In the probabilistic state, the game ball that has won the branch winning device 37 is reliably detected by the second trigger detection sensor 66c, so that the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state. Then, as described above, the lottery process is performed by the MPU 112 when the second special figure winning device 34 is won, rather than when the lottery process is executed by the MPU 112 when the first special figure winning device 33 is won. When executed, the distribution mode of the jackpot result is more advantageous to the player. As a result, the second high-probability state can be made into a more advantageous gaming state than the first high-probability state.

By each operation of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72, the game balls supplied to the right area PA3 after three of the game balls winning in the through winning unit 36 are sent to the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37. Be guided. As a result, it is possible to fix the number of game balls required from the occurrence of winning the through winning unit 36 to the occurrence of the winning of the branch winning device 37 to three.

In this case, in the first high-probability state, the variable display period of the pattern on the normal map display unit 46 is fixed to 1.5 seconds, which is the variable display period for the first high-probability state. Further, when the variable display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 46 is completed, the branch winning device 37 is in the open state, and the open state has an open continuation period so as to enable the branch winning device 37 to win a prize. Set to 0.8 seconds. Further, the switching piece 67 of the branch winning device 37 is arranged at the retracted position at the timing when the first open state of the branch winning device 37 is started, and the state of being arranged at the retracted position is maintained until the switching standby period elapses. Evacuation. As a result, the branch winning device 37 is opened at the timing when the game balls supplied to the right region PA3 are guided to the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37 after three of the game balls winning in the through winning unit 36. As a result, it is possible to win a prize in the branch winning device 37, and it is possible to detect the game ball by the first trigger detection sensor 66b.

In the second high probability state, the variation display period of the pattern on the normal map display unit 46 is fixed to 0.7 seconds, which is the variation display period for the second high probability state. Further, when the variable display of the pattern on the normal figure display unit 46 is completed, the branch winning device 37 is opened as the first opening time, and the opening state makes it impossible to win a prize in the branch winning device 37. The open duration is set to 0.1 seconds. After that, the branch winning device 37 is maintained in the closed state for 0.8 seconds, which is the closing continuation period, and after the closing continuation period elapses, the branch winning device 37 is opened as the second opening time. In this open state, the open duration is set to 0.8 seconds so as to enable winning to the branch winning device 37. Further, the switching piece 67 of the branch winning device 37 is arranged at the retracted position at the timing when the first open state of the branch winning device 37 is started, and the state of being arranged at the retracted position is maintained until the switching standby period elapses. Evacuation. Since this switching standby period elapses at the timing when the closing continuation period of the branch winning device 37 elapses, the switching piece 67 moves from the retracted position to the guided position at the timing when the branch winning device 37 is opened by the second opening turn. Can be switched. As a result, the branch winning device 37 is opened at the timing when the game balls supplied to the right region PA3 are guided to the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37 after three of the game balls winning in the through winning unit 36. As a result, it is possible to win a prize in the branch winning device 37, and it is possible to detect the game ball by the second trigger detection sensor 66c.

On the other hand, in the low probability state, the variation display period of the pattern on the normal map display unit 46 is fixed at 0.7 seconds. Further, when the variable display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 46 is completed, the branch winning device 37 is opened, and the open continuation period of the open state is set to 0.1 seconds. In this configuration, even if the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle, the game supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 after three of the game balls that have won the through winning unit 36. At the timing when the ball is guided to the branch entrance 61, the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 has already been completed, and the branch winning device 37 is in the closed state. Therefore, even if the branch winning device 37 can be in the open state in the low probability state, it is substantially impossible for the branch winning device 37 to win a prize.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 238, reach a maximum value, and then return to 0. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 41. The expected effect is a symbol display device 41 that is provided with a symbol display device 41 capable of displaying variable symbols, and in a gaming machine in which a final stop result is given as a result of a game that results in a predetermined jackpot. In the stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the symbol in the above is started, the display state for making the player think that the variable display state is likely to be the result of the grant correspondence. Specifically, regarding the grant correspondence result, the combination of symbols with the same number is stopped and displayed on one of the effective lines.

Two types of expected effects are set: a reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of the reach display and the occurrence of the grant response result in the stage before the reach display occurs. In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying some of the symbols among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the symbol display device 41, and in that state, the remaining symbols are displayed as symbols. The display state that displays the fluctuation of is included. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation display of the symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows, and the reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen. , A combination of reach symbols is reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in substantially the entire symbol display device 41 to perform a reach effect.

In the notice display, after the symbol display device 41 starts the variable display of the symbol, the symbol is variablely displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or a plurality of symbols in a part of the symbol rows. In a situation where the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a row, a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is included. Further, the background screen has a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such a notice display may occur in any of the game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the case where the reach display is performed is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with a probability.

The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result. Further, in the game times corresponding to the deviation result, when the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing by referring to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 113 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. Is executed. On the other hand, the determination of whether or not to display the notice is not performed by the MPU 112, but by the MPU 123 of the voice emission control device 121. In this case, in the MPU 123, the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results are more likely to generate a notice display and the notice display with a lower appearance rate is more likely to occur than the game times corresponding to the missed result. A lottery process for displaying a notice is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions. Incidentally, this lottery result is reflected when the effect for the game round is executed on the symbol display device 41.

Next, the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 112 to determine the display continuation period in the first special symbol display unit 45a or the second special symbol display unit 45b and the symbol display continuation period in the symbol display device 41. Specifically, the value of the variation type counter CS is used when the variation pattern is determined at the start of the variation display on the first special symbol display unit 45a or the second special symbol display unit 45b and at the start of the symbol variation by the symbol display device 41. To be acquired.

Next, the Fuden random number counter C4 will be described. The normal electric random number counter C4 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. The normal electric random number counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the execution area 136 for the normal drawing at the timing when the game ball wins the through winning unit 36 in the low probability state. Then, using the stored numerical information of the general electric random number counter C4, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the branch winning device 37 to the open state.

<Regarding the prerequisite processing configuration in MPU112>
Next, each process executed for advancing the game in the MPU 112 will be described. The processing of the MPU 112 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S101, the power-on wait process is executed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until 1 sec elapses after the main process is started. In the following step S102, access to the RAM 114 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function register of the MPU 112 is set.

After that, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch provided in the power supply / emission control device 108 is manually operated, and in the following step S105, whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag of the RAM 114. Is determined. Further, in step S106, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed, and in the following step S107, whether or not the checksum matches the checksum saved when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined. judge.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, at the start of business of the game hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S108 in the same manner. In step S108, the RAM 114 is cleared as the initialization of the RAM 114. Then, the process proceeds to step S109.

On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch is not pressed, step S109 without executing the process of step S108, provided that the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal. Proceed to. In step S109, the power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the RAM 114 such as initialization of the power failure flag is set as an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the voice emission control device 121 in order to recognize the current gaming state. do.

After that, the process proceeds to the residual processing of steps S110 to S113. That is, although the MPU 112 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt processing, a residual time is generated between the timer interrupt processing of one and the next timer interrupt processing. This residual time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, and the residual process of steps S110 to S113 is repeatedly executed by utilizing the irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the residual processing in steps S110 to S113 is an irregular process that is executed irregularly.

In the residual processing, first, in step S110, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In the following step S111, the random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and the variation counter update process for updating the variation type counter CS is executed in step S112. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the RAM 114, a process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively. After that, in step S113, the interrupt enable setting for switching from the state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to the state in which the timer interrupt process is permitted is set. After executing the process of step S113, the process returns to step S110, and the processes of steps S110 to S113 are repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

Here, a hardware configuration for periodically executing timer interrupt processing in the MPU 112 will be described. The main control board 111 is provided with a clock circuit as a pulse signal output means for outputting a pulse signal at a predetermined cycle, and further, a frequency dividing circuit is provided so as to exist in the middle of the signal path between the clock circuit and the MPU 112. Is provided.

The frequency dividing circuit functions as a frequency changing means for changing the cycle of the pulse signal from the clock circuit, and is configured to output a pulse signal for specifying the start timing of the timer interrupt process by the MPU 112. That is, the pulse signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the MPU 112 at intervals of 4 milliseconds, which is a specific period. The MPU 112 executes a process for confirming the occurrence of a specific signal form such as a rising edge or a falling edge of the pulse signal, and activates and executes a timer interrupt process on the condition that the occurrence of a specific signal form is confirmed. do.

In this case, if the occurrence of the above specific signal form is confirmed in a situation where the activation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the timer is changed from the state in which the interrupt is prohibited to the state in which the interrupt is permitted. Interrupt processing is started. That is, depending on the processing execution status in the MPU 112, the next timer interrupt processing may be started after 4.1 milliseconds have elapsed since the previous timer interrupt processing was started, and when such an event occurs, the next timer interrupt processing may be started. The next timer interrupt process will be started 3.9 milliseconds after the immediately preceding timer interrupt process is started.

However, since the output of the pulse signal from the frequency dividing circuit is performed in a specific cycle such as 4 milliseconds regardless of the progress of the processing in the MPU 112, the timer interrupt processing is basically started in the specific cycle. Furthermore, the processing configuration of the MPU 112 is the timing next to the predetermined timing even if the timer interrupt processing at the predetermined timing is started after a period exceeding a specific cycle has elapsed since the previous timer interrupt processing was started. In the timer interrupt processing in, the portion exceeding the specific cycle is absorbed, and in the timer interrupt processing in the next timing, it is set to be started at the timing when the input of the pulse signal is confirmed.

In the timer interrupt process, first, the power failure information storage process is executed in step S201. In the power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board, and if the occurrence of a power failure is identified, the power failure processing is executed.

In the following step S202, the lottery random number update process is executed. In the lottery random number update process, the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, after executing a process of sequentially reading the current numerical information from the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric random number counter C4, and adding 1 to each of the read numerical information. Executes the process of overwriting the read source counter. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively.

After that, in step S203, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S111, and in step S204, the fluctuation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S112.

In the following step S205, fraud detection processing for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred is executed. In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, "1" is set in the game stop flag provided in the RAM 114.

In the following step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not "1" is set in the game stop flag. If a negative determination is made in step S206, the processes after step S207 are executed.

In step S207, the port output process is executed. In the port output processing, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt processing, the processing for outputting the output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 35b, 56a, 56b, 63, 68 is executed. do. For example, when the information to switch the special electric winning device 35 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 35b for the special electric is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal. Further, when the information for switching the first special figure winning device 33 to the accepted state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 56a for the first special figure winning device should be started and switched to the non-accepted state. If the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped. Further, when the information for switching the second special figure winning device 34 to the accepted state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 56b for the second special figure winning device should be started and switched to the non-accepted state. If the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped. Further, when the information to switch the branch winning device 37 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 63 for the branch entrance is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set. To stop the output of the drive signal. Further, when the information to switch the switching piece 67 to the retracted position is set, the output of the drive signal to the switching drive unit 68 is started, and when the information to be switched to the guided position is set, the said information is concerned. Stop the output of the drive signal.

In the following step S208, the reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

In the following step S209, the winning detection process is executed. In the prize detection process, the signals received from the prize detection sensors 32a to 66c are read, and the general prize section 31, the first special figure normal prize section 32, the first special figure winning device 33, and the second special figure prize are won. A process for specifying whether or not a ball has entered the device 34, the special electric winning device 35, the through winning section 36, and the branch winning device 37 is executed.

In the following step S210, a timer update process for collectively updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the RAM 114 is executed. In this case, the timer counters to which the stored numerical information is subtracted and updated are collectively handled, but both the subtraction type timer counter update and the addition type timer counter update are collectively performed. It may be configured.

In the following step S211, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed. In a situation where the firing operation is continued for the firing operation device 28, one game ball is launched every 0.6 sec, which is a predetermined firing cycle, as described above.

In the following step S212, as the input state monitoring process, the disconnection confirmation of the winning detection sensors 32a to 66c and the opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are confirmed based on the information read in the reading process of step S208. conduct.

In the following step S213, the special figure special electric control process for performing the execution control of the game times and the execution control of the open / close execution mode is executed. The processing content of the special figure special electric control process will be described in detail later.

In the following step S214, a general-purpose map general-purpose electric control process for executing display control of the general-purpose map display unit 46, drive control of the branch winning device 37, and the like is executed. The processing content of the general-purpose power control process will be described in detail later.

In the following step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, the output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the reserved information related to the first special figure display unit 45a in the first special figure reserved display unit 45c. The setting and the output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the reserved information related to the second special figure holding display unit 45b in the second special figure holding display unit 45d are set. Further, in step S215, output information for updating the display contents of the first special figure display unit 45a and the second special figure display unit 45b is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214. , Set the output information for updating the display contents of the general map display unit 46.

In the following step S216, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 107 are confirmed, and the payout state reception process for performing the process corresponding to the check result is executed. Further, in step S217, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed. In the following step S218, an external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing result of various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time is executed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S206, or after the processes of steps S207 to S218 are executed, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Fuzu Fuden control processing>
Next, the normal power control process executed in step S214 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) of the MPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, the information of the Fuzu Fuden counter provided in the RAM 114 is read (step S301), and the Fuzu Fuden address table stored in the ROM 113 is read (step S302). Then, the start address corresponding to the information of the Fuzu Fuden counter is acquired from the Fuzu Fuden address table (step S303).

In the Fuzu Fuden control process, the presence or absence of a prize in the through winning unit 36 is monitored, and the fluctuation display of the pattern on the Fuzu display unit 46 is started when the through winning unit 36 is awarded. The start process (step S305) and the process during the change of the normal map (step S306) for updating the variable display of the pattern on the normal figure display unit 46 and starting the open / close control of the branch winning device 37 when the variable display period has elapsed. ) And the process during normal operation (step S307) for executing the open / close control of the branch winning device 37. In such a processing configuration, the Fuzu Fuden counter is a counter for the MPU 112 to grasp which of the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing should be executed. The start address of the program for executing the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing is set in correspondence with the numerical information of the Fuzu-fuden counter. The Fuzu Fuden counter will be used in the next processing round when the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied when the processing corresponding to the currently stored numerical information is completed. 1 addition or "0" is cleared corresponding to the process executed by the electric control process. Therefore, in the Fuzu Fuden control process at each processing time, it is sufficient to execute the process according to the numerical information set in the Fuzu Fuden counter. In addition, "0" is set as an initial value of the Fuzu Fuden counter.

After executing the process of step S303, in step S304, a process of jumping to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S303 is executed. Specifically, when the value of the Fuzu Fuden counter is "0", it jumps to the Fuzu fluctuation start processing in step S305, and when the value of the Fuzu Fuden counter is "1", the step. It jumps to the processing during the fluctuation of the normal power in S306, and when the value of the normal power counter is "2", it jumps to the processing during the normal power operation in step S307.

In the Fuzu Fuden control process, after executing any of the processes of steps S305 to S307, a process for executing open / close control of the first special figure winning device 33 (step S308), and a second special figure. The process (step S309) for executing the open / close control of the winning device 34 is executed. Hereinafter, each process of steps S305 to S309 will be described in detail.

<Public map fluctuation start processing>
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a normal map fluctuation start process executed in step S305 in the normal map normal electric control process (FIG. 19).

First, it is determined whether or not the acceptance control of any of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 is being executed (step S401). The state in which the acceptance control of any of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 is executed means that the game ball is detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b of the branch winning device 37, and the first special figure winning device is won. A game ball in a situation where the condition for setting the device 33 in the accepting state is satisfied (including a situation in which the first special figure winning device 33 is in the accepting state) and the second trigger detection sensor 66c of the branch winning device 37. The situation in which the condition for accepting the second special figure winning device 34 is satisfied (including the situation in which the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state) is applicable. If the acceptance control of any of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 is being executed (step S401: YES), a determination process for determining whether or not a prize has been generated in the through winning unit 36 (step S402). Ends this normal map fluctuation start processing without executing. As a result, in the situation where the acceptance control of any of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 is executed, the winning of the through winning section 36 is invalidated, and even if the winning of the through winning section 36 occurs, it is normal. The variable display of the pattern on the figure display unit 46 is not started, and the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is not executed.

Here, the normal map variation start process is not executed in the situation where the pattern variation display in the normal map display unit 46 is executed and the open / close control of the branch winning device 37 is executed. Then, even in these situations, the winning of the through winning unit 36 will be invalidated. That is, the situation where the variable display of the pattern on the normal figure display unit 46 is executed, the situation where the open / close control of the branch winning device 37 is executed, and the acceptance control of any of the special drawing winning devices 33 and 34 are executed. In the above situation, the winning of the through winning section 36 is invalidated, and in other situations, the winning of the through winning section 36 is enabled. In this case, even in the open / close execution mode, the winning of the through winning unit 36 is enabled. Then, when a valid prize is generated for the through winning unit 36 in the open / close execution mode, the same processing as in the low frequency support mode is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the open / close execution mode, when a valid prize is awarded to the through winning unit 36, the same processing as in the first high frequency support mode and the second high frequency support mode is executed. In the open / close execution mode, the winning of the through winning unit 36 may be invalidated.

When the acceptance control is not executed for both the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 (step S401: NO), and the through winning unit 36 is won. (Step S402: YES), by confirming whether or not "1" is set in the flag corresponding to any of the high-probability states in the RAM 114, either the first high-probability state or the second high-probability state. It is determined whether or not it is (step S403). If the probability is low (step S403: NO), the open lottery process is executed (step S404). In the open lottery process, the current numerical information of the normal electric random number counter C4 is read out to the execution area 136 for the normal drawing. Then, the open lottery table is read from the ROM 113, and whether or not the numerical information read out in the execution area 136 for the general drawing is the numerical information corresponding to the open winning is grasped by referring to the open lottery table, and the numerical information thereof is grasped. The grasping result is stored in the RAM 114. After that, the numerical information corresponding to 0.7 seconds as the fluctuation display period for the low probability state is set in the normal map fluctuation measurement counter provided in the RAM 114 (step S405). On the other hand, in the case of the first high-probability state (step S403 and step S406: YES), the numerical information corresponding to 1.5 seconds as the fluctuation display period for the first high-probability state is measured in the normal map fluctuation of the RAM 114. It is set in the counter (step S407). Further, in the case of the second high probability state (step S403: YES, step S406: NO), the numerical information corresponding to 0.7 seconds as the fluctuation display period for the second high probability state is provided in the general diagram of the RAM 114. It is set in the fluctuation measurement counter (step S408). The value set in the normal figure fluctuation measurement counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) is executed. Then, when the value of the normal map fluctuation measurement counter changes from 1 or more to “0”, the MPU 112 specifies that it is the end timing of the fluctuation display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 46.

After executing any of the processes of step S405, step S407, and step S408, the variable display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 46 is started (step S409). In this case, regardless of which of the processes of step S405, step S407, and step S408 is executed, the mode of the pattern displayed on the normal map display unit 46 at the start timing of the variable display of the pattern is the same. As a result, it is possible to start the variable display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 46 in the same manner regardless of the situation, so that the processing load can be reduced. Before the variable display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 46 is started, the display of the finally stopped and displayed pattern in the previous variable display times of the pattern on the normal map display unit 46 is continued. It has become. After that, the value of the Fuzu Fuden counter is added by 1 (step S410). As a result, the execution target of the process in the Fuzu Fuden control process (FIG. 19) becomes the Fuzu changing process (step S306).

<Processing during fluctuation of normal map>
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a processing during fluctuation of the normal map executed in step S306 in the normal drawing control process (FIG. 19).

In the normal map fluctuation processing, if the value of the normal map fluctuation measurement counter of the RAM 114 is 1 or more (step S501: NO), it means that the end timing of the fluctuation display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 46 has not been reached. Therefore, the display content update process is executed (step S502). In the display content update process, the patterns to be displayed on the normal map display unit 46 are updated to the next pattern on condition that the display content of the normal map display unit 46 is updated. In this case, the update mode of the pattern is constant regardless of whether it is in the low probability state, the first high probability state, or the second high probability state, and in the low probability state, the open lottery process results in an open winning. The mode of updating the pattern is constant regardless of whether or not it has become. As a result, the variable display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 46 can be updated in the same manner regardless of the situation, so that the processing load can be reduced.

If it is the end timing of the variation display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 46 (step S501: YES), if it is in a low probability state (step S503: NO), the opening of step S404 in the normal map variation start process (FIG. 20). It is determined in the lottery process whether or not the winning is open (step S504). If the open winning is not won (step S504: NO), the value of the normal power counter of the RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S505). As a result, the execution target of the process in the Fuzu Fuden control process (FIG. 19) becomes the Fuzu variation start process (step S305).

In the case of a low probability state (step S503: NO) and the open winning (step S504: YES), "1" is set in the normal power release count counter provided in the RAM 114 and is provided in the RAM 114. Numerical information corresponding to the short opening period of 0.1 seconds is set in the normal electric opening period counter (step S506). On the other hand, when it is the end timing of the variation display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 46 (step S501: YES) and the first high probability state (step S503 and step S507: YES), the normal power of the RAM 114 “1” is set in the open count counter, and numerical information corresponding to the long open period of 0.8 seconds is set in the normal power open period counter of the RAM 114 (step S508). Further, when it is the end timing of the variation display of the pattern on the normal figure display unit 46 (step S501: YES) and the second high probability state (step S503: YES, step S507: NO), the RAM 114 “2” is set in the normal power release count counter, and numerical information corresponding to the short open period of 0.1 seconds is set in the normal power release period counter of the RAM 114 (step S509). The normal electric opening number counter is a counter for specifying the remaining number of times that the branch winning device 37 is opened in the situation where the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is executed by the MPU 112. The normal electric opening period counter is a counter for specifying the longest remaining period until the branch winning device 37 is closed when the branch winning device 37 is opened by the MPU 112. The value set in the normal power release period counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) is executed. Then, when the value of the normal power opening period counter changes from 1 or more to "0", it is specified that it is the end timing of the current opening time in the branch winning device 37.

When any of the processes of step S506, step S508, and step S509 is executed, the process of switching to the retracted position is executed (step S510). In the switching process, the switching piece 67 is displaced from the induction position to the retracted position by starting the output of the drive signal to the switching drive unit 68 of the branch winning device 37. Further, the numerical information corresponding to the switching standby period of 0.9 seconds is set in the switching standby counter provided in the RAM 114 (step S511). The value set in the switching standby counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) is executed. Then, when the value of the switching standby counter changes from 1 or more to “0”, it is specified that it is the timing to switch the switching piece 67 from the retracted position to the guided position.

After that, the opening process of the branch winning device 37 is executed (step S512). In the opening process, the branch side opening / closing member 62 is displaced to the opening position by starting the output of the drive signal to the driving unit 63 for the branch entrance. As a result, the branch winning device 37 is opened. When the branch winning device 37 is in the open state, "1" is set in the open state flag provided in the RAM 114. By confirming whether or not "1" is set in the open state flag, the MPU 112 can specify whether or not the branch winning device 37 is in the open state.

Further, the numerical information corresponding to the monitoring period of the winning prize is set in the monitoring period counter provided in the RAM 114 (step S513). During the monitoring period of the opportunity winning, when the game ball is detected by either the first opportunity detection sensor 66b or the second opportunity detection sensor 66c of the branch winning device 37, the detection of the game ball is due to fraudulent activity. It is a reference period for specifying whether or not it is. If a game ball is detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b or the second trigger detection sensor 66c during the measurement of the trigger prize monitoring period, the detection of the game ball is treated as normal, and the trigger prize monitoring is performed. If a game ball is detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b or the second trigger detection sensor 66c after the period has elapsed, the detection of the game ball is treated as abnormal. If the monitoring period of the opportunity winning is the first high probability state, the opening continuation period in one opening time of the branch winning device 37 and the game ball winning the branch winning device 37 are the first opportunity detection sensor 66b and the second opportunity. It is set as a period equal to or longer than the sum of the longest period assumed as the period until detection by any of the detection sensors 66c. Specifically, it is set to 2.0 seconds. Further, in the case of the second high probability state, the opening continuation period in the first opening time of the branch winning device 37, the closing continuation period between the first opening time and the second opening time in the branch winning device 37, As the opening continuation period in the second opening time of the branch winning device 37, and the period until the game ball winning in the branch winning device 37 is detected by either the first trigger detection sensor 66b or the second trigger detection sensor 66c. It is set as a period longer than the sum of the maximum expected period. Specifically, it is set to 3.0 seconds. By setting the monitoring period of the opportunity winning in this way, it is specified whether or not the detection of the game ball by the first opportunity detection sensor 66b and the second opportunity detection sensor 66c of the branch winning device 37 is normal. It becomes possible to do.

After that, the value of the normal power counter of the RAM 114 is added by 1 (step S514). As a result, the execution target of the process in the normal power control process (FIG. 19) becomes the normal power operation process (step S307).

<Processing during normal operation>
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the processing during operation during operation executed in step S307 in the normal power control processing (FIG. 19).

When the branch winning device 37 is in the open state (step S601: YES), the branch winning device 37 is won by determining whether or not the game ball is detected by the branch winning detection sensor 66a of the branch winning device 37. Is determined (step S602). When the branch winning device 37 has not been won (step S602: NO), the branch winning device 37 determines whether or not the value of the normal power opening period counter of the RAM 114 is "0". It is determined whether or not the opening continuation period of the current opening times has elapsed (step S603).

When the opening continuation period has elapsed (step S603: YES), the value of the normal power opening number counter of the RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S604). When the value of the normal power release count counter after the subtraction of 1 is not "0" (step S605: NO), the branch winning device 37 is closed (step S606). In the closing process, the branch side opening / closing member 62 is displaced to the closed position by stopping the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 63 for the branch entrance. As a result, the branch winning device 37 is closed. When the branch winning device 37 is closed, the open state flag of the RAM 114 is cleared to "0". After that, the numerical information corresponding to the closing continuation period of 0.8 seconds is set in the general electric closing period counter provided in the RAM 114 (step S607). The value set in the normal power closure period counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) is executed. Then, when the value of the general electric closing period counter changes from 1 or more to “0”, it is specified that the closing continuation period in the branch winning device 37 has elapsed.

Same as step S606 when the branch winning device 37 has been won (step S602: YES) or when the value of the normal power opening count counter after subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S605: YES). The branch winning device 37 is closed (step S608). As a result, the branch winning device 37 is closed. After that, "1" is set in the open end flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S609). The opening end flag specifies in the MPU 112 that all the transitions from the open state to the closed state of the branch winning device 37 have been completed in the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 triggered by the winning of the through winning unit 36. It is a flag to do.

When the branch winning device 37 is in the closed state (step S601: NO), the closing continuation period of the branch winning device 37 is determined by determining whether or not the value of the normal power closing period counter of the RAM 114 is "0". Is determined (step S610). When the closing continuation period has elapsed (step S610: YES), the branch winning device 37 is opened (step S611) in the same manner as in step S512 in the normal map changing process (FIG. 21). As a result, the branch winning device 37 is opened. Further, in the opening process, numerical information corresponding to the long opening period of 0.8 seconds is set in the normal power opening period counter of the RAM 114. As a result, in this opening round, the branch winning device 37 is opened for a maximum of 0.8 seconds.

In the normal power operation process, it is determined whether or not the switching standby period has elapsed by determining whether or not the value of the switching standby counter of the RAM 114 is “0” (step S612). When the switching standby period has elapsed (step S612: YES), the switching process to the induction position is executed (step S613). In the switching process, the switching piece 67 is displaced from the retracted position to the guided position by stopping the output of the drive signal to the switching drive unit 68 of the branch winning device 37. After that, "1" is set in the switching completion flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S614). The switching completion flag is a flag for the MPU 112 to specify that the switching from the retracted position of the switching piece 67 to the guided position has been completed.

In the normal power operation processing, when "1" is set in both the open end flag and the switching complete flag of the RAM 114 (step S615: YES), the value of the normal power counter of the RAM 114 is cleared to "0". (Step S616). As a result, the execution target of the process in the Fuzu Fuden control process (FIG. 19) becomes the Fuzu variation start process (step S305). Further, in step S616, the opening end flag and the switching completion flag are cleared to "0". On condition that both the opening end flag and the switching completion flag are set to "1", the value of the general-purpose electric counter is cleared to "0", which triggers the winning of the through winning section 36. In the situation where the branch winning device 37 is controlled to open and close, the transition from the open state to the closed state of the branch winning device 37 is completely completed in this open / close control, and the arrangement of the switching piece 67 from the retracted position to the guided position is completed. It ends with.

<Control processing of the first special figure winning device 33>
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a control process of the first special figure winning device 33 executed in step S308 in the normal figure normal electric control process (FIG. 19).

When the first special figure winning device 33 is not in the accepting state (step S701: NO), the game ball is detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b of the branch winning device 37 (step S702: YES). By determining whether or not the value of the monitoring period counter of the RAM 114 is 1 or more, it is determined whether or not the monitoring period of the opportunity winning prize is being measured (step S703).

When the monitoring period of the opportunity winning is being measured (step S703: YES), it is provided in the RAM 114 to mean that the detection of the game ball this time by the first opportunity detection sensor 66b is normal. “2” is set in the first special figure winning counter (step S704). The first special figure winning counter is a counter for specifying the remaining number of winnings of the game ball required for switching the first special figure winning device 33 from the accepted state to the non-accepted state by the MPU 112. When "2" is set in the first special figure winning counter in step S704 and the first special figure winning device 33 is in the accepting state, two games are played in the first special figure winning device 33. When the ball wins a prize, the first special figure winning device 33 becomes a non-accepting state. After that, the acceptance start process of the first special figure winning device 33 is executed (step S705). In the acceptance start process, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 56a for winning the first special figure is started, so that the first special figure winning device 33 is in the receiving state. When the first special drawing winning device 33 is in the receiving state, "1" is set in the first special drawing side receiving state flag provided in the RAM 114. The MPU 112 can specify whether or not the first special figure winning device 33 is in the accepted state by confirming whether or not "1" is set in the first special figure side acceptance state flag. Will be.

On the other hand, in step S703, when the value of the monitoring period counter of the RAM 114 is "0", that is, when the measurement of the monitoring period of the opportunity winning is completed, the detection of the game ball this time by the first opportunity detection sensor 66b. Means that is not legitimate. Therefore, after the abnormality notification command is set as the transmission target to the voice emission control device 121 (step S706), the infinite loop is entered. Upon receiving the abnormality notification command, the voice emission control device 121 executes a process for executing the abnormality notification in at least one of the display light emitting unit 18a, the speaker unit 18b, and the symbol display device 41. As a result, it is notified that the abnormality detection has occurred in the first trigger detection sensor 66b. Further, entering the infinite loop prevents the execution of the process for advancing the game in the MPU 112. It should be noted that this infinite loop state is released by executing the process of step S108 in the main process (FIG. 17).

When the first special figure winning device 33 is in the accepting state (step S701: YES), it is determined whether or not the first special figure winning device 33 has been won (step S707). When a prize has been generated for the first special figure winning device 33 (step S707: YES), the value of the first special figure winning counter of the RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S708). Then, when the value of the first special figure winning counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S709: YES), the acceptance end processing of the first special figure winning device 33 is executed (step S710). In the acceptance termination process, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 56a for winning the first special figure is stopped, so that the first special figure winning device 33 is in the non-accepted state. When the first special figure winning device 33 is set to the non-accepted state, the first special figure side acceptance state flag of the RAM 114 is cleared to "0".

<Control processing of the second special figure winning device 34>
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a control process of the second special figure winning device 34 executed in step S309 in the Fuzu Fuden control process (FIG. 19).

When the second special figure winning device 34 is not in the accepting state (step S801: NO), the game ball is detected by the second trigger detection sensor 66c of the branch winning device 37 (step S802: YES). By determining whether or not the value of the monitoring period counter of the RAM 114 is 1 or more, it is determined whether or not the monitoring period of the opportunity winning prize is being measured (step S803).

When the monitoring period of the opportunity winning is being measured (step S803: YES), it is provided in the RAM 114 to mean that the detection of the game ball this time by the second opportunity detection sensor 66c is normal. “2” is set in the second special figure winning counter (step S804). The second special figure winning counter is a counter for specifying the remaining number of winnings of the game ball required for switching the second special figure winning device 34 from the accepted state to the non-accepted state by the MPU 112. When "2" is set in the second special figure winning counter in step S804 and the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state, two games are played in the second special figure winning device 34. When the ball wins a prize, the second special figure winning device 34 is in a non-accepting state. After that, the acceptance start process of the second special figure winning device 34 is executed (step S805). In the acceptance start process, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 56b for winning the second special figure is started, so that the second special figure winning device 34 is in the acceptance state. When the second special drawing winning device 34 is in the receiving state, "1" is set in the second special drawing side receiving state flag provided in the RAM 114. The MPU 112 can specify whether or not the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepted state by confirming whether or not "1" is set in the second special figure side acceptance state flag. Will be.

On the other hand, in step S803, when the value of the monitoring period counter of the RAM 114 is "0", that is, when the measurement of the monitoring period of the opportunity winning is completed, the detection of the game ball this time by the second opportunity detection sensor 66c. Means that is not legitimate. Therefore, after the abnormality notification command is set as the transmission target to the voice emission control device 121 (step S806), the infinite loop is entered. Upon receiving the abnormality notification command, the voice emission control device 121 executes a process for executing the abnormality notification in at least one of the display light emitting unit 18a, the speaker unit 18b, and the symbol display device 41. As a result, it is notified that the abnormality detection has occurred in the second trigger detection sensor 66c. Further, entering the infinite loop prevents the execution of the process for advancing the game in the MPU 112. It should be noted that this infinite loop state is released by executing the process of step S108 in the main process (FIG. 17).

When the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state (step S801: YES), it is determined whether or not the second special figure winning device 34 has been won (step S807). When a prize has been generated for the second special figure winning device 34 (step S807: YES), the value of the second special figure winning counter of the RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S808). Then, when the value of the second special figure winning counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S809: YES), the acceptance end processing of the second special figure winning device 34 is executed (step S810). In the acceptance termination process, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 56b for winning the second special figure is stopped, so that the second special figure winning device 34 is in the non-accepted state. When the second special figure winning device 34 is set to the non-accepted state, the second special figure side acceptance state flag of the RAM 114 is cleared to "0".

<Prize winning monitoring process>
Here, the winning detection process executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 25.

When one game ball is detected by the detection sensor 36a of the through winning unit 36 (step S901: YES), the condition is that the value of the normal power counter of the RAM 114 is "0" (step S902: YES). ), “1” is set in the through winning flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S903). As a result, the winning of the through winning unit 36 is invalidated in the situation where the variable display of the pattern is executed in the normal drawing display unit 46 and the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is executed. Further, whether the MPU 112 has won a prize in the through winning unit 36 by determining whether or not "1" is set in the through winning flag in step S402 in the normal figure fluctuation start processing (FIG. 20). Judge whether or not. In this case, if an affirmative determination is made in step S401, the through winning flag is cleared to "0" even if the processing after step S402 is not executed. As a result, when any of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 is in the receiving state, the winning to the through winning unit 36 is invalidated. Further, even when an affirmative determination is made in step S402, the through winning flag is cleared to "0". Incidentally, even if one game ball is detected by the detection sensor 36a of the through winning unit 36, the process for executing the payout of the game ball is not executed.

When one game ball is detected by the branch winning detection sensor 66a of the branch winning device 37 (step S904: YES), the value of the three prize ball counters provided in the RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S905). The three-prize ball counter is a counter for specifying the remaining number of transmissions of the three-prize ball command for instructing the payout control device 107 to pay out the three game balls by the MPU 112, and is a counter of the prize ball command. If the value of the 3-prize ball counter is 1 or more when the transmission is possible timing, one 3-prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 107, and the value of the 3-prize ball counter is decremented by 1. Will be done. After that, "1" is set in the branch winning flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S906). In step S602 in the process during normal electric operation (FIG. 22), the MPU 112 determines whether or not the branch winning flag is set to "1", thereby determining whether or not the branch winning device 37 has won a prize. Is determined. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S602, the branch winning flag is cleared to "0".

When one game ball is detected by the first opportunity detection sensor 66b of the branch winning device 37 (step S907: YES), "1" is set in the first opportunity winning flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S908). .. The MPU 112 determines whether or not "1" is set in the first opportunity winning flag in step S702 in the control process (FIG. 23) of the first special figure winning device 33, whereby the first opportunity detection sensor 66b Determines whether or not the game ball is detected at. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S702, the first opportunity winning flag is cleared to "0". Incidentally, even if one game ball is detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b, the process for executing the payout of the game ball is not executed.

When one game ball is detected by the second trigger detection sensor 66c of the branch winning device 37 (step S909: YES), "1" is set in the second trigger winning flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S910). .. The MPU 112 determines whether or not "1" is set in the second trigger winning flag in step S802 in the control process (FIG. 24) of the second special drawing winning device 34, whereby the second trigger detection sensor 66c Determines whether or not the game ball is detected at. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S802, the second opportunity winning flag is cleared to "0". Incidentally, even if one game ball is detected by the second trigger detection sensor 66c, the process for executing the payout of the game ball is not executed.

1st special figure When one game ball is detected by the detection sensor 32a of the normal winning unit 32 (step S911: YES), the value of the three prize ball counters of the RAM 114 is added by 1 as in step S905 (step S911: YES). S912). As a result, a process for making the payout of the three game balls executed is executed. After that, "1" is set in the first special figure winning flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S913). In the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 26), by determining whether or not "1" is set in the first special figure winning flag, the first special figure normal winning unit 32 or the first special figure winning device 33 is reached. It is determined whether or not one of the game balls has been won. By the way, when the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 26) executes the process corresponding to the winning of one game ball to the first special figure normal winning unit 32 or the first special figure winning device 33, the first special figure Clear the figure winning flag to "0".

When one game ball is detected by the detection sensor 54 of the first special figure winning device 33 (step S914: YES), the value of the three prize ball counters of the RAM 114 is added by 1 as in step S905 (step S915). ). As a result, a process for making the payout of the three game balls executed is executed. After that, "1" is set in the first winning flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S916), and "1" is set in the first special drawing winning flag of the RAM 114 (step S917). The first special figure winning flag is as already explained. The MPU 112 determines whether or not "1" is set in the first winning flag in step S707 in the control process (FIG. 23) of the first special drawing winning device 33, thereby determining whether or not the first special drawing winning device 33 is set. Judge whether or not a prize has been awarded. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S707, the first winning flag is cleared to "0".

When one game ball is detected by the detection sensor 54 of the second special figure winning device 34 (step S918: YES), the value of the three prize ball counters of the RAM 114 is added by 1 as in step S905 (step S919). ). As a result, a process for making the payout of the three game balls executed is executed. After that, "1" is set in the second winning flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S920), and "1" is set in the second special drawing winning flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S921). The MPU 112 determines whether or not "1" is set in the second winning flag in step S807 in the control process (FIG. 24) of the second special drawing winning device 34, thereby determining whether or not the second special drawing winning device 34 is set. Judge whether or not a prize has been awarded. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S807, the second winning flag is cleared to "0". Further, in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 26), one game ball to the second special figure winning device 34 is determined by determining whether or not "1" is set in the second special figure winning flag. Determine if a prize has occurred. By the way, when the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 26) executes the process corresponding to the winning of one game ball to the second special figure winning device 34, the second special figure winning flag is cleared to "0". ..

In the winning detection process, other processes other than the above processes are executed (step S922). In other processes, when a prize has been awarded to the general winning unit 31, a process for paying out the corresponding number of game balls is executed, and the detection sensor 35c of the special electric winning device 35 is used. When one game ball is detected, a process for paying out the corresponding number of game balls is executed.

<Special figure special electric control processing>
Next, the special figure special electric control process executed in step S213 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 26.

In the special figure special electric control process, first, the hold information acquisition process is executed (step S1001). In the hold information acquisition process, when "1" is set in the first special figure winning flag of the RAM 114, it is specified that a prize has been generated in the first special figure normal winning section 32 or the first special figure winning device 33. do. In this case, if the upper limit number (specifically, 4) of hold information is not stored in the 1st special figure hold area 133, each numerical value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The information is stored in the first area of the empty areas 133a to 133d of the first special figure reservation area 133. Further, in the process of acquiring the hold information, when "1" is set in the second special figure winning flag of the RAM 114, it is specified that the winning of the second special drawing winning device 34 has occurred. In this case, if the upper limit number (specifically, 4 pieces) of hold information is not stored in the second special figure hold area 134, each numerical value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The information is stored in the first area of the empty areas 134a to 134d of the second special figure holding area 134.

After that, the information of the special figure special electric counter provided in the RAM 114 is read (step S1002), and the special figure special electric address table is read from the ROM 113 (step S1003). Then, the start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special electric counter is acquired from the special figure special electric address table (step S1004).

The special figure special electric control process includes a special figure variation start process (step S1006) for starting the effect for the game round, and a special figure change process (step S1007) for advancing the effect for the game round. The special figure finalizing process (step S1008) for ending the effect for the game round, the special electric start process (step S1009) for controlling the opening of the open / close execution mode, and the open state of the special electric winning device 35. The special electric power opening process (step 1010) for control, the special electric power closing process (step S1011) for controlling the closed state of the special electric power winning device 35, and the ending of the open / close execution mode and the end of the open / close execution mode. A special electric termination process (step S1012) for controlling the transition of the gaming state is set. In such a processing configuration, the special figure special electric counter is a counter for grasping which of the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing should be executed by the MPU 112, and the special figure special electric address table has a special figure. The start address of the program for executing the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing is set corresponding to the numerical information of the special electric counter. The special figure special electric counter controls the special figure special electric power in the next processing time when the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied when the processing corresponding to the numerical information currently stored is completed. 1 addition, 1 subtraction or "0" is cleared corresponding to the process executed in the process. Therefore, in the special figure special electric control processing in each processing time, it is sufficient to execute the processing according to the numerical information set in the special figure special electric counter. The special figure special electric counter is set to "0" as an initial value.

After executing the process of step S1004, in step S1005, a process of jumping to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S1004 is executed. Specifically, when the value of the special figure special electric counter is "0", the process jumps to the special figure change start process in step S1006. In the special figure change start process, various determination processes are executed on condition that the hold information is held and stored, and the game round in which the change display is performed on the symbol display device 41 and the special figure display units 45a and 45b is started. Perform the processing for. The details will be described later.

When the value of the special figure special electric counter is "1", the process jumps to the special figure change processing in step S1007. In the special figure changing process, a process of determining whether or not the timing is before the final stop display is executed during the display continuation period of the game times, and if it is before the final stop display, the change is made in the current game times. A process for regularly changing the display mode of the pattern on the special figure display units 45a and 45b to be displayed is executed. By the way, instead of waiting in the special figure changing process until the final stop display timing is reached, if it is not the final stop display timing, after executing the above-mentioned regular change processing, this special figure End the variable processing. Therefore, after the effect for the game round is started, the special figure changing process is started every time the special figure special electric control process is started until the final stop display timing is reached. In addition, when it is time to display the final stop, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1, so that the numerical information of the counter is changed from the one corresponding to the special figure changing process to the special figure finalizing process. Update to the corresponding one.

When the value of the special figure special electric counter is "2", the process jumps to the special figure finalizing process in step S1008. In the process of confirming the special figure, the final stop command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 121 in order to display the stop result of the current game round on the symbol display device 41, and the variable display target in the current game round. The display mode of the pattern on the special figure display units 45a and 45b is the display mode corresponding to the lottery result of this game. In the process of confirming the special figure, it is determined whether or not the period during the final stop display has elapsed, and if the period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the transition to the open / close execution mode occurs. When the transition to the open / close execution mode occurs, the process for transition to the mode is executed. By the way, instead of waiting in the special figure finalizing process until the period during the final stop display has elapsed, the special figure finalizing process is terminated when the period has not elapsed. Therefore, after the final stop display is started, the special figure finalizing process is started every time the special figure special electric control process is started until the period during the final stop display elapses. In addition, when the period during the final stop display has elapsed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" in the situation where the transition to the open / close execution mode does not occur, and the transition to the open / close execution mode occurs. Then, by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter, the numerical information of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special figure finalizing process to the one corresponding to the special electric start process.

When the value of the special electric power counter is "3", the process jumps to the special electric power start processing in step S1009. In the special electric start processing, an opening command indicating that the open / close execution mode is started is transmitted to the voice emission control device 121. As a result, the opening effect is started by the display light emitting unit 18a, the speaker unit 18b, and the symbol display device 41. Further, in the special electric start processing, it is determined whether or not the opening period of the open / close execution mode has elapsed. If the opening period has not passed, the special electric power start process is terminated instead of waiting in the special electric power start process. Therefore, after the opening effect of the open / close execution mode is started, the special electric power start process is started every time the special figure special electric power control process is started until the opening period elapses. In addition, when the opening period has elapsed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 to update the numerical information of the counter from the one corresponding to the special electric start processing to the one corresponding to the special electric open processing. ..

When the value of the special figure special electric counter is "4", the process jumps to the special electric opening processing in step S1010. In the processing during the opening of the special electric power, one round game is started, and it is determined whether or not the end condition of the round game is satisfied. At the start of one round game, the special electric winning device 35 is opened. If the end condition of the round game is not satisfied, the process for monitoring the establishment of the above end condition is executed instead of waiting in the process during the opening of the special electric power, and then the process during the opening of the special electric power is terminated. When the above termination condition is satisfied, by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special electric special electric counter, the numerical information of the counter can be changed from the one corresponding to the special electric open processing to the one corresponding to the special electric closed processing. Update.

When the value of the special figure special electric counter is "5", the process jumps to the special electric closed processing in step S1011. In the process of closing the special electric train, a process of ending one round game is executed. In this case, the special electric winning device 35 is closed. Further, in the interval period between round games, it is determined whether or not the interval period has elapsed. If the interval period has not elapsed, the processing during the closing of the special electric power is terminated instead of waiting in the processing during the closing of the special electric power. Therefore, when the interval period is started, the special electric power closing process is started every time the special electric power control process is started until the period elapses. In addition, when the interval period has elapsed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is subtracted by 1 to update the numerical information of the counter from the one corresponding to the special electric closed processing to the one corresponding to the special electric opening processing. do. On the other hand, in the special electric closed processing for the last round game, after executing the process of ending one round game, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1, so that the numerical information of the counter is changed to the special electric closed processing. Update from the corresponding one to the one corresponding to the special train end processing.

When the value of the special electric power counter is "6", the process jumps to the special electric power end processing in step S1012. In the special electric termination processing, an ending command indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is terminated is transmitted to the voice emission control device 121. As a result, the ending effect is started by the display light emitting unit 18a, the speaker unit 18b, and the symbol display device 41. Further, in the special electric power termination process, it is determined whether or not the ending period of the open / close execution mode has elapsed. If the ending period has not passed, the special train end process is terminated instead of waiting in the special train end process. Therefore, after the ending effect of the opening / closing execution mode is started, the special electric power end processing is started every time the special electric power control process is started until the ending period elapses. In addition, when the ending period has elapsed, after executing the game state transition process, by clearing the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter to "0", the numerical information of the counter is changed from the one corresponding to the special electric end process. Update to the one corresponding to the special figure change start processing.

In the game state transition process, if the jackpot result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode this time is a low probability response result, the winning / fail lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low probability support mode. Execute the process for setting the game state to the state. If the jackpot result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode this time is the first high-probability response result, the win / fail lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode. Execute the process for setting the game state to the high probability state. If the jackpot result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode this time is the second high-probability response result, the win / fail lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the second high-frequency support mode. Execute the process for setting the game state to the high probability state.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special figure fluctuation start process (step S1006).

In the special figure change start process, the data setting process is executed on condition that the hold information is stored in any of the first special figure hold area 133 and the second special figure hold area 134 (step S1101: YES). (Step S1102). In the data setting process, when the hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 134, the second special figure hold regardless of whether the hold information is stored in the first special figure hold area 133. The reserved information stored in the first area 134a of the area 134 is moved to the execution area 135 for special drawing. After that, the process of shifting the hold information stored in each of the areas 134a to 134d of the second special figure hold area 134 is executed. In this data shift process, the data in the first area 134a is cleared, the second area 134b → the first area 134a, the third area 134c → the second area 134b, the fourth area 134d → the third area 134c, and so on. The data in the area is shifted. Further, in the data setting process, when the hold information is not stored in the second special figure hold area 134 and the hold information is further stored in the first special figure hold area 133, the first special figure hold area is stored. The reserved information stored in the first area 133a of 133 is moved to the execution area 135 for special drawing. After that, the process of shifting the hold information stored in each area 133a to 133d of the first special figure hold area 133 is executed. In this data shift process, the data in the first area 133a is cleared, and the second area 133b → the first area 133a, the third area 133c → the second area 133b, the fourth area 133d → the third area 133c, and so on. The data in the area is shifted. When the data setting process is executed as described above and the hold information is stored in both the first special figure hold area 133 and the second special figure hold area 134, the second special figure winning device 34 The hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 134 corresponding to the above is prioritized as the start target of the game round.

After that, the pass / fail determination process is executed (step S1103). In the win / fail determination process, it is first determined whether or not the win / fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the case of the high probability mode, the hit / fail table for the high probability mode provided in the ROM 113 is referred to, and among the information stored in the execution area 135 for the special figure, the information for the hit / fail determination, that is, the hit random number counter C1 It is determined whether or not the numerical information obtained from is the same as the jackpot numerical information for high probability. Further, in the case of the low probability mode, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area 135 for the special figure is low by referring to the pass / fail table for the low probability mode provided in the ROM 113. Judge whether or not it matches the jackpot numerical information for probability.

After that, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination process is the jackpot winning result (step S1104). If it is a jackpot winning result (step S1104: YES), the distribution determination process is executed (step S1105). In the distribution determination process, when the game round this time is triggered by the hold information stored in the first special figure hold area 133, the distribution table for the first special figure (FIG. 14 (a)) is referred to. Then, among the information stored in the execution area 135 for the special figure, it is specified which jackpot result corresponds to the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2. On the other hand, in the distribution determination process, when the game round this time is triggered by the hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 134, the distribution table for the second special figure (FIG. 14 (b)) is used. With reference to, it is specified which jackpot result corresponds to the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 among the information stored in the execution area 135 for the special figure.

After that, the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S1106). Specifically, the information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display units 45a and 45b, which are the target of the variable display in this game, is stored in the ROM 113 in advance for the stop for the jackpot result. It is specified from the result table, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 114. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, information on the mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the special figure display units 45a and 45b is set differently for each type of jackpot result.

After that, the flag setting process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed (step S1107). Specifically, the RAM 114 is provided with a flag corresponding to each type of jackpot result, and in step S1107, among the flags corresponding to each type of jackpot result, it corresponds to the distribution determination result of step S1105. Set "1" for the flag.

On the other hand, if it is not the jackpot winning result (step S1104: NO), the stop result setting process for the loss result is executed (step S1108). Specifically, the information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display units 45a and 45b, which are the target of the variable display in this game, is stored in the ROM 113 in advance for the stop for the deviation result. It is specified from the result table, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 114. The information on the mode of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the mode of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result.

After executing any of the processes of step S1107 and step S1108, the display continuation period acquisition process is executed (step S1109). In such processing, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS is acquired. In addition, it is determined whether or not the reach display is generated by the symbol display device 41 in this game round. Specifically, when the game times corresponding to the start of the fluctuation this time correspond to the jackpot result, it is determined that the reach display occurs. Further, if it is not the result of any big hit and the numerical information acquired from the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area 135 for the special figure is the numerical information corresponding to the reach occurrence, the reach display occurs. judge. When it is determined that the reach display occurs, the display continuation period corresponding to the numerical information of the current variation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach generation display continuation period table stored in the ROM 113. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the display continuation period corresponding to the numerical information of the current variation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach non-occurrence display continuation period table stored in the ROM 113. do. Incidentally, the display duration that can be acquired by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table is different from the display duration that can be acquired by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table.

After that, the information of the display continuation period acquired in step S1109 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter provided in the RAM 114 (step S1110). The value set in the timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer update process (FIG. 18) is executed.

After that, the variable command and the type command are set as transmission targets to the voice emission control device 121 (step S1111). The variable command contains information on the display duration. Here, as described above, the display duration acquired by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table is different from the display duration acquired by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table, and therefore varies. Even if the command for command does not include information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence, the voice emission control device 121 can specify the presence or absence of reach occurrence from the information on the display continuation period. In addition, the type command includes information on the game result. When the variation command and the type command are transmitted to the voice light emission control device 121, the display light emission unit 18a, the speaker unit 18b, and the symbol display device 41 start the effect for the game round. The effect for the game round is executed over the display continuation period acquired in step S1109.

After that, the variable display of the pattern on the special figure display units 45a and 45b, which is the variable display target of the current game times, is started (step S1112). In this case, if the current game round is triggered by the hold information of the first special figure hold area 133, the variable display of the pattern on the first special figure display unit 45a is started, and the current game round is the second special figure. When the hold information of the hold area 134 is used as an opportunity, the variable display of the pattern on the second special figure display unit 45b is started. After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S1113). As a result, the process to be executed in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 26) becomes the special figure changing process (step S1007).

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Not only is the game ball paid out when the game ball enters the branch winning device 37, but the entered game ball is located on the downstream side of the first derivation area 65c of the branch winning device 37 and the second derivation area. By flowing into any of 65d, a privilege different from the payout of the game ball is given. As a result, a plurality of benefits will be given by the game ball entering the branch winning device 37, and it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the game ball will enter the branch winning device 37. Become. In this case, the branch winning device 37 detects the branch winning on the upstream side of the switching piece 67 that guides the game ball flowing down the branch passage 65 to either the downstream side of the first lead-out area 65c or the second lead-out area 65d. A sensor 66a is provided, and when the game ball is detected by the branch winning detection sensor 66a, the game ball is paid out, and further, the first lead-out area 65c or the second lead-out on the downstream side of the switching piece 67 is executed. When the game ball flows into the area 65d, a privilege different from the payout of the game ball is given. As a result, even if the passage length dimension of the passage area extending to the downstream side of the first lead-out area 65c or the second lead-out area 65d is increased, the game ball is paid out for the game ball entering the branch winning device 37. It will be possible to do it early. Therefore, the passage configuration of the passage region leading to the downstream side of the first out-licensing region 65c or the second out-licensing region 65d while enabling the game ball to be paid out at an early stage in response to the game ball entering the branch winning device 37. It is possible to increase the degree of freedom in design.

When the game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37 flows into the downstream side of the first derivation area 65c, the first special figure winning device 33 that triggers the acquisition of the hold information to be executed for the hit / fail determination process When the game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37 flows into the second out-licensing area 65d in the accepted state, the second special figure winning device 34 that triggers the acquisition of the hold information to be executed in the winning / failing determination process. Is in the accepted state. Then, the second special feature is more than the case where the hit / fail determination process is executed for the hold information (hereinafter, also referred to as the first hold information) acquired when the game ball enters the first special figure winning device 33. The configuration is more advantageous for the player when the pass / fail determination process is executed for the hold information (hereinafter, also referred to as the second hold information) acquired when the game ball enters the winning device 34. be. As a result, the player expects that the game ball entered in the branch winning device 37 will be guided to the second out-licensing area 65d, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the first high probability state, the game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37 surely flows into the downstream side of the first out-licensing region 65c, while in the second high probability state, the game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37. Will surely flow into the second derivation region 65d. This makes it possible to create a state in which the game ball easily flows into the first out-licensing region 65c and a state in which the game ball easily flows into the second out-licensing region 65d.

Further, when the game ball flows into the downstream side of the first derivation area 65c, the first special figure winning device 33, which triggers the acquisition of the first hold information, is in the accepting state, and the game ball is placed in the second derivation area 65d. In the case of inflow, the second special figure winning device 34, which triggers the acquisition of the second reserved information, is in the accepted state. Then, as described above, it is more advantageous for the player when the second reserved information is the target of the hit / miss determination process than when the first hold information is the target of the hit / fail determination process. Therefore, the player not only expects to be in one of the high-probability states, but also expects to be in the second high-probability state rather than the first high-probability state. As a result, the player's expectation can be gradually increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In a configuration in which the through winning unit 36 and the branch winning device 37 are provided in the right side area PA3 of the game area PA, the game ball is supplied to a position upstream of the through winning unit 36 and the branch winning device 37 in the right side area PA3. A first distribution mechanism 71 and a second distribution mechanism 72 that sequentially change the distribution direction are provided. The first distribution mechanism 71 is provided on the upstream side of the second distribution mechanism 72, and the game ball distributed when the first distribution mechanism 71 is in a predetermined distribution direction is the second distribution mechanism 72. Is supplied to. Then, when the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the situation where the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 are in the first distribution state, the game is played toward the through winning unit 36. When a ball is supplied and a game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in a situation where the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 are in the second distribution state, the game ball is directed toward the branch entrance 61. The game ball is supplied. As a result, by playing the game so that the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71, the game ball can be supplied toward the through winning unit 36, and the game ball can be supplied to the branch entrance 61. It becomes possible to supply the game ball toward the target. Further, by appropriately designing the configurations of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72, the frequency with which the game balls are supplied toward the through winning unit 36 and the game balls are supplied toward the branch entrance 61. The frequency can be set to the frequency desired by the designer. Furthermore, it is possible to supply the game ball to the branch entrance 61 after a predetermined period has elapsed since the game ball was supplied to the through winning unit 36, and the game ball entered the through winning unit 36. Based on this, when the branch winning device 37 is in the open state, it is possible to ensure that the game ball is supplied to the branch winning device 37 in the open state.

When nine game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 as a specific number, the combination of the distribution states of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 makes one round. As a result, by supplying the game ball to the first distribution mechanism 71, it is possible to repeatedly distribute the game ball in a certain mode.

Only the game balls distributed by the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 can enter the through winning unit 36 and the branch winning device 37. This makes it easy to design the frequency of entering the through winning unit 36 and the branch winning device 37 to a desired frequency.

Three game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 are directed toward the branch entrance 61 with respect to the game balls distributed toward the through winning portion 36 by the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72. It is sorted. As a result, it is possible to secure a period from when the game ball enters the through winning unit 36 until the game ball is supplied to the branch winning device 37. Therefore, when the branch winning device 37 is opened based on the fact that the game ball has entered the through winning unit 36, the game ball is surely supplied to the branch winning device 37 which is in the open state. In this case, it is possible to secure a period until the branch winning device 37 is opened when the game ball enters the through winning unit 36.

Before the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 change from the state of distributing the game ball toward the through winning unit 36 to the state of distributing the game ball toward the branch winning device 37, what is the distribution direction thereof? The game balls are distributed in different distribution directions. As a result, using the period in which the game ball is distributed to a side different from the through winning unit 36 and the branch winning device 37, the game ball enters the through winning unit 36 and then the branch winning device 37. It is possible to secure a certain long period until the supply of.

Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the through winning unit 36, the variable display of the pattern is executed on the normal map display unit 46, and when the variable display of the pattern is completed, the branch winning device 37 is opened. In this configuration, as described above, the period from when the game ball enters the through winning unit 36 until the game ball is supplied to the branch winning device 37 is secured to some extent, so that the through winning unit 36 receives the game ball. When the branch winning device 37 is opened based on the fact that the ball is entered, the branch winning device 37 is used to ensure that the game ball is supplied to the branch winning device 37 which is in the open state. It is possible to secure a period in which the variable display of the pattern is executed on the normal map display unit 46 before the is opened.

In the first high-probability state and the second high-probability state, when the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 with the shortest firing cycle, the through winning unit 36 is supplied with the game ball and then the branch winning device. The variable display of the pattern is performed on the normal map display unit 46 for a specific period equal to or less than the period required for the game ball to be supplied to the 37. As a result, in the situation where the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle in the first high probability state or the second high probability state, the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 71 are supplied. When the game ball distributed by 72 enters the through winning unit 36, the game ball distributed to the branch winning device 37 by the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 is the branch entrance 61. It is possible to make the branch winning device 37 open before reaching.

On the other hand, in the low probability state, when the branch winning device 37 is opened based on the game ball entering the through winning unit 36, the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle. Even if this is done, the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 has already been completed at the timing when the game ball is supplied to the branch winning device 37, and the branch winning device 37 is in the closed state. As a result, even if the branch winning device 37 may be in the open state in the low probability state, it is substantially impossible for the game ball to enter the branch winning device 37. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the advantages of the first high-probability state and the second high-probability state.

In either the first high-probability state or the second high-probability state, the game ball distributed to the through winning unit 36 by the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 has a shortest firing cycle of 3 After that, the game ball supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 enters the branch winning device 37 in the open state, while in the first high probability state, the game ball entering the branch winning device 37 is surely entered. Open / close control of the branch winning device 37 so that the game ball that flows into the downstream side of the first derivation area 65c and enters the branch winning device 37 in the second high probability state surely flows into the second derivation area 65d. The start timing and the switching timing of the passage by the switching piece 67 are set. As a result, the game ball is supplied to the downstream side of the first derivation region 65c in the first high probability state while the operation mode of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 is common. In the stochastic state, it is possible to supply the game ball to the second derivation region 65d. Further, while the number of game balls required from the supply of the game balls to the through winning unit 36 to the supply of the game balls to the branch winning device 37 is a common number, the first derivation is performed in the first high probability state. The game ball is supplied to the downstream side of the region 65c, and in the second high probability state, the game ball can be supplied to the second derivation region 65d.

In a configuration in which the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are arranged side by side in the right side region PA3, the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 are the third. When the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the distribution state, the game ball is supplied to the juxtaposed area of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34. As a result, by performing a firing operation so that the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71, the game balls are supplied to each of the through winning unit 36 and the branch winning device 37 in a predetermined order. At the same time, it is possible to supply the game balls to the juxtaposed areas of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 in the above-mentioned predetermined order.

In particular, when the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction and the first special figure winning device 33 existing on the upstream side is in a non-accepting state. The game ball that has flowed into the setting area flows down toward the second special figure winning device 34. As a result, even if the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are not individually distributed by the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72, the first is not required. It is possible to supply the game ball to the side of the 1 special figure winning device 33 and the 2nd special drawing winning device 34 that is in the receiving state.

When the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 are in a state of distributing the game ball to the juxtaposed area of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34, the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 By the time the game balls are distributed to the through winning unit 36, a special number or more of the game balls are supplied to the juxtaposed area of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34, and the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 are in the accepted state. In that case, a special number of game balls enter to return to the non-accepted state. As a result, when the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 are in the accepted state, the game ball can be supplied to the through winning unit 36 after the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 are in the non-accepted state. This makes it possible to allow a game ball to enter the through winning unit 36 in a situation where the special drawing winning devices 33 and 34 are in a non-accepting state.

The branch winning device 37 is provided at a position vertically below the second distribution mechanism 72. As a result, it becomes possible to smoothly supply the game ball to the branch winning device 37, which is opened when the ball enters the through winning unit 36. Therefore, even though the branch winning device 37 is opened due to the entry into the through winning section 36, the movement of the game ball distributed toward the branch winning device 37 by the second distribution mechanism 72 is It is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the branch winning device 37 is closed before the ball is entered into the branch winning device 37 due to disturbance on the way.

<Second embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the execution mode of the display control of the normal figure display unit 46 and the execution mode of the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 are uniquely different between the first high probability state and the second high probability state. However, in the present embodiment, the execution modes are not uniquely different between the first high-probability state and the second high-probability state. The different configurations will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a normal map fluctuation start process in the present embodiment.

In steps S1201 to S1205, the same processing as in steps S401 to S405 of the normal figure fluctuation start processing (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment is executed.

In a situation where acceptance control is not executed for both the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 (step S1201: NO), a prize is generated in the through winning unit 36. (Step S1202: YES), in the case of the first high-probability state (step S1203 and step S1206: YES), the induction lottery table in the first high-probability state is read from the ROM 113 (step S1207), and the second high-probability state is read. If (step S1203: YES, step S1206: NO), the induction lottery table in the second high probability state is read from the ROM 113 (step S1208). When the process of step S1207 or step S1208 is executed, the guided lottery process is executed (step S1209).

In the present embodiment, the types of combinations of the display control execution mode of the normal map display unit 46 and the opening / closing control execution mode of the branch winning device 37 are the types that enable the first trigger detection sensor 66b to win a prize, and the first. 2 The guided lottery process determines which of the types that enables the winning of the trigger detection sensor 66c. In this case, the type of the guided lottery table referred to in the guided lottery process is different between the case of the first high probability state and the case of the second high probability state. Specifically, in the guidance lottery table in the first high probability state, the probability that the combination of the above execution modes (hereinafter, also referred to as the first guidance mode) that enables the winning of the first trigger detection sensor 66b is selected. Is set to 80%, whereas the probability that the combination of the above-mentioned execution modes (hereinafter, also referred to as the second guidance mode) that enables the winning of the second trigger detection sensor 66c is selected is 20%. It is set. Further, in the guidance lottery table in the second high probability state, the probability that the first guidance mode is selected is set to 20%, whereas the probability that the second guidance mode is selected is set to 80%. Has been done. This makes it possible to give the second special figure winning device 34 an opportunity to be in the accepting state even in the first high probability state, and the first special figure winning device 33 even in the second high probability state. Can be given the opportunity to be accepted.

Further, although the situation in which the first special figure winning device 33 is in the accepted state and the situation in which the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepted state can occur in any of the high probability states, the configuration can occur. In the first high probability state, the probability that the first special figure winning device 33 is in the accepting state is higher than that in the second special figure winning device 34, and in the second high probability state, the second special figure is higher than the first special figure winning device 33. There is a high probability that the winning device 34 will be in the accepting state. Furthermore, the probability that the first special figure winning device 33 will be in the accepted state is higher in the first high probability state than in the second high probability state, and the probability that the second special figure winning device 34 will be in the accepted state is the first. The second high probability state is higher than the first high probability state. As a result, it is possible to give a difference between the first high-probability state and the second high-probability state with respect to the types of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 in which the chance of winning is likely to occur.

In the guided lottery process, the numerical information of the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the RAM 114 is acquired. Then, the numerical information acquired from the lottery counter is collated with the guided lottery table on the side read this time among the guided lottery table in the first high probability state and the guided lottery table in the second high probability state. In, either the first lead mode or the second lead mode is selected.

When the first guidance mode is selected by the guidance lottery process (step S1210: YES), the numerical information corresponding to 1.5 seconds as the fluctuation display period for the first guidance is set in the normal map fluctuation measurement counter of the RAM 114. , "1" is set in the first induction flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S1211). As a result, the variable display period of the variable display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 46 and the subsequent execution mode of the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 become the mode in the case of the first high probability state in the first embodiment. .. On the other hand, when the second guidance mode is selected by the guidance lottery process (step S1210: NO), the numerical information corresponding to 0.7 seconds as the fluctuation display period for the second guidance is set in the normal map fluctuation measurement counter of the RAM 114. At the same time, the first induction flag of the RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S1212). As a result, the variable display period of the variable display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 46 and the subsequent execution mode of the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 become the mode in the case of the second high probability state in the first embodiment. ..

After executing any of the processes of step S1205, step S1211, and step S1212, the variable display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 46 is started (step S1213). After that, the value of the Fuzu Fuden counter is added by 1 (step S1214). As a result, the execution target of the process in the Fuzu Fuden control process (FIG. 19) becomes the Fuzu changing process (step S306).

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map in the present embodiment.

In steps S1301 to S1306, the same processing as in steps S501 to S506 of the normal map changing process (FIG. 21) in the first embodiment is executed.

When it is the end timing of the variation display of the pattern on the normal figure display unit 46 (step S1301: YES) and any of the high probability states (step S1303: YES), the first induction flag of the RAM 114 is set to ". By determining whether or not 1 ”is set, it is determined whether or not the first guidance mode is selected in the guidance lottery process in the normal map fluctuation start process (FIG. 27) (step S1307). When "1" is set in the first induction flag (step S1307: YES), "1" is set in the normal power release count counter of the RAM 114, and the long open period is set in the normal power release period counter of the RAM 114. Numerical information corresponding to 0.8 seconds is set (step S1308). As a result, the execution mode of the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 becomes the mode in the case of the first high probability state in the first embodiment. When "1" is not set in the first induction flag (step S1307: NO), "2" is set in the normal power release count counter of the RAM 114, and the short open period is set in the normal power release period counter of the RAM 114. Numerical information corresponding to 0.1 seconds is set (step S1309). As a result, the execution mode of the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 becomes the mode in the case of the second high probability state in the first embodiment.

In steps S1310 to S1314, the same processing as in steps S510 to S514 of the processing during fluctuation of the normal map (FIG. 21) in the first embodiment is executed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, even in the first high probability state, the game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37 flows into the second derivation area 65d, and the second special figure winning device 34 is in the receiving state. Even in the second high probability state, the game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37 flows into the downstream side of the first out-licensing region 65c, and the first special figure winning device 33 is in the receiving state. Can happen. As a result, the game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37 flows into either the downstream side of the first out-licensing region 65c or the second out-licensing region 65d in either the first high-probability state or the second high-probability state. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it will be done.

On the other hand, in the first high probability state, the probability that the game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37 flows into the second derived region 65d is higher than the probability that it flows into the downstream side of the first derived region 65c, and the second In the high probability state, the probability that the game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37 will flow into the second out-licensing region 65d is higher than the probability that the game ball has flowed into the downstream side of the first out-licensing region 65c. As a result, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effect while ensuring that the second high-probability state is more advantageous to the player than the first high-probability state.

<Third embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration of the right region PA3 of the gaming region PA is different from that of the first embodiment. The different configurations will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 30 is a front view of the game board 24 showing the right side region PA3 in the present embodiment in an enlarged manner.

In the right area PA3, as in the first embodiment, the first special figure winning device 33, the second special figure winning device 34, the through winning unit 36, the branch winning device 37, and the first distribution mechanism 71, a second distribution mechanism 72, a first guide rail 99a, a second guide rail 99b, a third guide rail 99c, and a fourth guide rail 99d are provided. These configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment. Further, although these relative positional relationships are the same as those in the first embodiment, the positions where they are collectively arranged are slightly lower than those in the first embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the special electric winning device 35 is provided in the lower area PA4 of the game area PA, but in the present embodiment, the special electric winning device 35 is provided at the boundary portion between the upper area PA1 and the right side area PA3. ing. In this case, even if the launch operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, it is not possible to win a prize in the special electric winning device 35, and in order to generate a winning in the special electric winning device 35, the right side area PA3 It is necessary to perform a firing operation so that the game ball is fired toward.

The special electric winning device 35 includes a first special drawing winning device 33, a second special drawing winning device 34, a through winning section 36, a branch winning device 37, a first distribution mechanism 71, a second distribution mechanism 72, and each induction rail 99a. It will exist on the upstream side of ~ 99d. As a result, the number of obstacle members between the most upstream portion of the game area PA and the special electric winning device 35 is reduced, and winning the special electric winning device 35 is likely to occur.

The special electric winning device 35 exists above the first distribution mechanism 71, but between the special electric winning device 35 and the first distribution mechanism 71, the right area PA3 is located without winning the special electric winning device 35. A guide portion 141 toward the first distribution mechanism 71 is formed by a large number of nails 24b so that the game ball flowing down the ball is reliably supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71. As a result, the game ball flowing down the right side region PA3 without winning the special electric winning device 35 is surely supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71. The game ball supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 has a through winning unit 36 according to each distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72, as in the first embodiment. It is guided to either the side, the branch entrance 61 side of the branch winning device 37, or the side of the parallel area of the special figure winning devices 33, 34.

A special winning section 142 is provided at a position vertically below the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37. The special winning section 142 is open vertically upward, and the game ball winning the special winning section 142 is guided to the back side of the game board 24 and discharged. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special winning section 142 is provided in a gate shape penetrating in the vertical direction like the through winning section 36, and the game ball winning the special winning section 142 is directly used in the game area PA. It may be configured to continue the flow. If one game ball wins in the special winning section 142, nine game balls will be paid out.

A game ball that is vertically distributed downward by the second distribution mechanism 72 and guided toward the branch entrance 61 by the third guide rail 99c between the special winning unit 142 and the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37. A special guidance rail 143 is provided so as to reliably guide the game ball that has not won the branch winning device 37 to the special winning unit 142. The special guide rail 143 is provided so as to pass in the vertical direction in front of the transparent cover 69 of the branch winning device 37, but is formed transparent like the transparent cover 69, so that the game inside the branch winning device 37 can be played. The rolling mode of the ball can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the transparent cover 69 and the special guide rail 143.

The first distribution mechanism 71 of the game ball supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 three times after the game ball that won the through prize unit 36, although the through winning unit 36 was awarded in any of the high probability states. Alternatively, if the arrival timing to the branch entrance 61 is later than usual due to a delay in launching, or when the game ball reaches the branch entrance 61, the branch winning device 37 is already closed and the branch winning device is closed. There is a possibility that the prize for 37 will not occur. In this case, if it is attempted to generate a prize in the branch winning device 37, it is necessary to generate a prize in the through winning unit 36 again. However, in order to generate a prize in the through winning unit 36 again, the first swing is performed. It is necessary to supply a plurality of game balls to the first distribution mechanism 71 so that each distribution state of the distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 is in a state of distributing the game balls to the through winning unit 36. Similar to the first embodiment, nine game balls are required from the state in which the game balls are distributed to the through winning unit 36 until the game balls are distributed to the through winning unit 36 next time. Therefore, if the winning of the branch winning device 37 is missed as described above, nine game balls are wasted.

On the other hand, the game ball that is guided toward the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37 but does not win the branch winning device 37 is surely guided to the special winning section 142 by being guided by the special guidance rail 143. If you win a prize and then win a prize in the special prize section 142, nine game balls will be paid out. As a result, even if the winning to the branch winning device 37 is missed as described above, the payout of nine game balls will surely occur as compensation, so that it is possible to suppress the disadvantage of the player. Become.

In the configuration in which the special electric winning device 35 is provided at the boundary between the upper region PA1 and the right region PA3, the game ball fired toward the right region PA3 in the open / close execution mode but does not win the special electric winning device 35. It will be supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71. In the open / close execution mode, the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode. Therefore, in the open / close execution mode, even if a prize is given to the through winning unit 36, the branch winning device 37 is not substantially won. In this case, since the special winning unit 142 is provided as described above, even if the game ball launched toward the right area PA3 in the open / close execution mode does not win the special electric winning device 35, the first distribution is performed. One of the nine game balls supplied to the mechanism 71 wins the special winning unit 142, and the nine game balls are paid out. As a result, even if the game ball launched toward the right side region PA3 in the open / close execution mode does not win the special electric winning device 35, it is possible to compensate for the game ball by that amount.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the right region PA3 of the gaming region PA is different from that of the first embodiment. The different configurations will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 31 is a front view of the game board 24 showing the right side region PA3 in the present embodiment in an enlarged manner.

Similar to the first embodiment, the right side region PA3 is provided with a second special figure winning device 34, a through winning portion 36, and a first distribution mechanism 71. These configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment. However, in the present embodiment, the first special figure winning device 33, the branch winning device 37, and the second distribution mechanism 72 are not provided in the game area PA including the right side area PA3. Since the first special figure winning device 33 is not provided, the winning portion that causes the storage of the reserved information in the first special figure holding area 133 is provided in the lower area PA4 of the game area PA. Only the normal winning section 32 is available (see FIG. 3).

Further, in response to the fact that the branch winning device 37 is not provided, an opportunity to switch the second special figure winning device 34 from the non-accepted state to the accepted state is generated based on the winning of the through winning unit 36. There is. In this case, when the second special figure winning device 34 is not immediately switched from the non-accepted state to the accepted state when the through winning unit 36 is awarded, but when the through winning unit 36 is awarded. The variable display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 46 is started, and when the variable display of the pattern is completed, the second special figure winning device 34 is switched from the non-accepted state to the accepted state.

By the way, in correspondence with the fact that the first special figure winning device 33 and the branch winning device 37 are not provided, only two types of support modes, a high frequency support mode and a low frequency support mode, are set in this embodiment. Has been done. In the high-frequency support mode, when a prize is won in the through winning unit 36, the variation display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 46 is performed over 0.8 seconds, which is the variation display period for high support. When the variable display of the pattern on the normal drawing display unit 46 is completed, the second special drawing winning device 34 is surely in the accepting state. The acceptance state is a period longer than the shortest firing cycle of the game ball after one game ball wins the second special figure winning device 34 and the second special figure winning device 34 becomes the accepting state. It ends when any of the conditions that 1.5 seconds, which is the long acceptance period set as, elapses, are satisfied.

In the low-frequency support mode, when a prize is won in the through winning unit 36, the variation display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 46 is performed over 0.4 seconds, which is the variation display period for low support. Further, when a prize is won in the through winning unit 36, the acceptance lottery process is executed, and the acceptance winning is achieved with a predetermined probability of less than 100% in the acceptance lottery process. If the acceptance is won, the second special figure winning device 34 is in the acceptance state at the timing when the variable display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 46 is completed, but the acceptance state is more than the shortest firing cycle of the game ball. When 0.1 seconds, which is a short acceptance period set as a short period, has elapsed, the process ends even if no prize has been awarded to the second special figure winning device 34.

In the present embodiment, the game states are a high-probability state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is a high-probability mode and the support mode is a high-probability support mode, and the winning / failing lottery mode is a low-probability mode and the support mode is a high-frequency support mode. There are three types, a first low-probability state and a second low-probability state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. After the end of the open / close execution mode, if a high probability response result is obtained in the distribution determination process (step S1105) of the MPU 112, which is executed when the jackpot is won in the hit / fail determination process (step S1103) in the MPU 112. When the high probability state is reached and the low probability response result is obtained, the first low probability state is reached after the end of the open / close execution mode. The high probability state continues until the next jackpot result. The first low-probability state ends when any of 33, 55, 77, and 110 game times corresponding to the end reference number of times is executed without a jackpot result, and the second low-probability state ends. Move to.

Regardless of whether the hold information stored in the first special figure hold area 133 or the hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 134 is the target of the pass / fail determination process, the probability of achieving a high-accuracy response result is 80. It is constant at%. However, if a highly accurate response result is obtained triggered by the hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 134, the number of round games is more than the probability that the open / close execution mode in which the number of round games is 8 times occurs. The probability that the open / close execution mode of 16 times occurs is higher. On the other hand, when the high-accuracy response result is obtained triggered by the hold information stored in the first special figure hold area 133, the round is more than the probability that the open / close execution mode in which the number of round games is 16 times occurs. The probability that the open / close execution mode in which the number of games is eight is higher is higher. As a result, it is more advantageous for the player when the hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 134 is the target of the pass / fail determination process. Incidentally, in the data setting process (step S1102) of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 27), the same process as that of the first embodiment is executed, so that the first special figure hold area 133 and the second special figure hold area are executed. When the hold information is stored in both of the 134s, the hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 134 is prioritized as the start target of the game round.

When the low probability response result is obtained triggered by the hold information stored in the first special figure hold area 133, the end reference number is 33 times after the open / close execution mode in which the number of round games is 8 times occurs. It shifts to a certain first low probability state. On the other hand, when the low probability response result is obtained triggered by the hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 134, the end reference number of times is set after the open / close execution mode in which the number of round games is eight times occurs. It shifts to the first low-probability state, which is one of 33 times, 55 times, 77 times, and 110 times. In this case, the selection rate of these end reference times is 25%, which is the same.

In the high probability state, if either the high probability response result or the low probability response result of 8 rounds is triggered by the hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 134, which jackpot result is triggered in the open / close execution mode. The effect of the display light emitting unit 18a, the speaker unit 18b, and the symbol display device 41 is executed in such a manner that it is difficult or impossible for the player to identify. In addition, even after the open / close execution mode ends, if the low probability response result is an opportunity, the player cannot easily identify or identify whether the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode until the high frequency support mode ends. The effect of the display light emitting unit 18a, the speaker unit 18b, and the symbol display device 41 is executed in an impossible manner, and when the high probability response result is used as an opportunity, the winning / failing lottery mode is high until 110 game times are exhausted. The display in the light emitting unit 18a, the speaker unit 18b, and the symbol display device 41 is executed in such a manner that it is difficult or impossible for the player to identify whether or not the mode is the probability mode. As a result, it is possible to make the player expect that the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode while the high frequency support mode continues during the opening / closing execution mode and after the opening / closing execution mode.

In the first embodiment, the special electric winning device 35 is provided in the lower area PA4 of the game area PA, but in the present embodiment, the special electric winning device 35 is provided at the boundary portion between the upper area PA1 and the right side area PA3. ing. In this case, even if the launch operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, it is not possible to win a prize in the special electric winning device 35, and in order to generate a winning in the special electric winning device 35, the right side area PA3 It is necessary to perform a firing operation so that the game ball is fired toward.

The first distribution mechanism 71 uses the game ball supplied from above as in the first embodiment to the left of the first distribution mechanism 71, vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71, and the first distribution mechanism 71. It is configured to distribute to one of the right sides of one distribution mechanism 71, and each time one game ball is distributed, the left side of the first distribution mechanism 71 → vertically downward of the first distribution mechanism 71 → The distribution state of the game ball is sequentially changed, such as from the right side of the first distribution mechanism 71 to the left side of the first distribution mechanism 71.

Here, a state in which the game ball is guided by the first distribution mechanism 71 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 32. FIG. 32 (a) shows the timing at which the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71, and FIG. 32 (b) shows the period during which the game ball is distributed to the left by the first distribution mechanism 71. FIG. 32 (c) shows a period in which the game ball is distributed vertically downward by the first distribution mechanism 71, and FIG. 32 (d) shows the game ball being distributed to the right by the first distribution mechanism 71. Indicates the period.

In the situation where the game ball is stored in the upper plate of the upper bulging portion 19a, the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle by continuing the operation with the maximum operation amount of the firing operation device 28. Will be done. As a result, as shown in FIG. 32 (a), there are fixed intervals at each of the timing of t1, the timing of t3, the timing of t5, the timing of t7, the timing of t9, the timing of t11, the timing of t13, and the timing of t15. The game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71.

Of these, at the timing of t1, the timing of t7, and the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), the state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a state of distributing the game ball toward the left. Therefore, the game ball supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 is distributed toward the left side of the first distribution mechanism 71. In this case, when the game ball targeted for distribution collides with the ball distribution unit 83 of the first distribution mechanism 71, the ball distribution unit 83 rotates by 120 °, and the timing of t2 and the timing of t8. And at the timing of t14, as shown in FIGS. 32 (b) and 32 (c), the first distribution mechanism 71 distributes the game ball vertically downward from the state of distributing the game ball toward the left. It changes to the state of distribution.

At the timing of t3, the timing of t9, and the timing of t15, as shown in FIG. 32 (c), the state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a state of distributing the game ball vertically downward. Therefore, the game ball supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 is distributed vertically downward of the first distribution mechanism 71. In this case, when the game ball targeted for distribution collides with the ball distribution unit 83 of the first distribution mechanism 71, the ball distribution unit 83 rotates by 120 °, and the timing of t4 and the timing of t10. And at the timing of t16, as shown in FIGS. 32 (c) and 32 (d), the first distribution mechanism 71 distributes the game ball vertically downward to the right. It changes to the state of distribution.

At the timing of t5 and the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 32 (d), the state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a state of distributing the game ball toward the right. Therefore, the game ball supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 is distributed toward the right side of the first distribution mechanism 71. In this case, when the game ball targeted for distribution collides with the ball distribution unit 83 of the first distribution mechanism 71, the ball distribution unit 83 rotates by 120 °, and the timing of t6 and the timing of t12. As shown in FIGS. 32 (b) and 32 (d), the first distribution mechanism 71 changes from a state in which the game ball is distributed to the right to a state in which the game ball is distributed to the left. do.

As described above, the game balls supplied to the ball distribution unit 83 of the first distribution mechanism 71 are distributed to the left of the first distribution mechanism 71 at a rate of 1 in 3, and 1 in 3 is distributed. It is distributed vertically downward of the first distribution mechanism 71 by a ratio, and is distributed to the right of the first distribution mechanism 71 at a ratio of 1 in 3.

The first distribution mechanism 71 is provided at a position downstream of the special electric winning device 35 in the right side area PA3 and upstream of the second special drawing winning device 34 and the through winning unit 36 in the right side area PA3. There is. Between the special electric winning device 35 and the first distribution mechanism 71, a game ball flowing down the right area PA3 without winning the special electric winning device 35 is surely supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71. A guide portion 151 directed to the first distribution mechanism 71 is formed by a large number of nails 24b. As a result, the game ball flowing down the right side region PA3 without winning the special electric winning device 35 is surely supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71. In other words, the game ball that will flow into the downstream side of the first distribution mechanism 71 in the right side region PA3 is surely supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 before flowing into the downstream side.

The right region PA3 is provided with a first guide rail 152 for guiding the game ball distributed to the left of the first distribution mechanism 71 to the lower left position of the first distribution mechanism 71. Neither the second special figure winning device 34 nor the through winning portion 36 is provided at the position where the game ball is guided by the first guide rail 152, and the game ball guided by the first guide rail 152 is the first. 2 The special figure winning device 34 and the through winning section 36 are not awarded to any of the winning sections provided in the right area PA3, and the rails flow toward the lower area PA4.

The right region PA3 is provided with a second guide rail 153 for guiding the game ball distributed vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71 to a position vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71. The second special figure winning device 34 is provided at a position where the game ball is guided by the second guide rail 153, and the game is distributed vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71 and guided by the second guide rail 153. The ball will surely win the second special figure winning device 34 if the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state. As described above, the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state when the through winning section 36 is won. The acceptance state ends when either one of the conditions that one game ball wins the second special figure winning device 34 and the acceptance period elapses is satisfied, and the state returns to the non-accepted state. When one game ball wins in the second special figure winning device 34, three game balls are paid out and the second special figure holding area 134 is executed as in the first embodiment. Hold information is stored in.

On the other hand, if the second special figure winning device 34 is in the non-accepting state, the game ball distributed vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71 and guided by the second guide rail 153 is the second special figure. Without winning a prize in the winning device 34, the passage portion 59a of the cover member 59 of the second special drawing winning device 34 is penetrated in the vertical direction. The third guide rail 154 is provided so as to guide the game ball that has penetrated the passage portion 59a of the second special figure winning device 34 in the vertical direction further vertically downward. Further, a special winning portion 155 is provided at a position where the game ball is guided by the third guide rail 154.

The special winning section 155 is open vertically upward, and the game ball winning the special winning section 155 is guided to the back side of the game board 24 and discharged. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special winning section 155 is provided in a gate shape penetrating in the vertical direction like the through winning section 36, and the game ball winning the special winning section 155 is directly used in the game area PA. It may be configured to continue the flow. If one game ball wins in the special prize section 155, three game balls will be paid out. A game ball that is distributed vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71 and is guided by the second lead rail 153 but does not win the second special figure winning device 34 is special by being guided by the third guide rail 154. Make sure to win the prize section 155.

The right region PA3 is provided with a fourth guide rail 156 for guiding the game ball distributed to the right of the first distribution mechanism 71 to the lower right position of the first distribution mechanism 71. A through winning portion 36 is provided at a position where the game ball is guided by the fourth guide rail 156, and the game ball distributed to the right of the first distribution mechanism 71 and guided by the fourth guide rail 156 is reliable. To win the through prize section 36. As described above, the through winning unit 36 has a through hole that penetrates in the vertical direction, and the game ball passes through the through hole in the vertical direction, so that the through winning unit 36 is awarded a prize. Then, the game ball that has passed through the through hole of the through winning portion 36 in the vertical direction is not discharged from the game area PA, and continues to flow down the game area PA as it is. In this case, since the game ball that has passed through the through winning section 36 flows vertically downward, it is guided to the second special drawing winning device 34 and the special winning section 155 existing on the left side of the through winning section 36. There is no such thing.

In a configuration in which game balls are sequentially distributed in three directions by the first distribution mechanism 71, a second special figure winning device 34 is provided at a position vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71, and the first distribution mechanism 71. Since the through winning section 36 is provided at the lower right position of the above, the gaming balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the order following the game balls that will win the through winning section 36 are the second. The game ball supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 is guided to the second special figure winning device 34 in the following order without being guided to the special figure winning device 34. As a result, it is possible to secure a long shortest period from the occurrence of winning the through winning unit 36 to the guidance of the game ball to the second special figure winning device 34. Using this secured period, it is possible to perform variable display of the pattern on the general map display unit 46. Further, the processing time is set so that the variable display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 46 is completed within this secured period and the transition to the acceptance state of the second special figure winning device 34 is completed. Even when the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle, the game ball is guided to the second special figure winning device 34 after winning the through winning unit 36. Until then, the second special figure winning device 34 can be made to be in the accepting state, and the game ball guided by the second special figure winning device 34 can be reliably transferred to the second special figure winning device 34. It will be possible to win a prize.

The passage length dimension of the guide passage by the fourth guide rail 156 from the first distribution mechanism 71 to the through winning portion 36 is the guidance by the second guide rail 153 from the first distribution mechanism 71 to the second special figure winning device 34. It is set larger than the passage length dimension of the passage. When the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle, one game ball is distributed vertically downward by the first distribution mechanism 71, and then one game ball is the first. The period required for distribution to the right by the distribution mechanism 71 is the same as or substantially the same as the shortest firing cycle.

In this configuration, the passage length dimension of the guide passage by the fourth guide rail 156 is set to be larger than the passage length dimension of the guide passage by the second guide rail 153, so that the first distribution mechanism 71 distributes vertically downward. The time required for the game ball distributed to the right by the first distribution mechanism 71 to win the through winning unit 36 is longer than the time required for the game ball to win the second special figure winning device 34. It will be possible to secure it for a long time. As a result, it is possible to secure a long shortest period from the occurrence of the winning of the second special figure winning device 34 in the accepted state to the occurrence of the winning of the through winning unit 36.

When the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state, the through winning unit 36 invalidates the winning. Further, even if the winning of the second special drawing winning device 34 is detected by the detection sensor 54 of the second special drawing winning device 34, the MPU 112 subsequently puts the second special drawing winning device 34 in the non-accepting state. It is necessary to execute the process of, and the winning of the through winning unit 36 is invalidated until the processing is completed. In this case, the shortest period required from the occurrence of the prize to the second special figure winning device 34 in the accepted state to the occurrence of the prize to the through winning unit 36 is secured for a long time. 2 By the time the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 reach the through winning unit 36 in the order following the game balls to be won in the special figure winning device 34, the second special figure winning device 34 is used. The process of making the non-accepted state has been surely completed, and the transition to the situation where the winning to the through winning unit 36 is valid has been surely completed.

In this embodiment, as described above, only two types of support modes, a high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode, are set. However, in the high-frequency support mode, when a prize is awarded to the through winning unit 36, a prize is generated. After the variable display of the pattern on the normal drawing display unit 46, the second special drawing winning device 34 is surely in the accepting state. Here, the winning mode of the game ball in the high frequency support mode (that is, the high probability state) will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 33. 33 (a) shows the timing when the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71, FIG. 33 (b) shows the timing of winning the through winning unit 36, and FIG. 33 (c) shows the normal drawing display unit. In 46, the variation display period of the pattern is shown, FIG. 33 (d) shows the period during which the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state, and FIG. 33 (e) shows the winning timing to the second special figure winning device 34. show.

By continuously operating the launch operation device 28 in a situation where the game ball is stored in the upper plate of the upper bulging portion 19a, the game ball can be released in the shortest firing cycle (specifically, 0.6 seconds). It is supplied to the game area PA. In this case, if the amount of operation by the player of the launch operation device 28 is the maximum amount of operation, the game ball is supplied to the right area PA3, but the game ball supplied to the right area PA3 has already been described. All of them are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 as described above. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 33A, the first distribution mechanism 71 has the shortest firing cycle at each of the timing of t1, the timing of t3, the timing of t5, the timing of t8, the timing of t10, and the timing of t12. A game ball is supplied to.

At the timing of t1, the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is the distribution state of guiding the game ball to the through winning unit 36, so that the game ball supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t1. Will win the through winning unit 36 at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 33 (b). As a result, as shown in FIG. 33 (c), the variable display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 46 is started at the timing of t2. The variation display period of the pattern of the normal map display unit 46 in the high frequency support mode is constant at 0.8 seconds, which is longer than the shortest firing cycle of the game ball and shorter than twice the shortest firing cycle. There is.

After that, the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. 33 (a) at the timing of t3 in which the variable display of the pattern is continued on the normal map display unit 46. In this case, since the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is the distribution state of guiding the game ball to the left, the game ball supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t3 is the second. The area is different from the area where the special drawing winning device 34 and the special winning section 155 are provided, and is guided to a different area from the area where the through winning section 36 is provided. Therefore, the game ball flows down to the lower region PA4 as it is without winning any of the second special figure winning device 34, the through winning section 36, and the special winning section 155.

After that, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 33 (c), the variable display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 46 ends. Since the high-frequency support mode is used, the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state as shown in FIG. 33 (d) at the timing of t4 when the variable display of the pattern on the normal figure display unit 46 is completed. This acceptance state is continued until either one of the conditions that one game ball wins the second special figure winning device 34 and that the long acceptance period elapses is satisfied.

After that, at the timing of t5 in which the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state, the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. 33 (a). In this case, since the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is the distribution state of guiding the game ball to the second special figure winning device 34, it was supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t5. As shown in FIG. 33 (e), the game ball wins the second special figure winning device 34 at the timing of t6. After that, the process for returning the second special figure winning device 34 to the non-accepted state by the MPU 112 is completed, so that the second special figure winning device 34 is non-accepted at the timing of t7 as shown in FIG. 33 (d). Return to the accepted state.

After that, at the timing of t8 in which the second special figure winning device 34 is in the non-accepting state, the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. 33 (a). At the timing of t8, the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is the distribution state of guiding the game ball to the through winning unit 36, so that the game ball supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t8. Will win the through winning section 36 at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 33 (b). If the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle, the same situation as the timing of t2 to the timing of t7 will occur at the timing of t9 to the timing of t14.

With the above configuration, in the high frequency support mode, the second game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the order of two games after the game ball that will win the through winning unit 36. Even if the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle, the cycle of winning the special figure winning device 34 is for every three game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71. Occur. This makes it possible to efficiently generate a prize for the second special figure winning device 34 in the high frequency support mode.

Further, when one game ball is won in the second special figure winning device 34, three game balls are paid out in the same manner as in the first embodiment. As a result, in the high frequency support mode, in the configuration in which the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 are surely generated at a ratio of one in three to the second special figure winning device 34, the second special When a prize is awarded to the prize-winning device 34, three game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player can generate a prize in the second special figure winning device 34 while not substantially reducing the number of balls held.

On the other hand, in the low frequency support mode, the variable display period of the pattern on the normal map display unit 46 is fixed at 0.4 seconds. Further, even if the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepted state when the variable display of the pattern on the normal figure display unit 46 is completed, the acceptance continuation period of the accepted state is set to 0.1 seconds. In this configuration, even if the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle, the game supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 after two of the game balls that have won the through winning unit 36. At the timing when the ball is guided to the second special figure winning device 34, the acceptance control of the second special figure winning device 34 has already been completed, and the second special figure winning device 34 is in the non-accepting state. Therefore, even if the second special figure winning device 34 may be in the accepting state in the low frequency support mode, it is substantially impossible to win a prize in the second special figure winning device 34.

Next, the action and effect due to the provision of the special winning section 155 will be described.

The first distribution mechanism of the game ball that is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 two times after the game ball that has won the through prize unit 36 in any of the high frequency support modes. If the arrival timing to 71 is later than usual due to a delay in launching, the second special figure winning device 34 is already in the non-accepted state when the game ball reaches the second special figure winning device 34. Therefore, there is a possibility that the second special figure winning device 34 will not be won. In this case, if it is attempted to generate a prize in the second special figure winning device 34, it is necessary to generate a prize in the through winning unit 36 again, but in order to generate a prize in the through winning unit 36 again, it is necessary to generate a prize in the through winning unit 36 again. It is necessary to further supply the game ball to the first distribution mechanism 71 so that the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is in a state of distributing the game ball to the through winning unit 36. Since three game balls are required from the state in which the game balls are distributed to the through winning unit 36 to the state in which the game balls are distributed to the through winning unit 36, the second game ball is required as described above. If the special figure winning device 34 is missed, three game balls will be wasted.

On the other hand, the game ball that was guided toward the second special figure winning device 34 but did not win the second special figure winning device 34 is guided by the third guide rail 154, so that the special winning section If the player wins the 155 surely and further wins the special prize section 155, three game balls are paid out. As a result, even if the winning of the second special figure winning device 34 is missed as described above, the payout of three game balls will surely occur as compensation, so that the disadvantage of the player can be suppressed. Is possible.

Further, in the configuration in which the special electric winning device 35 is provided at the boundary portion between the upper region PA1 and the right region PA3, a game that is fired toward the right region PA3 in the open / close execution mode but does not win the special electric winning device 35. The sphere will be supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71. Since the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode in the open / close execution mode, even if the through winning unit 36 is won in the open / close execution mode, the second special figure winning device 34 is not substantially won. .. In this case, since the special winning unit 155 is provided as described above, even if the game ball launched toward the right area PA3 in the open / close execution mode does not win the special electric winning device 35, the first distribution is performed. One of the three game balls supplied to the mechanism 71 wins the special winning unit 155, and the three game balls are paid out. As a result, even if the game ball launched toward the right side region PA3 in the open / close execution mode does not win the special electric winning device 35, it is possible to compensate for the game ball by that amount.

Next, the processing configuration of the MPU 112 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a general-purpose electric power control process according to the present embodiment. It should be noted that the normal power control process is executed in step S214 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18).

First, the information of the Fuzu Fuden counter provided in the RAM 114 is read (step S1401), and the Fuzu Fuden address table stored in the ROM 113 is read (step S1402). Then, the start address corresponding to the information of the Fuzu Fuden counter is acquired from the Fuzu Fuden address table (step S1403).

In the Fuzu Fuden control process, the presence or absence of a prize in the through winning unit 36 is monitored, and the fluctuation display of the pattern on the Fuzu display unit 46 is started when the through winning unit 36 is awarded. The start process (step S1405) and the process during the change of the normal figure for updating the change display of the pattern on the normal figure display unit 46 and starting the acceptance control of the second special figure winning device 34 when the change display period has elapsed. (Step S1406) and the process during normal electric operation (step S1407) for executing the acceptance control of the second special figure winning device 34 are set. In such a processing configuration, the Fuzu Fuden counter is a counter for the MPU 112 to grasp which of the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing should be executed. The start address of the program for executing the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing is set in correspondence with the numerical information of the Fuzu-fuden counter. The Fuzu Fuden counter will be used in the next processing round when the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied when the processing corresponding to the currently stored numerical information is completed. 1 addition or "0" is cleared corresponding to the process executed by the electric control process. Therefore, in the Fuzu Fuden control process at each processing time, it is sufficient to execute the process according to the numerical information set in the Fuzu Fuden counter. In addition, "0" is set as an initial value of the Fuzu Fuden counter.

After executing the process of step S1403, in step S1404, a process of jumping to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S1403 is executed. Specifically, when the value of the Fuzu Fuden counter is "0", the process jumps to the Fuzu fluctuation start process in step S1405, and when the value of the Fuzu Fuden counter is "1", the step is performed. It jumps to the processing during the fluctuation of the normal power in S1406, and when the value of the normal power counter is "2", it jumps to the processing during the normal power operation in step S1407.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a normal map fluctuation start process in the present embodiment.

First, it is determined whether or not a prize has been awarded to the through winning unit 36 (step S1501). Here, the MPU 112 executes a monitoring process of whether or not a prize has been won in the through winning section 36 in the winning detection process (step S209) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18). It is executed on condition that the value of the electric counter is "0". Therefore, in the situation where the variable display of the pattern is executed in the normal figure display unit 46 and the acceptance control of the second special figure winning device 34 is executed, the winning of the through winning unit 36 is invalidated.

When a prize has been awarded to the through winning unit 36 (step S1501: YES), it is confirmed by confirming whether or not "1" is set in the flag corresponding to the high frequency support mode in the RAM 114. It is determined whether or not the frequency support mode is set (step S1502). In the low frequency support mode (step S1502: YES), the acceptance lottery process is executed (step S1503). In the acceptance lottery process, the current numerical information of the normal electric random number counter C4 is read out to the execution area 136 for the normal drawing. Then, by referring to the acceptance lottery table read from the ROM 113, it is possible to grasp whether or not the numerical information read out in the execution area 136 for the normal drawing is the numerical information corresponding to the acceptance winning, and the grasping result is the RAM 114. Remember in. After that, the numerical information corresponding to 0.4 seconds as the fluctuation display period for low support is set in the normal map fluctuation measurement counter provided in the RAM 114 (step S1504). On the other hand, in the case of the high frequency support mode (step S1502: YES), the numerical information corresponding to 0.8 seconds as the fluctuation display period for high support is set in the normal map fluctuation measurement counter of the RAM 114 (step S1505). ). The value set in the normal figure fluctuation measurement counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) is executed. Then, when the value of the normal map fluctuation measurement counter changes from 1 or more to “0”, the MPU 112 specifies that it is the end timing of the fluctuation display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 46.

After executing any of the processes of step S1504 and step S1505, the variable display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 46 is started (step S1506). In this case, regardless of which process of step S1504 and step S1505 is executed, the mode of the pattern displayed on the normal map display unit 46 at the start timing of the variation display of the pattern is the same. As a result, it is possible to start the variable display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 46 in the same manner regardless of the situation, so that the processing load can be reduced. Before the variable display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 46 is started, the display of the finally stopped and displayed pattern in the previous variable display time of the pattern on the normal map display unit 46 is continued. It has become. After that, the value of the Fuzu Fuden counter is added by 1 (step S1507). As a result, the execution target of the process in the Fuzu Fuden control process (FIG. 34) becomes the Fuzu changing process (step S1406).

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map in the present embodiment.

In the normal map fluctuation processing, if the value of the normal map fluctuation measurement counter of the RAM 114 is 1 or more (step S1601: NO), it means that the end timing of the fluctuation display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 46 has not been reached. Therefore, the display content update process is executed (step S1602). In the display content update process, the patterns to be displayed on the normal map display unit 46 are updated to the next pattern on condition that the display content of the normal map display unit 46 is updated. In this case, the update mode of the pattern is constant regardless of whether or not it is in the low-probability state or the high-probability state, and the pattern is not related to whether or not it is accepted and won in the acceptance lottery process in the low-probability state. The update mode of is constant. As a result, the variable display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 46 can be updated in the same manner regardless of the situation, so that the processing load can be reduced.

If it is the end timing of the variation display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 46 (step S1601: YES), if it is the low frequency support mode (step S1603: NO), the normal map variation start process (FIG. 35) of step S1503. It is determined in the acceptance lottery process whether or not the acceptance has been won (step S1604). If the acceptance is not won (step S1604: NO), the value of the normal power counter of the RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S1605). As a result, the execution target of the process in the Fuzu Fuden control process (FIG. 34) becomes the Fuzu variation start process (step S1405).

In the low frequency support mode (step S1603: NO), when the acceptance is won (step S1604: YES), the general electricity opening period counter provided in the RAM 114 corresponds to the short acceptance period of 0.1 seconds. Numerical information to be set is set (step S1606). On the other hand, when it is the end timing of the variable display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 46 (step S1601: YES) and the high frequency support mode (step S1603: YES), the normal power release period counter of the RAM 114 is displayed. Numerical information corresponding to the long acceptance period of 1.5 seconds is set (step S1607). The normal power opening period counter is a counter for specifying the maximum remaining period until the second special figure winning device 34 is in the non-accepted state when the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepted state by the MPU 112. Is. The value set in the normal power release period counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) is executed. Then, when the value of the normal power opening period counter changes from 1 or more to "0", it is specified that it is the end timing of the current opening times in the second special figure winning device 34.

When any of the processes of step S1606 and step S1607 is executed, the acceptance start process of the second special figure winning device 34 is executed (step S1608). In the acceptance start process, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 56b for winning the second special figure is started. As a result, the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state. After that, the value of the normal power counter of the RAM 114 is added by 1 (step S1609). As a result, the execution target of the process in the normal power control process (FIG. 34) becomes the normal power operation process (step S1407).

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the processing during normal operation in the present embodiment.

By determining whether or not the game ball is detected by the detection sensor 54 of the second special figure winning device 34, it is determined whether or not a prize has been generated in the second special figure winning device 34 (step S1701). .. When no prize has been awarded to the second special figure winning device 34 (step S1701: NO), the second special figure is determined by determining whether or not the value of the normal power opening period counter of the RAM 114 is "0". Figure It is determined whether or not the acceptance period of the winning device 34 has elapsed (step S1702).

When a prize has been awarded to the second special figure winning device 34 (step S1701: YES), or when the acceptance period of the second special figure winning device 34 has elapsed (step S1702: YES), the second special figure winning device 34. Figure Execution of acceptance termination processing of the winning device 34 (step S1703). In the acceptance termination process, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 56b for winning the second special figure is stopped. As a result, the second special figure winning device 34 is in a non-accepting state. After that, the value of the normal power counter of the RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S1704). As a result, the execution target of the process in the Fuzu Fuden control process (FIG. 34) becomes the Fuzu variation start process (step S1405).

FIG. 38 (a) is a flowchart showing the game state transition process executed by the MPU 112. The game state transition process is executed in the special electric end process of step S1012 in the special electric special electric control process (FIG. 26).

When the jackpot result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is a highly accurate response result (step S1801: YES), "1" is set in the high probability flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S1802), and the RAM 114 "1" is set in the first high-frequency support flag provided in (step S1803). The high-probability flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high-probability mode by the MPU 112, and the first high-frequency support flag is a high-frequency support that continues until the support mode becomes the next big hit result. This is a flag for specifying whether or not the mode is set by the MPU 112. By setting both the high probability flag and the first high frequency support flag to "1", the gaming state becomes the high probability state.

When the jackpot result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is a low probability response result (step S1801: NO), the high probability flag of the RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S1804), and the RAM 114 is provided. The second high frequency support flag is set to "1" (step S1805). The second high-frequency support flag is a flag for specifying with the MPU 112 whether or not the support mode is a high-frequency support mode that continues until the game times of the end reference number of times are exhausted. When the value of the high probability flag is cleared to "0" and "1" is set to the second high frequency support flag, the gaming state becomes the first low probability state. After that, the high-frequency execution counter set processing is executed (step S1806). In the set processing, the value corresponding to the type of the low-accuracy response result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time among 33 times, 55 times, 77 times, and 110 times is set to the high-frequency execution counter provided in the RAM 114. set. The high-frequency execution counter is a counter for specifying the remaining number of games for which the high-frequency support mode will continue with the MPU 112. The value set in the high-frequency execution counter is decremented by 1 each time the game is executed, and when the value of the high-frequency execution counter becomes "0", the support mode changes from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode. Changes to.

When the process of step S1803 or step S1806 is executed, the ending command transmission process is executed (step S1807). In the ending command transmission process, if the jackpot result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is a low probability response result, an ending command in which information on the end reference number of times of the high frequency support mode is set is transmitted to the voice emission control device 121. Then, if the jackpot result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is a highly accurate response result, an ending command in which the corresponding information is set is transmitted to the voice emission control device 121.

FIG. 38B is a flowchart showing the acquisition process of the display continuation period executed by the MPU 112. The display continuation period acquisition process is executed in step S1109 in the special figure variation start process (FIG. 27).

When the current game round is in the high frequency support mode, the hold information of the second special figure hold area 134 is the start target of the game round, and the result of the hit / fail determination process is not the jackpot result (step S1901 and step S1902: YES, step S1903: NO), it is determined whether or not the hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 134 (step S1904). When the hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 134 (step S1904: YES), the second special figure hold area 134 is in a situation where another hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 134. It means that this game round was started with the hold information stored in. In this case, as the information of the display continuation period of this game, the information corresponding to the fixed short period of 1.2 seconds is read from the ROM 113, and the read fixed short-term information is set in the special electric timer counter of the RAM 114. (Step S1905). As a result, in this game round, the variable display of the pattern on the second special figure display unit 45b is performed over a fixed short period of time, and at the same time, the effect for the game round on the display light emitting unit 18a, the speaker unit 18b, and the symbol display device 41. Is done over a fixed short period of time.

On the other hand, when the hold information is not stored in the second special figure hold area 134 (step S1904: NO), the second special figure hold is in a situation where another hold information is not stored in the second special figure hold area 134. It means that this game round was started with the hold information stored in the area 134 as an opportunity. In this case, the information corresponding to the fixed long-term 7.2 seconds is read from the ROM 113 as the information of the display continuation period of the game times this time, and the read fixed long-term information is set in the special electric timer counter of the RAM 114. (Step S1906). As a result, in this game round, the variable display of the pattern on the second special figure display unit 45b is performed for a fixed long period of time, and the effect for the game round on the display light emitting unit 18a, the speaker unit 18b, and the symbol display device 41 is performed. Is fixed over a long period of time.

That is, in the case where the game round is executed triggered by the hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 134 in the high frequency support mode, and the result of the hit / fail determination process of the game round is not the jackpot result. The display continuation period of the game times is a fixed short period if another hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 134, and another hold information is not stored in the second special figure hold area 134. If there is, it will be fixed for a long period of time. This makes it possible to simplify the execution mode of each game round in the situation where the game round as a result of the disengagement is executed triggered by the hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 134 in the high frequency support mode. ..

As already explained, in the high frequency support mode, if the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 with the shortest firing cycle (specifically, 0.6 seconds), a predetermined number of two or more. The second special figure winning device 34 is won at a rate of 1 in (specifically, 3). In this case, if another reserved information is stored in the second special figure holding area 134 and the game times in which the second special figure display unit 45b is the variable display target is executed, the display continuation period is set. It is a fixed short period, which is a period shorter than "shortest firing cycle x predetermined number". As a result, when the reserved information is stored in the second special figure holding area 134 and the game round as a result of the disconnection continues, the holding information of the maximum number of holdings is stored in the second special figure holding area 134. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a new prize is generated for the second special figure winning device 34 in the state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the event that the hold information is not acquired even though the prize is won in the second special figure winning device 34.

Further, when the game round in which the second special figure display unit 45b is in the variable display mode is executed in the situation where another hold information is not stored in the second special figure hold area 134, the display continuation period is "shortest". Is more than "the shortest firing cycle x the predetermined number x the maximum number of holdings in the second special figure holding area 134" and less than "the shortest firing cycle x the predetermined number x (the maximum number of holdings in the second special drawing holding area 134 + 1)". It will be fixed for a long period of time. As a result, if the game round as a result of the deviation is executed in a situation where the hold information is not stored in the second special figure hold area 134, the maximum hold is held in the second special figure hold area 134 during the execution of the game round. The reserved information of the number of pieces is stored, and the second special figure winning device 34 is stored in the state where the reserved information of the maximum number of reserved pieces is stored in the second special figure holding area 134 during the execution of the game. It is possible to prevent the situation where a new prize is generated.

In the acquisition process of the display continuation period, when the low frequency support mode is set (step S1901: NO), when the first special figure display unit 45a is a game time to be subject to variable display (step S1902: NO), or this time. When the game times are the game times corresponding to the jackpot result (step S1903: YES), the set processing of the corresponding display continuation period is executed (step S1907). In the set processing, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS is acquired. In addition, it is determined whether or not the reach display is generated by the symbol display device 41 in this game round. Specifically, when the game times corresponding to the start of the fluctuation this time correspond to the jackpot result, it is determined that the reach display occurs. Further, if it is not the result of any big hit and the numerical information acquired from the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area 135 for the special figure is the numerical information corresponding to the reach occurrence, the reach display occurs. judge. When it is determined that the reach display occurs, the display continuation period corresponding to the numerical information of the current variation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach generation display continuation period table stored in the ROM 113. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the display continuation period corresponding to the numerical information of the current variation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach non-occurrence display continuation period table stored in the ROM 113. do. Incidentally, the display duration that can be acquired by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table is different from the display duration that can be acquired by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table. After that, the acquired display continuation period information is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the RAM 114. As a result, in situations other than the situation in which the reserved information stored in the second special figure holding area 134 is used as a trigger to execute the game times as a result of the deviation in the high frequency support mode, the execution mode of the game times can be diversified. It will be possible.

Next, the effect determination process executed by the MPU 123 of the voice emission control device 121 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39. The effect determination process is repeatedly executed in a cycle of 4 milliseconds.

When the MPU 123 of the voice emission control device 121 receives the ending command from the MPU 112 of the main control device 101 (step S2001: YES), the high frequency support mode after the end of the current open / close execution mode continues from the ending command. The number of times of the game to be different is grasped (step S2002). As described above, when the first low probability state is reached after the open / close execution mode, the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode is 33, 55, 77, or 110 times, and the high probability state is reached after the open / close execution mode. If so, the high frequency support mode will continue indefinitely until the next jackpot result occurs. Therefore, in step S2002, which of these five types of continuation times is grasped from the ending command, and the grasped continuation number information is provided in the RAM 125 of the voice emission control device 121 as the actual continuation number information. Set to the actual continuation count counter.

After that, the information on the initial display continuation number is read from the ROM 124 of the voice emission control device 121, and the information on the initial display continuation number is set in the display counter provided in the RAM 125 (step S2003). The display counter is a counter for specifying the remaining number of continuations of the high frequency support mode displayed on the symbol display device 41 by the MPU 123. Further, the initial display continuation number is set to 11 times, which is smaller than any actual continuation number that can be grasped in step S2002. After that, the undisplayed continuation number is calculated by subtracting the initial display continuation number read in step S2003 from the actual continuation number grasped in step S2002, and the calculated undisplayed continuation number is provided in the RAM 125 as an undisplayed number. It is set in the continuation count counter (step S2004). If the actual number of continuations is infinite, the information corresponding to the infinite number of undisplayed continuations is set in the counter.

After that, the initial display command is transmitted to the display control device 126 (step S2005). Information on the number of initial display continuations read in step S2003 is set in the initial display command. When the display control device 126 receives the initial display command, the display control device 126 starts the moving image display corresponding to the ending period of the open / close execution mode on the symbol display device 41, and as an image of the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode. The image of the number of times the initial display is continued is displayed on the symbol display device 41. The image of the number of continuations of this high-frequency support mode is continuously displayed on the symbol display device 41 even in a situation where the effect for the game round is executed after the ending period ends. In addition, the image is updated so that the value displayed as the image of the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode is decremented by 1 each time the effect for the game round is started, and the number of continuations described later is calculated. When the value addition condition is satisfied, the image is updated so that the value corresponding to the addition condition is added. The image display of the number of continuations of the high-frequency support mode on the symbol display device 41 ends when the high-frequency support mode ends and becomes the low-frequency support mode, or when a jackpot result occurs and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the effect determination process, when a variation command and a type command are received from the MPU 112 of the main control device 101 as a game round start command (step S2006: YES), the game round start process is executed (step S2007). Further, in the effect determination process, other processes are executed (step S2008). In other processes, when a command other than the ending command and the command for starting the game round is received, the process for executing the effect corresponding to the received command is executed.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a game round start process executed in step S2007 of the effect determination process (FIG. 39).

First, since the case where the command for starting the game round is received means that a new game round has started, the value of the display counter of the RAM 125 is subtracted by 1 (step S2101). If the value of the displayed counter is already "0", that state is maintained. In addition, even if the information of the displayed counter is infinitely corresponding information, the state is maintained. When the information of the displayed counter is infinitely corresponding information, the high frequency support mode continues until the next jackpot result as an image of the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode in the symbol display device 41 in the high probability state. The situation where an image indicating that the image is displayed is applicable.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the undisplayed continuation counter of the RAM 125 is 1 or more and the value of the displaying counter of the RAM 125 is “0” (step S2102). When the value of the undisplayed continuation counter of the RAM 125 is 1 or more and the value of the counter being displayed of the RAM 125 is "0" (step S2102: YES), the high frequency support mode continues even though the high frequency support mode continues. This means that the remaining number of continuations of the high-frequency support mode displayed on the symbol display device 41 is 0. Therefore, by setting "1" to the addition display flag provided in the RAM 125, it is possible to specify in the MPU 123 that it is necessary to perform the addition display of the number of continuations (step S2103).

When a negative determination is made in step S2102, or when the process of step S2103 is executed, it is determined whether or not the display continuation period information set in the variable command is a fixed long period (step S2104). In the case of a fixed long period (step S2104: YES), an image of the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode in the symbol display device 41, provided that "1" is set in the addition display flag (step S2105: YES). Is executed.

Specifically, first, the process of grasping the number of times the addition display is continued is executed (step S2106). In the process of grasping the addition display continuation number, if the value of the undisplayed continuation number is less than 11, the undisplayed continuation number is grasped as the addition display continuation number. If the value of the number of undisplayed continuations is not infinite and is 11 or more, 11 times is grasped as the number of added display continuations. If the value of the number of undisplayed continuations is infinite, if the number of game times executed after the end of the open / close execution mode is less than 100, 11 times is grasped as the number of added display continuations, and if it is 100 times or more. If so, the information corresponding to infinity is grasped as the number of continuous display continuations. Then, the grasped information on the number of continuous display continuations is set in the display counter of the RAM 125 (step S2107), and the value of the counter of the number of undisplayed continuations of the RAM 125 is subtracted by the value of the number of continuous display continuations (step S2108). If the information of the undisplayed continuation count counter is already infinitely corresponding information, the state in which the infinitely corresponding information is set is maintained regardless of the information of the addition display continuation number.

After that, the addition display correspondence process is executed (step S2109). In the addition display correspondence process, a table for effect control corresponding to the execution of the addition display for a fixed long period is read from the ROM 124. By controlling the display light emitting unit 18a and the speaker unit 18b according to the effect control table, the display light emitting unit 18a and the speaker unit 18b execute the effect corresponding to the execution of the additive display in the game times for a fixed long period of time. Will be done. Further, for a fixed long period of time, a command in which information indicating that the current game times correspond to the out-of-game results and information on the number of times the addition display is continued is set is transmitted to the display control device 126. The display control device 126 controls the symbol display device 41 according to the content specified by the command. As a result, the effect for the game rotation corresponding to the disengagement result is executed on the symbol display device 41 for a fixed long period of time, and is displayed as an image of the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode on the symbol display device 41. The value is the value of the number of times the addition display is continued this time. In this case, if the number of continuations of the addition display is information corresponding to infinity, the image of the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode is an image corresponding to infinity indicating that the high frequency support mode continues until the next jackpot result. Is displayed.

When the information of the display continuation period set in the variable command is a fixed long period and "1" is not set in the addition display flag of the RAM 125 (step S2104: YES, step S2105: NO). The highlighting correspondence process is executed (step S2110). In the highlighting support process, the effect corresponding to the execution of highlighting for emphasizing that the current state is the high frequency support mode and highlighting the image displayed as the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode in the symbol display device 41. The control table is read from ROM 124. By controlling the display light emitting unit 18a and the speaker unit 18b according to the effect control table, the display light emitting unit 18a and the speaker unit 18b execute the effect corresponding to the execution of highlighting in the game times for a fixed long period of time. Will be done. Further, for a fixed long period of time, a command in which the information indicating that the current game times correspond to the out-of-game result and the highlighting execution information are set is transmitted to the display control device 126. The display control device 126 controls the symbol display device 41 according to the content specified by the command. As a result, the effect for the game rotation corresponding to the disengagement result is executed on the symbol display device 41 for a fixed long period of time, and it is emphasized that the current state is the high frequency support mode, and the symbol display device 41 is high. The symbol display device 41 executes an effect for emphasizing the image displayed as the number of continuations of the frequency support mode.

When the information of the display continuation period set in the variable command is the fixed short-term information (step S211: YES), the short-term correspondence process is executed (step S2112). In the short-term correspondence process, the effect control table corresponding to the fixed short-term is read from the ROM 124. There is only one type of table for effect control that is stored in ROM 124 in advance and corresponds to a fixed short period. By controlling the display light emitting unit 18a and the speaker unit 18b according to the effect control table, the display light emitting unit 18a and the speaker unit 18b execute the effect for the game round corresponding to the fixed short period.

In the short-term correspondence process, the short-term correspondence command is transmitted to the display control device 126. When the display control device 126 receives the command for a short period of time, the display control device 126 controls the symbol display device 41 so that the effect for the game round corresponding to the fixed short period of time is executed. In the production for the game round corresponding to the fixed short period, high-speed fluctuation of the symbols is started in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the final stop period (0.2 seconds) is subtracted from the fixed short period (1.2 seconds). At the timing when the period has elapsed, the variation display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped at the same time in the state where the combination of the symbols corresponding to the deviation result is stopped and displayed. Then, the state in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the deviation result is stopped and displayed is maintained for the final stop period. As a result, even if the effect for the game round is completed in a fixed short period of time, it is possible to clearly indicate from the display content of the symbol display device 41 that the current game round is the result of the deviation. It should be noted that the combination of the symbols that are finally stopped and displayed in the effect for the game round corresponding to the fixed short period may always be the same, or may be a configuration that can be changed by being determined by lottery or the like.

Further, in the short-term correspondence process, when "1" is set in the addition display flag of the RAM 125, the display counter of the RAM 125 is incremented by 1, and the value of the undisplayed continuation count counter of the RAM 125 is subtracted by 1. Then, the information indicating that the value displayed as the image of the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode in the symbol display device 41 should be added by 1 is set in the short-term correspondence command. When the display control device 126 receives the short-term response command, it not only enables the above-mentioned effect for game rounds to be executed, but also serves as an image of the number of continuations of the high-frequency support mode in the symbol display device 41. Make sure that the displayed value is added by 1.

When the information of the display continuation period set in the variable command is neither a fixed long-term nor a fixed short-term (step S2104 and step S211: NO), the command transmission process is executed (step S2113). In the command transmission process, a lottery process for determining whether or not to execute the notice display and the execution content is executed based on the contents of the variable command and the type command. Then, a table for effect control corresponding to the display continuation period of the current game times, the game result of the current game times, and the result of the lottery process of the advance notice display is read from the ROM 124. By controlling the display light emitting unit 18a and the speaker unit 18b according to the effect control table, the effect for the game round this time is executed by the display light emitting unit 18a and the speaker unit 18b. Further, a non-fixed command in which information corresponding to the display continuation period of the current game times, the game result of the current game times, and the result of the lottery process of the advance notice display is set is transmitted to the display control device 126. The display control device 126 controls the symbol display device 41 according to the content specified by the non-fixed command. As a result, the effect for this game round is executed by the symbol display device 41.

Further, in the command transmission process, when "1" is set in the addition display flag of the RAM 125, the display counter of the RAM 125 is incremented by 1, and the value of the undisplayed continuation count counter of the RAM 125 is subtracted by 1. Then, the information indicating that the value displayed as the image of the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode in the symbol display device 41 should be added by 1 is set in the non-fixed command. When the display control device 126 receives the non-fixed command, the display control device 126 not only executes the above-mentioned effect for the game round, but also displays it as an image of the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode in the symbol display device 41. The value being set is added by 1.

Next, regarding the flow of the game in the case where the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the high frequency support mode with the shortest firing cycle and the game times corresponding to the disengagement result are continuous, FIG. 41. The explanation will be given with reference to the time chart. FIG. 41 (a) shows the winning timing to the second special figure winning device 34, and FIG. 41 (b) shows how the number of reserved information stored in the second special figure holding area 134 increases or decreases. 41 (c) indicates the execution period of the game rounding effect.

The opening / closing execution mode ends at the timing of t1, and the production for the game round can be started in the high frequency support mode. In this case, since the hold information of the upper limit hold number was stored in the second special figure hold area 134 before the opening / closing execution mode was started, at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 41 (b). In the second special figure holding area 134, four holding information, which is the upper limit holding number, is stored. Therefore, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 41 (c), the effect for the game round is started with the hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 134 as an opportunity. Since the game round is a game round corresponding to the disengagement result started in the situation where the hold information is separately stored in the second special figure hold area 134, the display continuation period of the game round is a fixed short period1. It will be .2 seconds.

Here, at the timing of t1, the launch of the game ball toward the right region PA3 with the shortest firing cycle is started. As already explained, when the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle in the high frequency support mode, the ratio is one for every two or more predetermined numbers (specifically, three). Of the predetermined number of game balls, the game balls having the same firing order win the second special figure winning device 34. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 41 (a), the timing of t3, the timing of t5, the timing of t8, the timing of t10, the timing of t13, the timing of t15, the timing of t18, the timing of t19, the timing of t20, the timing of t21. Winning to the second special figure winning device 34 occurs periodically at each of the timing, the timing of t23, and the timing of t26. In this case, the cycle in which the prize is generated in the second special figure winning device 34 is "the shortest firing cycle x a predetermined number". Specifically, it is 1.8 seconds.

On the other hand, in the game times in which the second special figure display unit 45b is a variable display target in the situation where another hold information is not stored in the second special figure hold area 134 in the high frequency support mode, as already explained. The display duration is 1.2 seconds, which is a fixed short period shorter than "shortest firing cycle x predetermined number". Therefore, as shown in FIG. 41 (c), the timing of t1, the timing of t2, the timing of t4, the timing of t6, the timing of t7, the timing of t9, the timing of t11, the timing of t12, the timing of t14 and the timing of t16. Such as, game times in which the display continuation period is a fixed short period are periodically executed. Then, since this fixed short period is shorter than the cycle in which the second special figure winning device 34 is awarded, at the timing of t17, which is the timing when 10 game rounds are executed from the timing of t1, FIG. 41. As shown in (b) and FIG. 41 (c), it is the timing to start the game round triggered by the hold information in the situation where only one hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 134. In this case, since the second special figure display unit 45b is the target of the fluctuation start in the situation where another hold information is not stored in the second special figure hold area 134, the display continuation period is a fixed long period. ..

For a fixed long period, in the situation where the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the high frequency support mode with the shortest firing cycle, the second special is at a rate of 1 in a predetermined number (specifically, 3). In the configuration in which a prize is generated in the drawing winning device 34, the "shortest firing cycle x predetermined number x maximum number of holdings in the second special figure holding area 134" or more and "shortest firing cycle x predetermined number x (second)" It is set to 7.2 seconds, which is less than the maximum number of reserved areas 134 +1) ”. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (c), the timing of t18, the timing of t19, the timing of t20, and the timing of t21, which are the situations in which the game rounds for a fixed long period of time are executed, are the first, respectively. 2 When a prize is won in the special figure winning device 34, the hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 134, and the hold information of the upper limit number of holds is stored in the second special figure hold area 134 at the timing of t21. It becomes a state.

Here, if the addition display condition is satisfied in the game times that are fixed for a long period of time, the value displayed as the image of the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode in the symbol display device 41 is set to "11". Will be done. In this case, when the first low probability state is reached after the end of the open / close execution mode, the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode is 33, 55, 77, or 110, all of which are "11". It is a multiple. Further, the value initially displayed on the symbol display device 41 as an image of the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is "11", which is displayed every time the game round is newly started. Since the existing value is subtracted by 1, the display of the value becomes "0" when the 11th game round is started. Further, if the firing operation is continued in such a manner that the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle and each game round is a result of deviation, every time 10 game rounds are executed. A fixed long-term game round is executed. Then, when the display in the image of the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode is "0" in the game times that are fixed for a long period of time, if the high frequency support mode continues after that, it is displayed as the image. The value is basically "11". As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the display in the image of the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode is added each time the game rounds for a fixed long period are executed, and the display is added over a period longer than the fixed short period. As an effect for continuous game rounds, it is possible to execute an effect in which the addition display is performed.

After that, after the timing of t22, the game round with the second special figure display unit 45b as the variable start target is started with one hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 134. Until then, as shown in FIG. 41 (c), the game rounds for a fixed short period are repeatedly executed (timing of t22, timing of t24, timing of t25, and timing of t27). Even in this situation, as described above, the fixed short period is shorter than the cycle in which the second special figure winning device 34 is awarded, so that the fixed short period is stored in the second special figure holding area 134 as shown in FIG. 41 (b). The number of pending information is gradually decreasing. Then, at the timing when 11 game rounds are executed for a fixed short period from the timing of t22, only one hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 134 as in the timing of t17. Depending on the situation, it is time to start the game round triggered by the hold information, and the game round for a fixed long period of time will be started.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the configuration in which the second special figure winning device 34 and the through winning section 36 are provided in the right side area PA3 of the game area PA, the position on the upstream side of the second special drawing winning device 34 and the through winning section 36 in the right side area PA3. A first distribution mechanism 71 that sequentially changes the distribution direction when the game ball is supplied is provided. Then, when the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the situation where the first distribution mechanism 71 is in the first distribution state, the game ball is supplied toward the through winning unit 36, and the first distribution mechanism 71 is supplied. When the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the situation where the distribution mechanism 71 is in the second distribution state, the game ball is supplied to the second special figure winning device 34. As a result, it is possible to supply the game ball to the through winning unit 36 by playing the game so that the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71, and the second special drawing. It is possible to supply the game ball toward the winning device 34. Further, by appropriately designing the configuration of the first distribution mechanism 71, the frequency with which the game ball is supplied to the through winning unit 36 and the frequency with which the game ball is supplied toward the second special figure winning device 34 can be determined. Each can be set to the desired frequency of the designer. Furthermore, it becomes possible to supply the game ball to the second special figure winning device 34 after a predetermined period has elapsed since the game ball was supplied to the through winning unit 36, and the game ball can be supplied to the through winning unit 36. When the 2nd special figure winning device 34 is in the receiving state based on the fact that the ball has entered, the game ball is surely supplied to the 2nd special drawing winning device 34 which is in the receiving state. Is possible.

When three game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 as a specific number, the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 makes one round. As a result, by supplying the game ball to the first distribution mechanism 71, it is possible to repeatedly distribute the game ball in a certain mode.

Only the game balls distributed by the first distribution mechanism 71 can enter the second special figure winning device 34 and the through winning unit 36. This makes it easier to design the frequency of hitting the second special figure winning device 34 and the through winning section 36 to a desired frequency.

Two game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 are distributed toward the second special figure winning device 34 with respect to the game balls distributed toward the through winning unit 36 by the first distribution mechanism 71. As a result, it is possible to secure a period from when the game ball enters the through winning unit 36 until the game ball is supplied to the second special figure winning device 34. Therefore, when the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepted state based on the fact that the game ball has entered the through winning unit 36, the game ball is placed in the second special figure winning device 34 which is in the accepted state. In the case of ensuring that the supply is ensured, it is possible to secure a period until the second special figure winning device 34 is in the receiving state when the game ball enters the through winning unit 36.

The first distribution mechanism 71 has a distribution direction different from these distribution directions before the game ball is distributed toward the through winning unit 36 and the game ball is distributed toward the second special figure winning device 34. It will be in a state of distributing game balls to. As a result, using the period in which the game ball is distributed to a side different from the second special figure winning device 34 and the through winning unit 36, the second special figure after the game ball enters the through winning unit 36. It is possible to secure a certain long period until the game ball is supplied to the winning device 34.

Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the through winning unit 36, the variable display of the pattern is executed on the normal map display unit 46, and when the variable display of the pattern is completed, the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepted state. Become. In this configuration, as described above, a period from when the game ball enters the through winning unit 36 until the game ball is supplied to the second special figure winning device 34 is secured to some extent, so that the through winning unit 36 When the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepted state based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball, the game ball is surely supplied to the second special figure winning device 34 which is in the accepted state. In this case, it is possible to secure a period in which the variable display of the pattern is executed on the normal drawing display unit 46 before the second special drawing winning device 34 is in the acceptance state.

In the high frequency support mode, when the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the shortest firing cycle, the game ball is supplied to the through winning unit 36 and then the game ball is supplied to the second special figure winning device 34. The pattern is variablely displayed on the general map display unit 46 over a specific period of time required until the is supplied. As a result, in the situation where the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle in the high frequency support mode, the game ball distributed by the first distribution mechanism 71 enters the through winning unit 36. In the case of a ball, the second special figure winning device 34 receives the game ball, which is then distributed by the first distribution mechanism 71 toward the second special figure winning device 34, before the game ball reaches the second special figure winning device 34. It is possible to make it in a state.

On the other hand, in the low probability state, when the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state based on the game ball entering the through winning unit 36, the game is played in the first distribution mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle. Even if the ball is supplied, the acceptance control of the second special figure winning device 34 has already ended at the timing when the game ball is supplied to the second special figure winning device 34, and the second special figure winning device 34 is not accepted. It is in a state. As a result, even if the second special figure winning device 34 can be in the accepting state in the low probability state, it is substantially impossible for the game ball to enter the second special figure winning device 34. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the advantage of the high frequency support mode.

When the first distribution mechanism 71 is in a state of distributing game balls to the second special figure winning device 34, the first distribution mechanism 71 is supplied after one game ball is supplied to the second special figure winning device 34. Is in a state of distributing game balls to the through winning unit 36, and when the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepted state, one game ball enters and returns to the non-accepted state. As a result, when the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepted state, the game ball can be supplied to the through winning unit 36 after the second special figure winning device 34 is in the non-accepted state. This makes it possible to allow the through winning unit 36 to enter a game ball in a situation where the second special figure winning device 34 is in a non-accepting state. Further, it is possible to prevent unnecessary game balls from being generated from the time when the game balls are supplied to the second special figure winning device 34 to the time when the game balls are supplied to the through winning unit 36.

The passage length dimension of the fourth guide rail 156 that guides the game ball distributed by the first distribution mechanism 71 to the through winning unit 36 makes the game ball distributed by the first distribution mechanism 71 a second special figure winning device. It is set to be larger than the passage length dimension of the second guide rail 153 that guides to 34. As a result, the game ball distributed by the first distribution mechanism 71 takes a period required to reach the position where the game ball distributed by the first distribution mechanism 71 can enter the through winning unit 36. 2 It is possible to make it longer than the period required to reach the position where the ball can be entered in the special figure winning device 34. Therefore, when the 2nd special figure winning device 34 is in the accepted state, the through winning unit is after the 2nd special figure winning device 34 is in the non-accepted state based on the ball entering the 2nd special figure winning device 34. It is possible to supply the game ball to 36, and it is possible to generate a ball to the through winning unit 36 in a situation where the second special figure winning device 34 is in a non-accepting state. Further, according to this configuration, it is possible to produce the above-mentioned effects only by adjusting the passage length dimension of the second guide rail 153 and the fourth guide rail 156.

The second special figure winning device 34 is provided at a position vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71. As a result, it becomes possible to smoothly supply the game ball to the second special figure winning device 34, which is in the receiving state when the ball enters the through winning unit 36. Therefore, even though the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state as a result of entering the through winning unit 36, the second special figure winning device 34 is sorted toward the second special figure winning device 34 by the first distribution mechanism 71. Prevents the occurrence of an event in which the movement of the game ball is disturbed on the way and the second special figure winning device 34 is in a non-accepting state before the ball is entered into the second special figure winning device 34. It becomes possible.

In the high-frequency support mode, in a situation where a plurality of hold information (hereinafter, also referred to as second hold information) is stored in the second special figure hold area 134, the second hold information corresponding to the disengagement result is used as an execution trigger for the game. Is executed, the game times are executed in a fixed short period shorter than the shortest ball entry cycle in the case where the game ball enters the second special figure winning device 34. As a result, there is a possibility that a game ball will be newly entered into the second special figure winning device 34 even though the upper limit number of second reserved information is stored in the second special figure holding area 134. Is reduced. Therefore, it is difficult for the event that the second hold information is not acquired even though the game ball has entered the second special figure winning device 34. On the other hand, when the game round is executed with the second hold information as the execution trigger in the situation where another second hold information is not stored in the second special figure hold area 134, the game round is the shortest input. It is executed over a fixed long period of time equal to or greater than the product of the sphere period and the upper limit. As a result, when the second reserved information is not stored in the second special figure reserved area 134, the upper limit number of second reserved information is stored in the second special figure reserved area 134. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the upper limit number of second hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 134.

There is only one type of fixed short term. This makes it possible to suppress the storage capacity for storing the information of the variable display period of the game times in the ROM 113. Similarly, there is only one type for fixed long term. This makes it possible to suppress the storage capacity for storing the information of the variable display period of the game times in the ROM 113.

The fixed long-term is a period equal to or greater than the product of the shortest ball entry cycle and the upper limit number, and less than the product of the shortest ball entry cycle and the number obtained by adding 1 to the upper limit number. As a result, when the game round is executed for a fixed long period of time, the upper limit number of second hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 134 in the situation where the game round is executed. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent a larger number of game balls from entering the second special figure winning device 34 in a situation where the game times are being executed. Become.

In the high frequency support mode, when the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 with the shortest firing cycle and the game times triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the disengagement result are repeatedly executed, it is fixed. A situation in which a fixed long-term game round is executed once after a short-term game round is executed 10 times will occur repeatedly. As a result, in a configuration in which the execution efficiency of the game times is improved in order to prevent a situation in which the second hold information is not acquired even though the ball has entered the second special figure winning device 34, the game is played. It is possible to periodically generate a situation in which the times are executed over a certain long period of time, and it is possible to make the execution mode of the effect preferable accordingly.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the right region PA3 of the gaming region PA is different from that of the fourth embodiment. The different configurations will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 42 is a front view of the game board 24 showing the right side region PA3 in the present embodiment in an enlarged manner.

Similar to the fourth embodiment, the right side region PA3 is provided with a second special figure winning device 34, a special electric winning device 35, a through winning section 36, and a special winning section 155. The special electric winning device 35 is provided at the boundary portion between the upper region PA1 and the right region PA3 as in the fourth embodiment. A third distribution mechanism 161 and a fourth distribution mechanism 162 are provided at positions on the downstream side of the special electric winning device 35 in the right region PA3.

In both the third distribution mechanism 161 and the fourth distribution mechanism 162, the game ball supplied from above is placed on the left side of these distribution mechanisms 161, 162 or vertically below the distribution mechanisms 161, 162. In addition to the distribution configuration, each time one game ball is distributed, the left side of the distribution mechanism 161, 162 → vertically below the distribution mechanism 161, 162 → the left side of the distribution mechanism 161, 162 → ... -The configuration is such that the distribution state of the game ball is changed in sequence. In this case, the game balls supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161 are distributed to the left of the third distribution mechanism 161 at a ratio of one in two, and the third distribution is distributed at a ratio of one in two. It is distributed vertically below the mechanism 161. Further, the game balls supplied to the 4th distribution mechanism 162 are distributed to the left of the 4th distribution mechanism 162 at a ratio of 1 in 2, and the 4th distribution mechanism is distributed in a ratio of 1 in 2. It is distributed vertically below 162.

The third distribution mechanism 161 is located downstream of the special electric winning device 35 in the right area PA3, and in the right area PA3, the second special drawing winning device 34, the through winning unit 36, the special winning unit 155, and the fourth distribution. It is provided at a position upstream of the minute mechanism 162. Between the special electric winning device 35 and the third distribution mechanism 161 so that the game ball flowing down the right area PA3 without winning the special electric winning device 35 is reliably supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161. A guide portion 163 toward the third distribution mechanism 161 is formed by a large number of nails 24b. As a result, the game ball flowing down the right side region PA3 without winning the special electric winning device 35 is surely supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161. In other words, the game ball that will flow into the downstream side of the third distribution mechanism 161 in the right region PA3 is surely supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161 before flowing into the downstream side.

The right region PA3 is provided with a fifth guide rail 164 for guiding the game ball distributed to the left of the third distribution mechanism 161 to the lower left position of the third distribution mechanism 161. A fourth distribution mechanism 162 is provided at a position where the game ball is guided by the fifth guide rail 164, and the game ball is distributed to the left of the third distribution mechanism 161 and guided by the fifth guide rail 164. Is reliably supplied to the fourth distribution mechanism 162. The fifth guide rail 164 is provided so that the game balls distributed vertically below the third distribution mechanism 161 do not win the fourth distribution mechanism 162. Further, the game balls distributed vertically below the third distribution mechanism 161 are provided with the second special drawing winning device 34, the through winning unit 36, and the special winning unit 155 by the seventh guide rail 166 and the eighth guide rail 167, which will be described later. Winning is blocked.

The right region PA3 is provided with a sixth guide rail 165 for guiding the game ball distributed to the left of the fourth distribution mechanism 162 to the lower left position of the fourth distribution mechanism 162. A through winning portion 36 is provided at a position where the game ball is guided by the 6th guide rail 165, and the game ball distributed to the left of the 4th distribution mechanism 162 and guided by the 6th guide rail 165 is reliable. To win the through prize section 36. As described above, the through winning unit 36 has a through hole that penetrates in the vertical direction, and the game ball passes through the through hole in the vertical direction, so that the through winning unit 36 is awarded a prize. Then, the game ball that has passed through the through hole of the through winning portion 36 in the vertical direction is not discharged from the game area PA, and continues to flow down the game area PA as it is. In this case, since the game ball that has passed through the through winning section 36 flows vertically downward, it is guided to the second special drawing winning device 34 and the special winning section 155 existing to the right of the through winning section 36. There is no such thing.

The right region PA3 is provided with a seventh guide rail 166 for guiding the game ball distributed vertically below the fourth distribution mechanism 162 to a position vertically below the fourth distribution mechanism 162. The second special figure winning device 34 is provided at a position where the game ball is guided by the seventh guide rail 166, and the game is distributed vertically below the fourth distribution mechanism 162 and guided by the seventh guide rail 166. The ball will surely win the second special figure winning device 34 if the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state. As described above, the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state when the through winning section 36 is won. The acceptance state ends when either one of the conditions that one game ball wins the second special figure winning device 34 and the acceptance period elapses is satisfied, and the state returns to the non-accepted state. When one game ball wins in the second special figure winning device 34, three game balls are paid out and the second special figure holding area 134 is executed as in the fourth embodiment. Hold information is stored in.

On the other hand, if the second special figure winning device 34 is in the non-accepting state, the game ball distributed vertically below the fourth distribution mechanism 162 and guided by the seventh guide rail 166 is the second special figure. Without winning a prize in the winning device 34, the passage portion 59a of the cover member 59 of the second special drawing winning device 34 is penetrated in the vertical direction. The eighth guide rail 167 is provided so as to guide the game ball that has penetrated the passage portion 59a of the second special figure winning device 34 in the vertical direction further vertically downward. Further, a special winning portion 155 is provided at a position where the game ball is guided by the eighth guide rail 167.

The special winning section 155 is open vertically upward, and the game ball winning the special winning section 155 is guided to the back side of the game board 24 and discharged. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special winning section 155 is provided in a gate shape penetrating in the vertical direction like the through winning section 36, and the game ball winning the special winning section 155 is directly used in the game area PA. It may be configured to continue the flow. If one game ball wins in the special prize section 155, three game balls will be paid out. A game ball that is distributed vertically below the fourth distribution mechanism 162 and is guided by the seventh guide rail 166 but does not win the second special figure winning device 34 is special by being guided by the eighth guide rail 167. Make sure to win the prize section 155.

In a configuration in which the game balls are sequentially distributed in two directions by the third distribution mechanism 161 and the game balls are sequentially distributed in two directions by the fourth distribution mechanism 162, the fourth distribution is performed at the lower left position of the third distribution mechanism 161. When the distribution mechanism 162 is provided, the game ball is placed in the third distribution mechanism 161 in a situation where both the third distribution mechanism 161 and the fourth distribution mechanism 162 are in a distribution state in which the game ball is distributed to the left. When supplied, the game ball is guided to the through winning unit 36, and both the third distribution mechanism 161 and the fourth distribution mechanism 162 are in a distribution state in which the game ball is distributed vertically downward. In that situation, when a game ball is supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161 the game ball is not guided to either the second special figure winning device 34 or the through winning unit 36, and the third distribution mechanism 161 is on the left side. It becomes a distribution state to distribute the game balls to. In that situation, when the game ball is supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161 the game ball is guided to the second special figure winning device 34, and the third distribution mechanism 161 distributes the game ball vertically downward. At the same time, the fourth distribution mechanism 162 becomes a distribution state in which the game ball is distributed to the left. In that situation, when a game ball is supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161 the game ball is not guided to either the second special figure winning device 34 or the through winning unit 36, and the third distribution mechanism 161 is on the left side. It becomes a distribution state to distribute the game balls to. In this configuration, every time a game ball is supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161, it is guided to the through winning unit 36 → a state in which it is not guided to either the second special figure winning device 34 or the through winning unit 36 → A state of being guided by the second special figure winning device 34 → a state of being guided by neither the second special figure winning device 34 nor the through winning unit 36 → a state of being guided by the through winning unit 36 → ... The state in which the sphere is guided is sequentially switched.

In the above configuration, the game balls supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161 in the order following the game balls to be won in the through winning unit 36 are not guided to the second special figure winning device 34, and further. The game balls supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161 are guided to the second special figure winning device 34 in the following order. As a result, it is possible to secure a long shortest period from the occurrence of winning the through winning unit 36 to the guidance of the game ball to the second special figure winning device 34. Using this secured period, it is possible to perform variable display of the pattern on the general map display unit 46. Further, the processing time is set so that the variable display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 46 is completed within this secured period and the transition to the acceptance state of the second special figure winning device 34 is completed. Even when the game ball is supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161 in the shortest firing cycle, the game ball is guided to the second special figure winning device 34 after the prize is generated in the through winning unit 36. By then, the second special figure winning device 34 can be made to be in the accepting state, and the game ball guided by the second special figure winning device 34 can be surely transferred to the second special figure winning device 34. It will be possible to win a prize.

The game balls supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161 in the order following the game balls to be guided to the second special figure winning device 34 are not guided to the through winning unit 36, and further to the next. The game balls supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161 in order are guided to the through winning unit 36. As a result, it is possible to secure a long shortest period from the occurrence of the winning of the second special figure winning device 34 in the accepted state to the occurrence of the winning of the through winning unit 36. When the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state, the through winning unit 36 invalidates the winning. Further, even if the winning of the second special drawing winning device 34 is detected by the detection sensor 54 of the second special drawing winning device 34, the MPU 112 subsequently puts the second special drawing winning device 34 in the non-accepting state. It is necessary to execute the process of, and the winning of the through winning unit 36 is invalidated until the processing is completed. In this case, the shortest period required from the occurrence of the prize to the second special figure winning device 34 in the accepted state to the occurrence of the prize to the through winning unit 36 is secured for a long time. 2 By the time the game balls supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161 reach the through winning unit 36 in the order following the game balls to be won in the special figure winning device 34, the second special figure winning device 34 is used. The process of making the non-accepted state has been surely completed, and the transition to the situation where the winning to the through winning unit 36 is valid has been surely completed.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the description is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the above embodiment.

(1) In the low probability state in the first to third embodiments, the winning of the through winning section 36 may be invalidated, and the pattern on the general drawing display section 46 may be invalidated based on the winning of the through winning section 36. The branch winning device 37 may not be in the open state even though the variable display of the above is executed. In this case, it is possible to clearly distinguish whether or not the branch winning device 37 is in the open state between the low-probability state and the high-probability state. Further, in the low frequency support mode in the fourth to fifth embodiments, the winning of the through winning section 36 may be invalidated, and the pattern on the general drawing display section 46 may be based on the winning of the through winning section 36. The variation display of the above figure may be executed, but the second special figure winning device 34 may not be in the accepted state. In this case, it is possible to clearly distinguish whether or not the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state between the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode.

(2) In the first to third embodiments, in the low probability state, when a prize is won in the through winning unit 36, the variable display of the pattern on the normal drawing display unit 46 is surely executed and the branch winning device 37 is executed. The opening / closing control of the above may be reliably executed. Even in this case, the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is controlled at the timing when the game ball is supplied to the branch winning device 37 by the distribution mechanisms 71 and 72 as in the first to third embodiments. By making the configuration in which the branch winning device 37 has already been completed and the branch winning device 37 is closed, it is possible to substantially prevent the branch winning device 37 from winning in the low probability state. Further, in the 4th to 5th embodiments, in the low frequency support mode, when a prize is won in the through winning unit 36, the variable display of the pattern on the normal drawing display unit 46 is surely executed and the second special drawing is executed. The winning device 34 may be configured to reliably execute the acceptance control. Even in this case, the second special figure winning is performed at the timing when the game ball is supplied to the second special drawing winning device 34 by the first distribution mechanism 71 as in the fourth to fifth embodiments. By configuring the device 34's acceptance control to have already ended and the second special figure winning device 34 to be in the non-accepting state, the second special figure winning device 34 can be won in the low frequency support mode. It is possible to prevent it from occurring substantially.

(3) In the first to third embodiments, in the high probability state, the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is surely executed when the through winning unit 36 is won, but the configuration is limited to this. Even in a high probability state, the open lottery process is executed when a prize is won in the through winning unit 36, and the branch winning device 37 is opened when the open lottery process results in an open winning. It may be configured to be in a state. However, in order to increase the frequency with which the branch winning device 37 is in the open state in the high probability state, it is preferable to make the probability of winning the open in the high probability state higher than the probability of winning the open in the low probability state. Further, although it may happen that the open winning is not achieved in the high probability state, the open winning may be configured with a probability of approximately 100%. Further, in the fourth to fifth embodiments, in the high frequency support mode, when a prize is won in the through winning unit 36, the acceptance control of the second special figure winning device 34 is surely executed. The second is when the acceptance lottery process is executed and the acceptance lottery is won in the acceptance lottery process when the through winning section 36 is won even in the high frequency support mode. The special figure winning device 34 may be configured to be in the accepting state. However, in order to increase the frequency with which the second special figure winning device 34 is in the receiving state in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the acceptance in the high frequency support mode should be higher than the probability of winning the acceptance in the low frequency support mode. Is preferable. Further, in the high frequency support mode, it may happen that the acceptance winning is not achieved, but the acceptance winning may be established with a probability of approximately 100%.

(4) When the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is executed in the second high probability state in the first to third embodiments, after the opening times by the short opening period are executed first and the closing continuation period elapses. The configuration is such that the opening times are executed by the long opening period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which one opening that continues for a longer opening period than the long opening period may be performed. In this case, the timing at which the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is started is the same as that of the first to third embodiments, and the opening period is the shortest for the game ball supplied to the through winning unit 36. It is a period in which the branch winning device 37 is maintained in the open state even at the timing when the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 reach the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37 after three firing cycles. As a result, by supplying the game balls to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle in the second high probability state, the first distribution mechanism is three after the game balls supplied to the through winning unit 36. The game ball supplied to 71 enters the branch winning device 37, and the game ball flows into the second lead-out area 65d. Further, since the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 after one and two games balls supplied to the through winning unit 36 are not distributed toward the branch winning device 37, they are branched. Even if the winning device 37 is maintained in the open state, only the game balls after the above three will enter the branch winning device 37.

(5) When the first special figure winning device 33 is not provided in the first to third embodiments and the game ball entered in the branch winning device 37 flows into the second out-licensing region 65d, the second Although the special figure winning device 34 is in the receiving state, if it flows into the downstream side of the first out-licensing area 65c, no privilege may be given. In this case, the game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37 can flow into the second out-licensing region 65d in either the first high-probability state or the second high-probability state, but the second high-probability state is better. The configuration may be such that the probability that the game ball flows into the second derivation region 65d is higher than that in the first high probability state.

(6) In the first to third embodiments, the distribution direction of the game ball by the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 is the direction toward the through winning portion 36 and the direction toward the branch entrance 61. The configuration is not limited to the three directions of the directions toward the parallel areas of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34, and the configuration may be four or more directions. For example, the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are arranged so as to be laterally separated from each other, and the game ball and the first distribution mechanism 71 are vertically distributed downward by the first distribution mechanism 71. By configuring the game balls to be guided to different regions from the game balls distributed to the right, the distribution direction of the game balls by the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 is set to the through winning portion 36. It may be configured to have four directions: a direction toward the branch entrance 61, a direction toward the first special figure winning device 33, and a direction toward the second special figure winning device 34.

(7) In the first to third embodiments, the number of distribution states of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the number of distribution states of the second distribution mechanism 72 are limited to the same configuration. However, the number of each distribution state may be different. For example, the number of distribution states of the second distribution mechanism 72 is three types, left, vertically downward, and right, as in the first to third embodiments, whereas the first distribution is performed. The number of distribution states of the mechanism 71 may be two types, leftward and vertically downward. In this case, the number of game balls required for the combination of the distribution states of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 to make one round is six.

(8) In the first to third embodiments, the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 may not be provided. Even in this case, the first special figure winning device 33, the second special figure winning device 34, the through winning unit 36, and the branch winning device 37 are collectively arranged in the right side area PA3 toward the right side area PA3. By continuing the firing operation in which the game ball is supplied, it is possible to aim for all the winnings of the first special drawing winning device 33, the second special drawing winning device 34, the through winning section 36 and the branch winning device 37. Become.

(9) In the first to third embodiments, the privilege when the game ball flows into the downstream side of the first out-licensing region 65c of the branch winning device 37 is that the first special drawing winning device 33 is in the accepting state. Is a different privilege, and further, the privilege when the game ball flows into the second derivation area 65d of the branch winning device 37 may be a privilege different from the privilege that the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state. .. For example, in order to increase the number of game balls that can be used by the player regardless of whether the game ball flows into the downstream side of the first lead-out area 65c or the game ball flows into the second lead-out area 65d. A configuration in which the number of game balls to be increased differs between the case where the game balls flow into the downstream side of the first derivation area 65c and the case where the game balls flow into the second derivation area 65d while the processing is executed. May be. In this case, at least one of the number of game balls to be increased may be configured to be the same as the number of game balls to be increased when the game ball is detected by the branch winning detection sensor 66a, and the increase target may be used. It may be configured to be smaller than the number of game balls to be increased, or may be configured to be larger than the number of game balls to be increased.

Further, for example, when the game ball flows into the downstream side of the first derivation area 65c and the game ball is detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b, the hold information is stored in the first special figure hold area 133, and the hold information is stored. 2 When the game ball flows into the derivation area 65d and the game ball is detected by the second trigger detection sensor 66c, the hold information may be stored in the second special figure hold area 134. In this case, even if the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are not provided, the type of hold information according to the flow result of the game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37 is acquired. It becomes possible to do.

(10) In the first to third embodiments, when the game ball flows into the downstream side of the first out-licensing region 65c in the branch winning device 37, the first special figure winning device 33 is surely in the accepting state. Instead, the first special figure winning device 33 may be in the accepted state by winning the acceptance in the lottery process executed when the game ball is detected by the first opportunity detection sensor 66b. As a result, the situation in which the first special figure winning device 33 is in the accepting state will be diversified. Further, when the game ball flows into the second out-licensing area 65d of the branch winning device 37, the second special figure winning device 34 is not surely in the accepting state, but the game ball is moved by the second trigger detection sensor 66c. The second special figure winning device 34 may be in the accepting state by winning the acceptance in the lottery process executed with the detection as a trigger. As a result, the situation in which the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state will be diversified.

(11) In the first to third embodiments, the game ball entered into the branch winning device 37 is limited to the configuration in which the game ball enters either the downstream side of the first out-licensing region 65c or the second out-licensing region 65d. However, it may be configured to flow into any of three or more types of derivation regions. For example, when a third special figure winning device is provided separately from the first special drawing winning device 33 and the second special drawing winning device 34, and the game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37 flows into the third out-licensing region. May be configured to execute the acceptance control of the third special figure winning device. This makes it possible to diversify the branching mode of the game ball in the branch winning device 37.

(12) In the first to third embodiments, even if the game ball is detected by the branch prize detection sensor 66a of the branch prize device 37, the game ball may not be paid out, and the first opportunity detection sensor 66b may be used. Alternatively, when the game ball is detected by the second trigger detection sensor 66c, the game ball may be paid out for the winning to the branch winning device 37.

(13) In the first to third embodiments, the switching piece 67 is always arranged at the retracted position in the first high probability state, and the switching piece 67 is always arranged at the guided position in the second high probability state. It may be configured as such. Even in this case, the game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37 in the first high probability state surely flows into the first out-licensing region 65c, and the game that has entered the branch winning device 37 in the second high probability state. The sphere will surely flow into the second derivation region 65d.

(14) In the first to third embodiments, even if the game balls are other than the game balls distributed to the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72, the first special figure winning device 33, the second. The special figure winning device 34, the through winning section 36, and the branch winning device 37 may be configured to be capable of winning at least one winning section. This makes it possible to diversify the routes by which prizes are generated for the prize-winning section.

(15) In the first to third embodiments, one game ball wins in the branch winning device 37, and two game balls win in any of the special figure winning devices 33, 34. The configuration is such that the same number of game balls as the number of game balls required for the combination of the distribution states of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 to make one round is paid out, but the configuration is limited to this. However, the total number of game balls to be paid out due to the above-mentioned winning may be smaller or more than the number of game balls required for one lap. Further, in the fourth embodiment, the number of game balls required for the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 to make one round by winning one game ball in the second special figure winning device 34. The configuration is such that the same number of game balls are paid out, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of game balls paid out for winning a prize in the second special figure winning device 34 is required to make one lap. The configuration may be less than the number or often more.

(16) In the first to third embodiments, the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are configured to be electrically driven to switch between the accepted state and the non-accepted state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be performed by physical driving. For example, in order to provide a first receiving portion that can be displaced to a position where the game ball that has flowed into the downstream side of the first derivation region 65c surely collides, and to switch the first special figure winning device 33 from the non-accepted state to the accepted state. The member and the first receiving portion are connected by using the space on the back side of the game board 24. Then, when the game ball is received in the first receiving portion, the first receiving portion is displaced and the first special figure winning device 33 is configured to switch from the non-accepted state to the accepted state. Further, the first special figure winning device 33 is provided with a second receiving portion at a position where the game balls won in the first special figure winning device 33 surely collide with each other, and two gaming balls are provided in the second receiving portion. In the case of receiving, the displacement amount of the second receiving portion becomes the displacement amount corresponding to receiving two game balls, so that the first special figure winning device 33 switches from the accepted state to the non-accepted state. It shall be configured. Further, a third receiving portion that can be displaced to a position where the game ball that has flowed into the second derivation region 65d surely collides is provided, and a member for switching the second special figure winning device 34 from the non-accepted state to the accepted state. The third receiving portion is connected by using the space on the back side of the game board 24. Then, when the game ball is received in the third receiving portion, the third receiving portion is displaced and the second special figure winning device 34 is configured to switch from the non-accepted state to the accepted state. Further, the second special figure winning device 34 is provided with a fourth receiving portion at a position where the game balls won in the second special figure winning device 34 surely collide with each other, and two game balls are provided in the fourth receiving portion. In the case of receiving, the displacement amount of the fourth receiving portion becomes the displacement amount corresponding to receiving two game balls, so that the second special figure winning device 34 switches from the accepted state to the non-accepted state. It shall be configured. According to the above configuration, it is not necessary to execute the acceptance control of the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 by the MPU 112.

(17) In the third embodiment, the special winning section 142 is not provided at a position vertically below the branch entrance 61, but the special winning section 142 is provided at a position vertically below the through winning section 36. It may be configured as a plumb bob. In this case, the special winning unit 142 is reached regardless of whether or not a prize is generated in the branch winning device 37 while the combination of the distribution states of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 makes one round. Will be awarded. Therefore, when the winning of the branch winning device 37 does not occur, the combination of the distribution states of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 makes one round, and the first one during the one round. When the same number of game balls as the game balls supplied to the distribution mechanism 71 are paid out and a prize is generated in the branch winning device 37, each distribution of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 occurs. During one lap of the combination of states, a larger number of game balls than the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 are paid out during the one lap.

(18) In the fourth embodiment, the special winning section 155 is not provided at a position vertically below the second special drawing winning device 34, but the special winning section 155 is located vertically below the through winning section 36. , Or it may be configured to be provided at a position guided by the first lead rail 152. In this case, the special winning unit 155 will be awarded regardless of whether or not the second special figure winning device 34 is awarded while the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 makes one round. Become. Therefore, if no prize is awarded to the second special figure winning device 34, the first distribution mechanism 71 is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 while the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 makes one round. When the same number of game balls as the game balls are paid out and a prize is generated in the second special figure winning device 34, the first distribution mechanism 71 makes one lap while the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 makes one lap. In the meantime, a larger number of game balls than the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 are paid out.

(19) The distribution direction of the game ball by the first distribution mechanism 71 and the positional relationship between the second special figure winning device 34 and the through winning unit 36 are not limited to those in the fourth embodiment. For example, the through winning portion 36 is provided at a position where the game ball distributed to the left is guided by the first distribution mechanism 71, and the game ball distributed vertically downward is guided by the first distribution mechanism 71. The second special figure winning device 34 may be provided at a position or a position where a game ball distributed to the right by the first distribution mechanism 71 is guided. Further, a through winning portion 36 is provided at a position where the game ball distributed vertically downward is guided by the first distribution mechanism 71, and the game ball distributed to the left is guided by the first distribution mechanism 71. The second special figure winning device 34 may be provided at a position or a position where a game ball distributed to the right by the first distribution mechanism 71 is guided.

(20) In the fourth to fifth embodiments, when the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state, one game ball enters the second special figure winning device 34, so that the second special figure winning device 34 is received. The special figure winning device 34 is not limited to the non-accepting state, and a predetermined number of two or more game balls enter the second special figure winning device 34 to cause the second special figure winning device. The configuration may be such that 34 is in a non-accepting state. In this case, even if the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state in the predetermined lap when the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 makes one lap, the second lap is after the predetermined lap. 2 The condition for switching the special figure winning device 34 to the non-accepting state is satisfied.

(21) In the fourth to fifth embodiments, when the game times corresponding to the disengagement result are repeatedly executed triggered by the hold information of the second special figure hold area 134 (hereinafter, also referred to as the second hold information). The shortest winning cycle to the second special figure winning device 34, the fixed short period, and the fixed long period are set so that the game times for the fixed long period are performed once after the game times for the fixed short period are performed 10 times. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the game may be played once for a fixed long period after a predetermined number of games for a fixed short period of less than 10 times. It may be configured that the game times for a fixed long period are performed once after the game times for a fixed short period are performed a predetermined number of times more than 10 times. Further, the game may be played a predetermined number of times for a fixed short period, whereas the game may be played twice or three times for a fixed long period.

(22) In the fourth to fifth embodiments, the fixed short period is not limited to only one type, and there are a plurality of periods shorter than the shortest winning cycle for the second special figure winning device 34. It may be a configuration in which there are different types. Further, the configuration is not limited to one type of fixed long-term, and a plurality of types of periods having a period equal to or longer than the shortest winning cycle for the second special figure winning device 34 may exist. This makes it possible to diversify the execution mode of the game times.

(23) In the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 in the first to third embodiments, the first distribution mechanism 71 in the fourth embodiment, and the fifth embodiment. The ball entry portion to be distributed by the distribution means such as the third distribution mechanism 161 and the fourth distribution mechanism 162 is not limited to that in each of the above embodiments. For example, the game ball may be distributed by the distribution means to the general winning unit 31 and the special electric winning device 35, and the first special drawing normal winning unit 32, the second special drawing winning device 34, and the special electric winning device 35 may be used. The configuration may be 35.

(24) In the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 in the first to third embodiments, the first distribution mechanism 71 in the fourth embodiment, and the fifth embodiment. The distribution means such as the third distribution mechanism 161 and the fourth distribution mechanism 162 is not limited to a configuration in which the distribution direction is changed each time one game ball is supplied to the distribution means. When the distribution state of the distribution means is a state in which the game balls are distributed in the predetermined distribution direction, the game balls are different from the predetermined distribution direction when two or more game balls are supplied to the distribution means. It may be configured to change to a state in which the game balls are distributed in the distribution direction. Further, in the case where the game balls are distributed in the predetermined distribution direction, when two or more trigger numbers of game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the game is played in a distribution direction different from the predetermined distribution direction. When the game changes to a state of distributing balls and the game balls are distributed in a specific distribution direction, when a number of game balls different from the above-mentioned trigger number is supplied to the distribution means, the specific distribution direction is used. May be configured to change to a state in which game balls are distributed in different distribution directions.

(25) In the first to third embodiments, the winning of the through winning unit 36 is invalid in the situation where the acceptance control is executed for any one of the first special drawing winning device 33 and the second special drawing winning device 34. However, if the winning of the through winning section 36 is valid even in the situation where the acceptance control is executed and the winning of the through winning section 36 occurs in the situation, it is a normal figure. A configuration may be configured in which the variable display of the pattern on the display unit 46 is started, and after the variable display of the pattern, the opening control of the branch winning device 37 is started. In this case, the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 are provided with the game balls required for the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 to switch from the accepted state to the non-accepted state in the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72. When the game ball is supplied to the through winning unit 36 in a situation where it is not supplied, it is possible to prevent a waiting time until the winning to the through winning unit 36 is activated. Will be. Further, in the fourth to fifth embodiments, in the situation where the acceptance control is executed for the second special figure winning device 34, the winning to the through winning unit 36 is invalidated, but the acceptance control is executed. Even if the situation is set, the winning of the through winning section 36 is activated, and if the winning of the through winning section 36 occurs in the situation, the variable display of the pattern on the normal drawing display section 46 is started. At the same time, the acceptance control of the second special figure winning device 34 may be started after the variable display of the pattern. In this case, the first distribution mechanism 71 is passed through in a situation where the game ball necessary for the second special figure winning device 34 to switch from the accepted state to the non-accepted state is not supplied to the second special figure winning device 34. When the game ball is supplied to the winning unit 36, it is possible to prevent a waiting time until the winning of the through winning unit 36 is activated.

(26) In the first to third embodiments, the situation where the pattern is displayed in a variable manner on the normal figure display unit 46, the situation where the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is executed, and the special drawing winning device. When a prize is awarded to the through winning unit 36 while the acceptance control of 33 and 34 is being executed, the trigger information for the prize is stored on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4). May be. Then, a situation in which the pattern is displayed in a variable manner on the normal drawing display unit 46, a situation in which opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is executed, and a situation in which acceptance control of the special drawing winning devices 33 and 34 is executed. If the trigger information is reserved and stored in a situation other than the above, the variable display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 46 is started with the trigger information as a trigger. This makes it possible to generate many opportunities for the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 to be executed. Further, in the fourth to fifth embodiments, the pattern is displayed in a variable manner on the normal drawing display unit 46, and the acceptance control of the second special drawing winning device 34 is executed. When a prize is awarded to the winning unit 36, the trigger information for the winning may be stored on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4). Then, the opportunity information is reserved and stored in a situation in which the variable display of the pattern is performed on the normal map display unit 46 and the acceptance control of the second special figure winning device 34 is not executed. In this case, the variable display of the pattern on the general map display unit 46 is started with the trigger information as a trigger. As a result, it is possible to generate many opportunities for the acceptance control of the second special figure winning device 34 to be executed.

(27) The opening period of the branch winning device 37 may be longer or shorter than the period in the first to third embodiments. Further, the acceptance period of the second special figure winning device 34 may be longer or shorter than that of the fourth to fifth embodiments.

(28) In the first to third embodiments, the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 may be arranged upside down.

(29) The special electric winning device 35 includes a distribution member that distributes game balls to either a V winning area, a V winning area, or another area, and a V winning detection sensor that detects a game ball that has flowed into the V winning area. Is provided, and when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor, the winning / failing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode is executed may be set to the high probability mode. In this case, the open / close execution mode is performed in such a manner that the game ball can flow into the V winning area when the high accuracy response result is obtained, and when the low accuracy response result is obtained, the game ball is entered into the V winning area. The opening / closing execution mode is performed in such a manner that the inflow of game balls is prohibited. In addition to the special electric winning device 35, a separate winning device provided with a V winning detection sensor is provided, and when a highly accurate response result is obtained, the opening / closing execution mode is set so that the winning device can be won. If the result is low, the opening / closing execution mode may be performed in such a manner that the winning device can be won.

(30) In the first to third embodiments, when the game ball is detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b and the acceptance control of the first special figure winning device 33 is executed, the first special figure winning device 33 Is open only once, but the first special figure winning device 33 may be opened a plurality of times. In this case, the first opening turn occurs in a predetermined turn when each distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 makes one round, and the second open turn occurs in a predetermined turn. On the other hand, the configuration may be such that the game ball is generated at the timing when the game ball can be supplied to the first special figure winning device 33 in the next lap. Further, when the game ball is detected by the second trigger detection sensor 66c and the acceptance control of the second special figure winning device 34 is executed, the second special figure winning device 34 is opened only once. , The second special figure winning device 34 may be configured to be opened a plurality of times. In this case, the first opening turn occurs in a predetermined turn when each distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 makes one round, and the second open turn occurs in a predetermined turn. On the other hand, the configuration may be such that the game ball is generated at the timing when the game ball can be supplied to the second special figure winning device 34 in the next lap.

(31) When the high-probability state is reached in each of the above embodiments, the high-probability state is not limited to the configuration in which the high-probability state continues until the next jackpot result occurs, and the end reference number of times after the opening / closing execution mode ends. The high-probability state may be terminated when the game times of are executed. In this case, it is possible to shift from the high-probability state to the low-probability state even if the jackpot result does not occur. Therefore, for example, if a jackpot result occurs triggered by the hold information stored in the first special figure hold area 133, it will be either a low probability response result or a high probability response result, whereas the second special figure hold When a jackpot result occurs triggered by the hold information stored in the area 134, the configuration may be such that a highly accurate response result is surely obtained.

(32) In the first to third embodiments, if the jackpot result is triggered by the hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 134, the first high accuracy response result is not obtained. The configuration may be such that the first high-accuracy response result can be obtained.

(33) The number of prize balls in each of the above embodiments is not limited and is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls when one game ball is won in the second special figure winning device 34 is the first. The number of prize balls may be larger or smaller than the number of prize balls when one game ball is won in the special figure normal winning unit 32 or the first special figure winning device 33. Further, the number of prize balls when one game ball wins in the first special figure normal winning unit 32 and the number of prize balls when one game ball wins in the first special figure winning device 33 are different. May be. In this case, the number of prize balls in the former may be larger or smaller than the number of prize balls in the latter.

(34) Display control based on the command transmitted from the main control device 101 instead of the configuration in which the display control device 126 is controlled by the voice emission control device 121 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 101. The device 126 may be configured to control the voice emission control device 121. Further, instead of the configuration in which the voice emission control device 121 and the display control device 126 are separately provided, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be used, and the function of one of the two control devices may be provided. May be integrated in the main control device 101, and both functions of both control devices may be integrated in the main control device 101. Further, the configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 101 to the voice emission control device 121 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 121 to the display control device 126 are also arbitrary.

(35) The device for executing the effect for the game round is not limited to the symbol display device 41, and the effect for the game round is executed by the operation of the decorative member provided movably. However, the effect for game rounds may be executed by lighting a predetermined light emitting unit, or the effect for game rounds may be executed by a combination of all or a part of each of the above embodiments. good.

(36) In the fourth to fifth embodiments, the first special figure holding area 133 and the second special figure holding area 134 are not individually provided, and the first special figure normal winning section 32 and the second special figure are not provided separately. Regardless of which of the winning devices 34 the game ball enters, the holding information may be stored in the common special drawing holding area. In this case, the hold information acquired due to the occurrence of a prize in the first special figure normal winning unit 32 and the hold information acquired due to the occurrence of a prize in the second special figure winning device 34 are stored separately. Therefore, the hit / fail determination process and the distribution determination process are executed in the same manner regardless of the reserved information.

(37) In each of the above embodiments, the hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 134 is limited to the configuration in which the hold information stored in the first special figure hold area 133 is preferentially digested. On the contrary, the hold information stored in the first special figure hold area 133 may be preferentially digested over the hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 134, and any hold may be used. Even if it is information, it may be configured to be digested in the order of acquisition.

(38) When the hold information stored in the first special figure hold area 133 is the target of the hit / fail judgment, and when the hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 134 is the target of the hit / fail judgment. Therefore, the distribution mode of the jackpot results may be the same.

(39) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine, which is a big hit when a right is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-bullet type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. Or, after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window, a privilege such as paying out a medal is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the main body of the gaming machine, which is supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, is equipped with a storage unit and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused to start rotation of a reel.

Further, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine in which a game ball is circulated and used without being discharged to an island facility. In addition, it is not possible for the player to replenish the pachinko machine with game balls, the number of game balls that can be used by the player is managed as data, and the launch operation can be performed in a situation where the number of game balls that can be used is one or more. The present invention may be applied to a configuration in which a game ball is launched and the number of usable game balls is subtracted when the game ball is fired. In this case, a game that can be used when a prize is generated in the first special figure winning device 33, the second special drawing winning device 34, the branch winning device 37, the special winning portions 142, 155, etc. The number of balls will increase on the data.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. A predetermined entry portion (branch entrance 61) into which a game ball flowing down the game area (game area PA) can enter, and
A predetermined passage portion (branch passage 65) through which a game ball that has entered the predetermined entry portion flows down, and a predetermined passage portion (branch passage 65).
A predetermined detection means (branch prize detection sensor 66a) for detecting a game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion, and
A predetermined granting means (a function for executing the process of step S905 in the MPU 112, a payout control device 107) that grants a privilege to the player when the game ball is detected by the predetermined detecting means.
A game ball provided in the predetermined passage portion on the downstream side of the detection region by the predetermined detection means and has passed through the detection region is a first region (downstream side of the first derivation region 65c) and a second region (second derivation). Guiding means (switching piece 67) for guiding to any of a plurality of regions including the region 65d), and
A first granting means (a function of executing the processes of step S704, step S705, and step S908 in the MPU 112) to grant the privilege or a privilege different from the privilege when the game ball flows into the first region. When,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature A1, not only the privilege is given by the game ball entering the predetermined entry portion, but also the privilege is given by the game ball entering the predetermined entry portion flowing into the first region. Granted. As a result, multiple benefits will be given by the game ball entering the predetermined entry section, and it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the game ball will enter the predetermined entry section. Become. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In particular, when the game ball is detected by the predetermined detection means provided on the upstream side of the guiding means for guiding the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion to any region, a privilege is given, and the guidance means further provides a privilege. Is also configured to give a privilege when a game ball flows into the first area on the downstream side. As a result, even if the passage length dimension of the predetermined passage portion leading to the first region is increased, it is possible to give a privilege for the game ball entering the predetermined entry portion at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in designing the passage configuration of the predetermined passage portion leading to the first region while making it possible to give a privilege for the game ball entering the predetermined entry portion at an early stage. ..

Feature A2. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein a privilege different from the privilege by the predetermined granting means is given even if the gaming ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion does not flow into the first region.

According to the feature A2, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry portion, the privilege for detecting the game ball by the predetermined detection means regardless of whether or not the game ball flows into the first region. Other benefits will be granted. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry portion.

Further, the predetermined detection means provided with the configuration of the above feature A1 and provided on the upstream side of the guidance position by the guidance means regardless of which region the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into. Benefits are granted when a game ball is detected. As a result, it is possible to give a privilege to the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry portion at an early stage, and to increase the degree of freedom in designing the configuration for guiding to any area.

Feature A3. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the privilege given by the predetermined granting means and the privilege given by the first granting means are different in type.

According to the feature A3, a plurality of types of benefits are given to the game ball entering the predetermined entry portion. This makes it possible to diversify the types of benefits to be granted. Further, the privilege is granted by the predetermined granting means by detecting the game ball by the predetermined detecting means on the upstream side of the guiding position by the guiding means, and the privilege is granted by the first granting means from the guiding position by the guiding means. Is also performed by the game ball flowing into the first region on the downstream side. As a result, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of benefits are given to a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry portion, the plurality of types of benefits can be given in stages.

Feature A4. When the game ball is detected by the predetermined detection means, the predetermined granting means grants a privilege of increasing the number of game balls that can be used by the player.
Any of the features A1 to A3, wherein the first granting means grants a privilege different from the privilege of increasing the number of game balls that can be used by the player when the game ball flows into the first region. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the feature A4, a plurality of types of benefits are given to the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry portion. This makes it possible to diversify the types of benefits to be granted. In addition, the privilege of increasing the number of game balls that can be used by the player is first given by detecting the game ball by the predetermined detection means on the upstream side of the guidance position by the guidance means, and then the guidance position by the guidance means. When the game ball flows into the first region on the downstream side of the sill, a privilege different from the privilege of increasing the number of game balls that can be used by the player is given. As a result, it becomes possible to grant a plurality of types of benefits in stages while allowing the benefits to be granted to increase the number of game balls that can be used by the player at an early stage.

Feature A5. A first variable ball-entry means (first special figure winning device) provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which a game ball can be entered and a second state in which a game ball cannot or is difficult to enter. 33)
The first granting means has one of the features A1 to A4 characterized in that when the gaming ball flows into the first region, the first variable ball-entry means is brought into the first state. The described gaming machine.

According to the feature A5, when the game ball that enters the predetermined ball entry portion and flows down the predetermined passage portion flows into the first region, the first variable entry means is in the first state. In this case, the player who expects the first variable ball entry means to be in the first state will play the game while expecting the game ball that has entered the predetermined ball entry portion to flow into the first region. .. By providing the configuration of the above-mentioned feature A1 in the configuration, the game ball is detected by the predetermined detecting means on the upstream side of the guiding position by the guiding means, so that the privilege is given by the predetermined granting means. As a result, in order to secure a period in which the player pays attention to whether or not the game ball that has entered the predetermined entry portion flows into the first region, the distance from the predetermined entry portion to the guidance position by the guiding means is set to some extent. Even if it is secured, it is possible to give a privilege for the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry portion at an early stage.

Feature A6. A second variable ball-entry means (second special figure winning device) provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which a game ball can be entered and a second state in which a game ball cannot or is difficult to enter. 34) and
A second granting means (step S804, step S805 and step in the MPU 112) that causes the second variable ball entry means to be in the first state when the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the second region. Function to execute the processing of S910) and
The gaming machine according to the feature A5, which is characterized by the above.

According to the feature A6, if the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the first region, the first variable ball entry means is in the first state, and if the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the second region. The second variable ball entry means is in the first state. As a result, the type of the variable ball entry means that is in the first state differs depending on the guidance mode by the guidance means, and the player determines to which region the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion is guided. It is possible to increase the degree of attention of.

Feature A7. The lottery process is executed based on the occurrence of the game ball entering the first variable ball entry means, and the lottery process is performed based on the occurrence of the game ball entry into the second variable entry means. (A function to execute the processes of step S1001, step S1102, and step S1103 in MPU 112) for executing the lottery.
When the lottery process is executed based on the occurrence of the entry of the game ball into the second variable entry means, the entry of the game ball into the first variable entry means has occurred. The gaming machine according to feature A6, which is more advantageous to the player than the case where the lottery process is executed based on the above.

According to the feature A7, it is more advantageous for the player that the game ball enters the second variable entry means than the game ball enters the first variable entry means. As a result, the player expects that the game ball that has entered the predetermined ball entry portion is guided to the second region, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A8. When the gaming state is the first gaming state (first high probability state), the probability that the gaming ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the first region or flows into the first region is the first region. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, characterized in that is higher than the probability of flowing into different regions.

According to the feature A8, in the first game state, the probability that the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion surely flows into the first region or flows into the first region is high. This makes it possible to create a state in which the game ball easily flows into the first region.

Feature A9. Switching control means (variation in MPU 112) for switching and controlling the predetermined ball entry portion between the first state in which the game ball can enter and the second state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to enter. Equipped with a function to execute intermediate processing and processing during normal operation)
The situation in which the predetermined ball entry portion is in the first state is the first situation in which the game ball that has entered the predetermined ball entry section is guided to the first region, and the game in which the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry section. There is a second situation in which the sphere is guided to the second region.
In the first gaming state, in a situation where the gaming ball can enter the predetermined ball entry portion, the probability of becoming the first situation or the probability of becoming the first situation is higher than the probability of becoming the second situation. The gaming machine according to the feature A8, which is characterized by being expensive.

According to the feature A9, the predetermined ball entry portion cannot or is difficult to enter the game ball in the second state, and the game ball can enter the ball in the first state. As a result, the player who expects the game ball to enter the predetermined entry portion pays attention to whether or not the predetermined entry portion is in the first state. In this case, in the first situation, the game ball that has entered the predetermined entry section is guided to the first region, and in the first gaming state, the game ball can enter the predetermined entry section. In the situation, it becomes the first situation or tends to become the first situation. This makes it possible to create a state in which the predetermined ball entry portion is in the first state and the game ball is likely to flow into the first region.

Feature A10. A second granting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S804, S805, and S910 in the MPU 112) to grant the privilege or a privilege different from the privilege when the game ball flows into the second region. Equipped with
When the gaming state is the second gaming state (second high probability state), the probability that the gaming ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the second region or flows into the second region is in the first region. The gaming machine according to feature A8 or A9, which is characterized by having a higher probability of inflow.

According to the feature A10, in the first gaming state, the probability that the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the first region or the first region is high, while in the second gaming state, the predetermined passage portion is The probability that the flowing game ball will flow into the second region or the second region will increase. This makes it possible to create a state in which the game ball easily flows into the first region and a state in which the game ball easily flows into the second region.

Feature A11. Switching control means (variation in MPU 112) for switching and controlling the predetermined ball entry portion between the first state in which the game ball can enter and the second state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to enter. Equipped with a function to execute intermediate processing and processing during normal operation)
The situation in which the predetermined ball entry portion is in the first state is the first situation in which the game ball that has entered the predetermined ball entry section is guided to the first region, and the game in which the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry section. There is a second situation in which the sphere is guided to the second region.
In the first gaming state, in a situation where the game ball can enter the predetermined entry portion, the probability of becoming the first situation or the probability of becoming the first situation is higher than the probability of becoming the second situation. Is also a high composition,
In the second gaming state, in a situation where the gaming ball can enter the predetermined ball entry portion, the probability of the second situation or the probability of the second situation is higher than the probability of the first situation. The gaming machine according to feature A10, which is characterized by having a high configuration.

According to the feature A11, the predetermined ball entry portion cannot or is difficult to enter the game ball in the second state, and the game ball can enter the ball in the first state. As a result, the player who expects the game ball to enter the predetermined entry portion pays attention to whether or not the predetermined entry portion is in the first state. In this case, in the first situation, the game ball that has entered the predetermined entry section is guided to the first region, and in the first gaming state, the game ball can enter the predetermined entry section. In the situation, it becomes the first situation or tends to become the first situation. Further, in the second situation, the game ball that has entered the predetermined entry section is guided to the second region, and in the second game state, the game ball can enter the predetermined entry section. Is in the second situation or is likely to be in the second situation. As a result, the game ball is likely to flow into the first region in the situation where the predetermined ball entry portion is in the first state, and the game ball is in the second region in the situation where the predetermined ball entry portion is in the first state. It is possible to create a state in which is easy to flow in.

Feature A12. Switching control means (variation in MPU 112) for switching and controlling the predetermined ball entry portion between the first state in which the game ball can enter and the second state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to enter. Equipped with a function to execute intermediate processing and processing during normal operation)
The switching control means is configured to execute the switching control based on the fact that the game ball has entered the specific ball entry unit (through winning unit 36).
In the game area, the supplied game ball is placed on the upstream side of the specific ball entry section and the predetermined ball entry section in any one of a plurality of types of distribution directions including the first distribution direction and the second distribution direction. The distribution means (first distribution mechanism 71, second distribution mechanism 72) for sequentially changing the distribution direction when the game ball is supplied is provided.
When the distribution direction by the distribution means is the first distribution direction, the game ball is supplied toward the specific ball entry portion, and the distribution direction by the distribution means is the second distribution direction. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A11, wherein the gaming ball is supplied toward the predetermined ball entry portion in the case of the case.

According to the feature A12, the predetermined ball entry portion is in the first state, provided that the game ball has entered the specific entry section at least one condition. As a result, the player who expects the game ball to enter the predetermined entry portion also pays attention to whether or not the game ball enters the specific entry portion. In this case, a sorting means for sequentially changing the sorting direction is provided on the upstream side of the specific ball-filling section and the predetermined ball-filling section when the game ball is supplied, and the sorting means is used for sorting. When the direction is the first distribution direction, the game ball is supplied toward the specific ball entry section, and when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the second distribution direction, the game ball is directed toward the predetermined ball entry section. Is supplied. This makes it possible to supply the game ball to the specific entry section by playing the game so that the game ball is supplied to the distribution means, and also to the predetermined entry section. It becomes possible to supply game balls. Further, by appropriately designing the configuration of the distribution means, the frequency at which the game ball is supplied to the specific entry portion and the frequency at which the game ball is supplied toward the predetermined entry portion are desired by the designer. It can be a frequency. Furthermore, it is possible to supply the game ball to the predetermined ball entry section after a predetermined period has elapsed since the game ball was supplied to the specific ball entry section, and the game ball enters the specific ball entry section. It is possible to ensure that the game ball is reliably supplied to the predetermined ball entry portion that is in the first state when the predetermined ball entry section is in the first state, with at least one condition. ..

Feature A13. The gaming machine according to feature A12, wherein when a specific number of gaming balls are supplied to the sorting means, the sorting state by the sorting means makes one round.

According to the feature A13, when a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the distribution state by the distribution means makes one round, so that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means. This makes it possible to repeatedly distribute the game balls in a certain manner.

Feature A14. Only the game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means can enter the specific ball entry portion, and only the game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means. The gaming machine according to the feature A12 or A13, wherein the ball can enter the predetermined ball entry portion.

According to the feature A14, only the game balls distributed by the distribution means can enter the specific entry section and the predetermined entry section. This facilitates the design of the frequency of ball entry into the specific ball entry section and the predetermined ball entry section at a desired frequency.

Feature A15. A12 to feature A12, wherein the game balls supplied to the distribution means after a predetermined number are distributed in the second distribution direction with respect to the game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means. The gaming machine according to any one of A14.

According to the feature A15, the game balls supplied to the distribution means after a predetermined number are distributed in the second distribution direction with respect to the game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means, so that the specific ball enters. It is possible to secure a period from when the game ball enters the section to when the game ball is supplied to the predetermined entry section. As a result, when the predetermined entry section is in the first state on the condition that the game ball has entered the specific entry section, the game ball is placed in the predetermined entry section which is the first state. In the case of supplying the ball, it is possible to secure a period until the predetermined ball is in the first state when the game ball enters the specific ball.

Feature A16. The gaming machine according to feature A15, wherein the predetermined number is two or more.

According to the feature A16, it is possible to secure a certain long period from the time when the game ball enters the specific entry portion to the time when the game ball is supplied to the predetermined entry portion. As a result, when the predetermined entry section is in the first state on the condition that the game ball has entered the specific entry section, the game ball is placed in the predetermined entry section which is the first state. In the case of ensuring that the supply is ensured, it is possible to secure a certain long period as the period until the predetermined entry section is put into the first state when the game ball enters the specific entry section. Become.

Feature A17. An operation executing means (normal figure display unit 46) for executing a pre-switching operation based on the fact that a game ball has entered the specific ball entry unit is provided.
When the switching control is executed, the switching control means has a configuration in which the switching control is started when the pre-switching operation started based on the entry of the game ball into the specific entry portion is completed. The gaming machine according to feature A15 or A16, characterized in that it is present.

According to the feature A17, when the game ball enters the specific entry portion, the pre-switching operation is executed by the operation executing means, and when the pre-switching operation is completed, the predetermined entry portion is in the first state. .. This makes it possible for the player to recognize in advance that the predetermined ball entry portion may be in the first state from now on. Further, the manager of the game hall can grasp whether or not the transition to the first state of the predetermined ball entry portion is normal by confirming whether or not the operation before switching is executed. In this case, by providing the configuration of the above-mentioned feature A15 or A16, a certain period from the time when the game ball enters the specific entry portion to the time when the game ball is supplied to the predetermined entry portion is provided. It is secured. As a result, when the predetermined entry section is in the first state on the condition that the game ball has entered the specific entry section, the game ball is placed in the predetermined entry section which is the first state. In the case of ensuring the supply, it is possible to secure a period in which the pre-switching operation is executed in the operation executing means before the predetermined ball entry portion is in the first state.

Feature A18. The situation in which the predetermined ball entry portion is in the first state is the first situation in which the game ball that has entered the predetermined ball entry section is guided to the first region, and the game in which the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry section. There is a second situation in which the sphere is guided to the second region.
When the gaming state is the first gaming state (first high probability state), the first situation or the first situation is reached in a situation where the gaming ball can enter the predetermined entry portion. The configuration is such that the probability is higher than the probability of the second situation.
When the gaming state is the second gaming state (second high probability state), the second situation or the second situation is reached in the situation where the gaming ball can enter the predetermined entry portion. The configuration is such that the probability is higher than the probability of the first situation.
In the first situation, when the game balls are supplied to the distribution means in a predetermined supply cycle, the predetermined number of game balls are distributed to the first distribution direction by the distribution means. A game ball that was later supplied to the distribution means and entered the predetermined ball entry portion is guided to the first region.
In the second situation, when the game balls are supplied to the distribution means in the predetermined supply cycle, the predetermined game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means. The description according to any one of the features A15 to A17, wherein the game balls supplied to the distribution means after the number of pieces and the game balls that have entered the predetermined ball entry portion are guided to the second region. Pachinko machine.

According to the feature A18, in the first situation, the game ball that has entered the predetermined entry section is guided to the first region, and in the first gaming state, the game ball can enter the predetermined entry section. In such a situation, it becomes the first situation or tends to be the first situation. Further, in the second situation, the game ball that has entered the predetermined entry section is guided to the second region, and in the second game state, the game ball can enter the predetermined entry section. Is in the second situation or is likely to be in the second situation. As a result, the game ball is likely to flow into the first region when the predetermined ball entry portion is in the first state, and the game ball is in the first region when the predetermined ball entry portion is in the second state. It is possible to create a state in which is easy to flow in.

In this case, when the game balls are supplied to the distribution means in a predetermined supply cycle, in the first situation, the distribution means is used after a predetermined number of the game balls supplied to the specific entry portion. The supplied game balls enter the predetermined ball entry section and are supplied to the first region, and in the second situation, the game balls supplied to the specific entry section are supplied to the distribution means after a predetermined number. The game ball enters the predetermined ball entry portion and is supplied to the second region. As a result, the game ball is supplied to the first region in the first situation and the game ball is supplied to the second region in the second situation, while the operation mode of the distribution means is a common mode. It will be possible. Further, while the number of game balls required from the time when the game ball is supplied to the specific entry part to the time when the game ball is supplied to the predetermined entry part is set to a common number, in the first situation, the game is played in the first area. The ball is supplied, and in the second situation, the game ball can be supplied to the second region.

Feature A19. When the timing at which the switching control is started is used as a reference, in the first period, the game ball is guided to the first region, and in the second period, the game ball is guided to the second region. It is provided with a guidance control means (a function of executing the processes of step S510, step S511, and steps S612 to S614 in the MPU 112) that controls the guidance means so as to be in a state.
In the first situation, when the game balls are supplied to the distribution means in the predetermined supply cycle, the predetermined game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means. The switching so that the first period occurs when the game balls supplied to the distribution means after the number of pieces and have entered the predetermined ball entry portion pass through the guidance position by the guidance means. The control start timing is set,
In the second situation, when the game balls are supplied to the distribution means in the predetermined supply cycle, the predetermined game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means. The switching so that the second period occurs when the gaming balls supplied to the distribution means after the number of balls and the gaming balls that have entered the predetermined entry portion pass through the guidance position by the guidance means. The gaming machine according to feature A18, wherein the control start timing is set.

According to the feature A19, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as described in the feature A18 only by adjusting the start timing of the switching control of the predetermined ball entry portion corresponding to each of the first situation and the second situation. It will be possible.

Feature A20. An operation executing means (normal figure display unit 46) for executing a pre-switching operation based on the fact that a game ball has entered the specific ball entry unit is provided.
When the switching control is executed, the switching control means is configured to start the switching control when the pre-switching operation started based on the entry of the game ball into the specific entry portion is completed. can be,
In the first situation, the gaming machine causes the operation executing means to perform the pre-switching operation for a period corresponding to the first situation, and in the second situation, during a period corresponding to the second situation. An operation control means for causing the operation execution means to perform the pre-switching operation (a function of executing the processes of steps S407 and S408 in the MPU 112 in the first embodiment, and steps S1211 and steps in the MPU 112 in the second embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature A19, which comprises a function of executing the process of S1212).

According to the feature A20, the excellent effect as described in the above feature A18 can be obtained only by adjusting the period during which the pre-switching operation is executed in the operation executing means corresponding to each of the first situation and the second situation. Is possible.

Feature A21. A first variable ball-entry means (first special figure winning device) provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which a game ball can be entered and a second state in which a game ball cannot or is difficult to enter. 33)
The first granting means causes the first variable ball-entry means to be in the first state when the game ball flows into the first region.
The third distribution direction is set as the distribution direction by the distribution means.
The description according to any one of the features A12 to A20, wherein the game ball is supplied toward the first variable ball-entry means when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the third distribution direction. Gaming machine.

According to the feature A21, when the game ball that enters the predetermined ball entry portion and flows down the predetermined passage portion flows into the first region, the first variable entry means is in the first state. In this case, the player who expects the first variable ball entry means to be in the first state will play the game while expecting the game ball that has entered the predetermined ball entry portion to flow into the first region. .. In this configuration, when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the first distribution direction, the game ball is supplied toward the specific ball entry portion, and the distribution direction by the distribution means is the second distribution direction. The game ball is supplied toward the predetermined ball entry portion, and when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the third distribution direction, the game ball is supplied toward the first variable ball entry means. As a result, by playing the game so that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the game balls are supplied to each of the specific ball entry section, the predetermined ball entry section, and the first variable ball entry means in a predetermined order. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature A22. Feature A21 characterized in that the game balls supplied to the distribution means after a predetermined number are distributed in the first distribution direction with respect to the game balls distributed in the third distribution direction by the distribution means. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature A22, the game balls supplied to the distribution means after a predetermined number are distributed in the first distribution direction with respect to the game balls distributed in the third distribution direction by the distribution means. It is possible to secure a period from when the game ball enters the variable ball entry means until the game ball is supplied to the specific entry portion.

Feature A23. When the distribution means is in a state of distributing the game ball in the third distribution direction, the third distribution direction is reached until the distribution means is in a state of distributing the game ball in the first distribution direction. It is a configuration in which a special number of game balls are distributed to
When the first variable ball entry means is in the first state triggered by the inflow of the game ball into the first region, the number of game balls that trigger the switching has entered the first variable ball entry means. A means for setting the first variable ball entry means to the second state (a function of executing the processes of steps S707 to S710 in the MPU 112) is provided.
The gaming machine according to feature A21 or A22, wherein the special number is equal to or larger than the number of switching triggers.

According to the feature A23, when the first variable ball entry means is in the first state, the game balls are supplied to the first variable ball entry means by the distribution means, and then the game balls are distributed. The distribution state of the means is a state in which the game ball is distributed toward the specific entry portion. Thereby, when the first variable ball entry means is in the first state, it is possible to supply the game ball to the specific ball entry portion after the first variable ball entry means is in the second state. Therefore, it is possible to generate a game ball into the specific ball entry portion in a situation where the first variable ball entry means is in the second state.

Feature A24. A first variable ball-entry means (first special figure winning device) provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which a game ball can be entered and a second state in which a game ball cannot or is difficult to enter. 33) and
A second variable ball-entry means (second special figure winning device) provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which a game ball can be entered and a second state in which a game ball cannot or is difficult to enter. 34) and
Equipped with
The first granting means causes the first variable ball-entry means to be in the first state when the game ball flows into the first region.
The gaming machine has a second granting means (step S804 in the MPU 112) that causes the second variable ball-entry means to be in the first state when the gaming ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the second region. , A function to execute the processing of step S805 and step S910).
The first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are provided side by side in the flow direction of the game ball in the aggregation region, and are located upstream of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means. When the provided variable ball entry means is in the second state, the game ball that has flowed into the aggregation region can flow down toward the variable ball entry means provided on the downstream side.
The third distribution direction is set as the distribution direction by the distribution means.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A12 to A23, wherein the gaming ball is supplied toward the aggregation region when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the third distribution direction.

According to the feature A24, if the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the first region, the first variable ball entry means is in the first state, and if the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the second region. The second variable ball entry means is in the first state. As a result, the type of the variable ball entry means that is in the first state differs depending on the guidance mode by the guidance means, and the player determines to which region the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion is guided. It is possible to increase the degree of attention of. In this configuration, when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the first distribution direction, the game ball is supplied toward the specific entry portion, and the distribution direction by the distribution means is the second distribution direction. When the game ball is supplied to the predetermined ball entry portion and the distribution direction by the distribution means is the third distribution direction, the aggregate area provided with the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means. A game ball is supplied toward. As a result, by performing the game so that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means, it is possible to supply the game balls to each of the specific ball entry section and the predetermined ball entry section in a predetermined order. At the same time, regardless of whether the game ball that has entered the predetermined ball entry portion is guided to either the first region or the second region, the game ball is supplied to the variable ball entry means corresponding to the guided region. It becomes possible to do.

In particular, the first variable entry means and the second variable entry means are provided side by side in the flow direction of the game ball in the aggregation region, and the upstream side of the first variable entry means and the second variable entry means. When the variable ball entry means provided in the above is in the second state, the game ball that has flowed into the aggregation region flows down toward the variable ball entry means provided on the downstream side. As a result, even if the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are not individually sorted by the distribution means, the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are used. It is possible to supply the game ball to the side of the means that is in the first state.

Feature A25. When a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the distribution state by the distribution means makes one round.
Based on the winning by at least a part of each game ball distributed by the distribution means by the time the distribution state makes one round, the specified number or more of the game balls can be given to the player or can be used by the player. The gaming machine according to any one of features A12 to A24, wherein a process for increasing the number of gaming balls by the specific number or more can be executed.

According to the feature A25, when a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the distribution state by the distribution means makes one round, so that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means. This makes it possible to repeatedly distribute the game balls in a certain manner. In this case, a specific number or more of game balls may be given to the player or used by the player based on the winning by at least a part of each game ball distributed by the distribution means by the time the distribution state makes one lap. A process for increasing the number of possible game balls by a specific number or more can be executed. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the game is performed so that the game balls are supplied toward the distribution means while the number of game balls that can be used by the player is not substantially reduced.

Feature A26. When each game ball distributed by the distribution means causes a ball to enter the specific entry portion and a ball to enter the predetermined entry portion by the time the distribution state makes one round, the distribution is performed. Based on the winning by at least a part of each game ball distributed by the distribution means by the time the state makes one lap, the specified number or more of the game balls are given to the player or the game balls that can be used by the player. The gaming machine according to feature A25, wherein a process for increasing the number by the specific number or more is executed.

According to the feature A26, when the game ball is supplied to the sorting means in a state where the ball entering the specific ball entry portion and the ball entering the predetermined ball entry portion can occur, the distribution state is one lap. Based on the winning by at least a part of each game ball distributed by the distribution means, a specific number or more of the game balls are given to the player or the number of game balls that can be used by the player is increased by the specific number or more. The process for making it is executed. As a result, when the game is performed so that the game ball is supplied to the distribution means in a state where the ball can enter the specific ball entry section and the predetermined ball entry section can occur, the player can play the game. It is possible to play a game while not substantially reducing the number of game balls that can be used.

Feature A27. A special case in which a game ball distributed by the distribution means enters when the game ball distributed by the distribution means does not enter the predetermined ball entry portion by the time the distribution state makes one round. Equipped with a ball entry section (special winning section 142)
Based on the fact that the corresponding number of game balls among the game balls distributed by the distribution means enter the special entry portion by the time the distribution state makes one round, the specific number or more of the game balls are played. The gaming machine according to feature A25 or A26, wherein a process for increasing the number of gaming balls given to a person or usable by a player is executed by the specific number or more.

According to the feature A27, even if the ball does not enter the predetermined entry portion, the game ball distributed by the distribution means enters the special entry portion. Then, based on the corresponding number of game balls entering the special ball entry portion, a specific number or more of game balls are given to the player, or the number of game balls that can be used by the player is increased by a specific number or more. Processing is executed. As a result, when the game is played so that the game ball is supplied to the distribution means even when the ball does not enter the predetermined ball entry portion, the number of game balls that can be used by the player is substantially reduced. It is possible to play a game while not reducing the number.

Feature A28. A special ball-entry section (special winning section 142) is provided, in which a game ball that is sorted in the second distribution direction by the sorting means but does not enter the predetermined ball-filling section is inserted.
Processing for increasing the number of game balls that can be given to the player or that can be used by the player based on the fact that the game balls have entered the special ball entry portion. The gaming machine according to feature A25 or A26, wherein

According to the feature A28, the game ball distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means enters the special entry portion even if it does not enter the predetermined entry portion. Then, based on the fact that the game balls have entered the special ball entry portion, a process for granting a specific number or more of the game balls to the player or increasing the number of game balls that can be used by the player by a specific number or more is performed. Will be executed. As a result, when the game is played so that the game ball is supplied to the distribution means even when the ball does not enter the predetermined ball entry portion, the number of game balls that can be used by the player is substantially reduced. It is possible to play a game while not reducing the number.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features A1 to A28, any one or a plurality of the features A1 to A28, the features B1 to B34, the features C1 to C16, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, and the features F1 to F6 are configured. May be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the above-mentioned feature A group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is common to have an effect for making the player predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a lottery is performed based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry section provided in the game area, a variable display of the pattern is performed on the display device, and the winning result is obtained by the lottery. In the case of, it is known that the player shifts to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. A specific entry section (through winning section 36) where a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
A special entry section (branch entrance 61 in the first to third embodiments, second special figure winning device 34 in the fourth to fifth embodiments) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area.
Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the specific entry section, the first state in which the game ball can enter the special entry section and the second state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to enter. Switching control means (function to execute processing during fluctuation of normal map and processing during normal operation in MPU 112) and
In a gaming machine equipped with
In the game area, the supplied game ball is placed on the upstream side of the specific ball entry section and the special ball entry section in any one of a plurality of types of distribution directions including the first distribution direction and the second distribution direction. Distribution means for sequentially changing the distribution direction when the game ball is supplied (in the first embodiment, the first distribution mechanism 71, the second distribution mechanism 72, and the fourth). In the embodiment, the first distribution mechanism 71 is provided, and in the fifth embodiment, the third distribution mechanism 161 and the fourth distribution mechanism 162) are provided.
When the distribution direction by the distribution means is the first distribution direction, the game ball is supplied toward the specific ball entry portion, and the distribution direction by the distribution means is the second distribution direction. A gaming machine characterized in that a gaming ball is supplied toward the special ball entry portion in some cases.

According to the feature B1, the special ball entry section is in the first state, provided that the game ball has entered the specific ball entry section at least one condition. As a result, the player who expects the game ball to enter the special entry section will also pay attention to whether or not the game ball enters the specific entry section.

In this case, a distribution means for sequentially changing the distribution direction is provided on the upstream side of the specific entry section and the special entry section when the game ball is supplied, and the distribution means is used for distribution. When the direction is the first distribution direction, the game ball is supplied toward the specific entry section, and when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the second distribution direction, the game ball is directed to the special entry section. Is supplied. This makes it possible to supply the game ball to the specific entry section by playing the game so that the game ball is supplied to the distribution means, and also to the special entry section. It becomes possible to supply game balls. Further, by appropriately designing the configuration of the distribution means, the frequency at which the game ball is supplied to the specific entry section and the frequency at which the game ball is supplied to the special entry section are desired by the designer. It can be a frequency. Furthermore, it is possible to supply the game ball to the special ball entry section after a predetermined period of time has passed since the game ball was supplied to the specific ball entry section, and the game ball enters the specific ball entry section. When the special entry section is in the first state, it is possible to ensure that the game ball is supplied to the special entry section in the first state, provided that the above is at least one condition. ..

Feature B2. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein when a specific number of gaming balls are supplied to the sorting means, the sorting state by the sorting means makes one round.

According to the feature B2, when a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the distribution state by the distribution means makes one round, so that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means. This makes it possible to repeatedly distribute the game balls in a certain manner.

Feature B3. Only the game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means can enter the specific ball entry portion, and only the game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means. The gaming machine according to the feature B1 or B2, wherein the ball can enter the special ball entry portion.

According to the feature B3, only the game balls distributed by the distribution means can enter the specific entry section and the special entry section. This facilitates the design of the frequency of ball entry into the specific ball entry section and the special ball entry section to a desired frequency.

Feature B4. Features B1 to feature B1 to feature B1 to feature B1 to feature that the game balls supplied to the distribution means after a predetermined number are distributed in the second distribution direction with respect to the game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means. The gaming machine according to any one of B3.

According to the feature B4, the game balls supplied by the distribution means after a predetermined number are distributed in the second distribution direction with respect to the game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means. It is possible to secure a period from when the game ball enters the section to when the game ball is supplied to the special entry section. As a result, when the special entry section is in the first state on the condition that the game ball has entered the specific entry section, the game ball is placed in the special entry section that is in the first state. In the case of ensuring that the ball is reliably supplied, it is possible to secure a period until the special ball entry section is in the first state when the game ball enters the specific entry section.

Feature B5. The gaming machine according to feature B4, wherein the predetermined number is two or more.

According to the feature B5, it is possible to secure a certain long period from the time when the game ball enters the specific entry portion to the time when the game ball is supplied to the special entry portion. As a result, when the special entry section is in the first state on the condition that the game ball has entered the specific entry section, the game ball is placed in the special entry section that is in the first state. In the case of ensuring that the supply is ensured, it is possible to secure a certain long period as the period until the special entry section is put into the first state when the game ball enters the specific entry section. Become.

Feature B6. Before the distribution means changes from the state of distributing the game ball in the first distribution direction to the state of distributing the game ball in the second distribution direction, what are the first distribution direction and the second distribution direction? The gaming machine according to feature B4 or B5, wherein the gaming balls are distributed in different distribution directions.

According to feature B6, the special entry section is used after the game ball enters the specific entry section by using the period during which the game ball is distributed to a side different from the specific entry section and the special entry section. It is possible to secure a certain long period as the period until the game ball is supplied to.

Feature B7. An operation executing means (normal figure display unit 46) for executing a pre-switching operation based on the fact that a game ball has entered the specific ball entry unit is provided.
When the switching control is executed, the switching control means has a configuration in which the switching control is started when the pre-switching operation started based on the ball entering the specific ball entering portion is completed. The gaming machine according to any one of features B4 to B6, characterized in that it is present.

According to the feature B7, when the game ball enters the specific entry portion, the pre-switching operation is executed by the operation executing means, and when the pre-switching operation is completed, the special entry portion is in the first state. .. This makes it possible for the player to recognize in advance that the special ball entry portion may be in the first state from now on. In addition, the manager of the game hall can grasp whether or not the transition to the first state of the special entry portion is normal by confirming whether or not the operation before switching is executed. In this case, by providing the configuration of any one of the above features B4 to B6, the period from when the game ball enters the specific entry section to when the game ball is supplied to the special entry section. A certain period of time is secured. As a result, when the special entry section is in the first state on the condition that the game ball has entered the specific entry section, the game ball is placed in the special entry section that is in the first state. In the case of ensuring the supply, it is possible to secure a period in which the pre-switching operation is executed in the operation executing means before the special ball entry portion is in the first state.

Feature B8. In a predetermined gaming state (first high-probability state or second high-probability state in the first to third embodiments, high-frequency support mode in the fourth to fifth embodiments), the shortest distribution means is used. When the game ball is supplied in the supply cycle, the switching is performed over a specific period equal to or less than the period required from the supply of the game ball to the specific entry section to the supply of the game ball to the special entry section. Means for causing the operation executing means to perform the previous operation (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S407 and S408 in the MPU 112, and in the second embodiment, the processes of steps S1211 and S1212 in the MPU 112 are executed. The gaming machine according to feature B7, which comprises a function (a function of executing the process of step S1505 in the MPU 112 in the fourth embodiment).

According to the feature B8, when the game ball distributed by the distribution means enters the specific entry section, the game ball distributed to the special entry section by the distribution means is the special entry section. It is possible to make the special ball entry portion in the first state before reaching.

Feature B9. In a gaming state different from the predetermined gaming state, even when the gaming ball is supplied to the distribution means in the shortest supply cycle, the special ball entry portion is set to the first state and then the second state. The gaming machine according to feature B8, wherein the gaming ball is supplied to the special ball entry portion after a period until the state is returned to the state.

According to the feature B9, even if the special entry portion may be in the first state in a gaming state different from the predetermined gaming state, it is substantially impossible for the game ball to enter the special entry portion. This makes it possible to enhance the advantage of the predetermined gaming state.

Feature B10. A predetermined passage portion (branch passage 65) through which a game ball that has entered the special entry portion flows down, and a predetermined passage portion (branch passage 65).
The game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion is guided to any one of a plurality of regions including the first region (downstream side of the first out-licensing region 65c) and the second region (second out-licensing region 65d). Guidance means (switching piece 67) and
A first granting means (a function of executing the processes of step S704, step S705, and step S908 in the MPU 112) to grant the privilege or a privilege different from the privilege when the game ball flows into the first region. When,
Equipped with
The first situation in which the special entry section is in the first state is the first situation in which the game ball that has entered the special entry section is guided to the first region, and the game in which the special entry section is entered. There is a second situation in which the sphere is guided to the second region.
When the gaming state is the first gaming state (first high probability state), the first situation or the first situation is reached in a situation where the gaming ball can enter the special entry portion. The configuration is such that the probability is higher than the probability of the second situation.
When the gaming state is the second gaming state (second high probability state), the second situation or the second situation is reached in the situation where the gaming ball can enter the special entry portion. The configuration is such that the probability is higher than the probability of the first situation.
In the first situation, when the game balls are supplied to the distribution means in a predetermined supply cycle, the predetermined number of game balls are distributed to the first distribution direction by the distribution means. A game ball that was later supplied to the distribution means and entered the special entry portion is guided to the first region.
In the second situation, when the game balls are supplied to the distribution means in the predetermined supply cycle, the predetermined game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means. The description according to any one of the features B4 to B9, wherein the gaming balls supplied to the sorting means after the number of the pachinko machines and have entered the special entry portion are guided to the second region. Pachinko machine.

According to the feature B10, in the first situation, the game ball that has entered the special entry section is guided to the first region, and in the first game state, the game ball can enter the special entry section. In such a situation, it becomes the first situation or tends to be the first situation. Further, in the second situation, the game ball that has entered the special entry section is guided to the second region, and in the second game state, the game ball can enter the special entry section. Is in the second situation or is likely to be in the second situation. As a result, the game ball is likely to flow into the first region in the situation where the special entry portion is in the first state, and the game ball is in the second region in the situation where the special entry portion is in the first state. It is possible to create a state in which is easy to flow in.

In this case, when the game balls are supplied to the distribution means in a predetermined supply cycle, in the first situation, the distribution means is used after a predetermined number of the game balls supplied to the specific entry portion. The supplied game balls enter the special entry section and are supplied to the first region, and in the second situation, they are supplied to the distribution means after a predetermined number of game balls supplied to the specific entry section. The game ball enters the special entry section and is supplied to the second region. As a result, the game ball is supplied to the first region in the first situation and the game ball is supplied to the second region in the second situation, while the operation mode of the distribution means is a common mode. It will be possible. Further, while the number of game balls required from the time when the game ball is supplied to the specific entry part to the time when the game ball is supplied to the special entry part is set to a common number, in the first situation, the game is played in the first area. The ball is supplied, and in the second situation, the game ball can be supplied to the second region.

Feature B11. When the timing at which the switching control is started is used as a reference, in the first period, the game ball is guided to the first region, and in the second period, the game ball is guided to the second region. It is provided with a guidance control means (a function of executing the processes of step S510, step S511, and steps S612 to S614 in the MPU 112) that controls the guidance means so as to be in a state.
In the first situation, when the game balls are supplied to the distribution means in the predetermined supply cycle, the predetermined game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means. The switching so that the first period occurs when the game balls supplied to the distribution means after the number of pieces and have entered the special entry portion pass through the guidance position by the guidance means. The control start timing is set,
In the second situation, when the game balls are supplied to the distribution means in the predetermined supply cycle, the predetermined game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means. The switching so that the second period occurs when the gaming balls supplied to the distribution means after the number of the pachinko machines and have entered the special entry portion pass through the guidance position by the guiding means. The gaming machine according to feature B10, wherein the control start timing is set.

According to the feature B11, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as described in the above feature B10 only by adjusting the start timing of the switching control of the special ball entry portion corresponding to each of the first situation and the second situation. It will be possible.

Feature B12. An operation executing means (normal figure display unit 46) for executing a pre-switching operation based on the fact that a game ball has entered the specific ball entry unit is provided.
When the switching control is executed, the switching control means is configured to start the switching control when the pre-switching operation started based on the entry of the game ball into the specific entry portion is completed. can be,
In the first situation, the gaming machine causes the operation executing means to perform the pre-switching operation for a period corresponding to the first situation, and in the second situation, during a period corresponding to the second situation. An operation control means for causing the operation execution means to perform the pre-switching operation (a function of executing the processes of steps S407 and S408 in the MPU 112 in the first embodiment, and steps S1211 and steps in the MPU 112 in the second embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature B11, which is characterized by having a function of executing the process of S1212).

According to the feature B12, the excellent effect as described in the above feature B10 can be obtained only by adjusting the period during which the pre-switching operation is executed in the operation executing means corresponding to each of the first situation and the second situation. Is possible.

Feature B13. A first variable ball-entry means (first special figure winning device) provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which a game ball can be entered and a second state in which a game ball cannot or is difficult to enter. 33) and
Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special ball entry portion, the means for causing the first variable ball entry means to be in the first state (processes of step S704, step S705 and step S908 in the MPU 112 are executed. Function to do) and
Equipped with
The third distribution direction is set as the distribution direction by the distribution means.
The description according to any one of the features B1 to B12, wherein the game ball is supplied toward the first variable ball-entry means when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the third distribution direction. Gaming machine.

According to the feature B13, the first variable ball entry means is in the first state based on the game ball entering the special ball entry portion. In this case, the player who expects the first variable ball entry means to be in the first state will play the game while expecting the game ball to enter the special ball entry section. In this configuration, when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the first distribution direction, the game ball is supplied toward the specific entry portion, and the distribution direction by the distribution means is the second distribution direction. The game ball is supplied to the special ball entry unit, and the game ball is supplied to the first variable ball entry means when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the third distribution direction. As a result, by performing the game so that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the game balls are supplied to each of the specific entry section, the special entry section, and the first variable entry means in a predetermined order. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature B14. Feature B13 characterized in that the game balls supplied to the distribution means after a predetermined number are distributed in the first distribution direction with respect to the game balls distributed in the third distribution direction by the distribution means. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature B14, the game balls supplied to the distribution means after a predetermined number are distributed in the first distribution direction with respect to the game balls distributed in the third distribution direction by the distribution means. It is possible to secure a period from when the game ball enters the variable ball entry means until the game ball is supplied to the specific entry portion.

Feature B15. When the distribution means is in a state of distributing the game ball in the third distribution direction, the third distribution direction is reached until the distribution means is in a state of distributing the game ball in the first distribution direction. It is a configuration in which a special number of game balls are distributed to
When the first variable ball entry means is in the first state, the first variable ball entry means is transferred to the second variable ball entry means based on the fact that the number of game balls that trigger the switching has entered the first variable ball entry means. It is provided with a means for setting a state (a function of executing the processes of steps S707 to S710 in the MPU 112).
The gaming machine according to feature B13 or B14, wherein the special number is equal to or larger than the number of switching triggers.

According to the feature B15, when the first variable ball entry means is in the first state, the game balls are supplied to the first variable ball entry means by the distribution means, and then the game balls are distributed. The distribution state of the means is a state in which the game ball is distributed toward the specific entry portion. Thereby, when the first variable ball entry means is in the first state, it is possible to supply the game ball to the specific ball entry portion after the first variable ball entry means is in the second state. Therefore, it is possible to allow the game ball to enter the specific entry portion in the situation where the first variable entry means is in the second state.

Feature B16. A predetermined passage portion (branch passage 65) through which a game ball that has entered the special entry portion flows down, and a predetermined passage portion (branch passage 65).
The game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion is guided to any one of a plurality of regions including the first region (downstream side of the first out-licensing region 65c) and the second region (second out-licensing region 65d). Guidance means (switching piece 67) and
A first variable ball-entry means (first special figure winning device) provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which a game ball can be entered and a second state in which a game ball cannot or is difficult to enter. 33) and
A second variable ball-entry means (second special figure winning device) provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which a game ball can be entered and a second state in which a game ball cannot or is difficult to enter. 34) and
A function of executing the processes of step S704, step S705, and step S908 in the MPU 112 to make the first variable ball entry means into the first state when the game ball flows into the first region. )When,
A function of executing the processes of step S804, step S805 and step S910 in the MPU 112 to make the second variable ball entry means into the first state when the game ball flows into the second region. )When,
Equipped with
The first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are provided side by side in the flow direction of the game ball in the aggregation region, and are located upstream of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means. When the provided variable ball entry means is in the second state, the game ball that has flowed into the aggregation region can flow down toward the variable ball entry means provided on the downstream side.
The third distribution direction is set as the distribution direction by the distribution means.
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B15, wherein the gaming ball is supplied toward the aggregation region when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the third distribution direction.

According to the feature B16, if the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the first region, the first variable ball entry means is in the first state, and if the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the second region. The second variable ball entry means is in the first state. As a result, the type of the variable ball entry means that is in the first state differs depending on the guidance mode by the guidance means, and the player determines to which region the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion is guided. It is possible to increase the degree of attention of. In this configuration, when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the first distribution direction, the game ball is supplied toward the specific entry portion, and the distribution direction by the distribution means is the second distribution direction. When the game ball is supplied to the special ball entry unit and the distribution direction by the distribution means is the third distribution direction, the aggregate area provided with the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means. A game ball is supplied toward. As a result, by performing the game so that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means, it is possible to supply the game balls to each of the specific entry section and the special entry section in a predetermined order. At the same time, regardless of whether the game ball that has entered the special ball entry portion is guided to either the first region or the second region, the game ball is supplied to the variable ball entry means corresponding to the guided region. It becomes possible to do.

In particular, the first variable entry means and the second variable entry means are provided side by side in the flow direction of the game ball in the aggregation region, and the upstream side of the first variable entry means and the second variable entry means. When the variable ball entry means provided in the above is in the second state, the game ball that has flowed into the aggregation region flows down toward the variable ball entry means provided on the downstream side. As a result, even if the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are not individually sorted by the distribution means, the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are used. It is possible to supply the game ball to the side of the means that is in the first state.

Feature B17. Feature B1 characterized in that the game balls supplied to the distribution means after a specific number are distributed in the first distribution direction with respect to the game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means. The gaming machine according to any one of B16.

According to the feature B17, the game balls supplied to the distribution means after a specific number are distributed in the first distribution direction with respect to the game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means, thereby specially entering. It is possible to secure a period from when the game ball enters the ball means to when the game ball is supplied to the specific entry portion.

Feature B18. When the distribution means is in a state of distributing the game ball in the second distribution direction, the second distribution direction is reached until the distribution means is in a state of distributing the game ball in the first distribution direction. It is a configuration in which a specific number of game balls are distributed to
When the special entry portion is in the first state, the means (MPU112) for setting the special entry portion to the second state based on the fact that a predetermined number of game balls have entered the special entry portion. (Function to execute the process of step S1701 and step S1703) in
The gaming machine according to feature B17, wherein the specific number is equal to or larger than the predetermined number.

According to the feature B18, when the special entry portion is in the first state, the distribution means is supplied with a predetermined number of game balls to the special entry portion by the distribution means, and then the distribution means is distributed. The state is a state in which the game ball is distributed toward the specific entry portion. As a result, when the special entry section is in the first state, it is possible to supply the game ball to the specific entry section after the special entry section is in the second state, and the special entry section can be supplied. In the situation where the ball portion is in the second state, it is possible to generate the entry of the game ball into the specific entry portion.

Feature B19. The period required for the game ball distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means to reach a position where the ball can enter the specific entry portion from a predetermined height position is the distribution. The swing is longer than the period required for the gaming ball distributed in the second distribution direction by means to reach a position where the ball can enter the special ball entry portion from the predetermined height position. The gaming machine according to feature B17 or B18, wherein a passage configuration from the distribution means to the specific entry portion and a passage configuration from the distribution means to the special entry portion are set.

According to the feature B19, the period required for the game ball distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means to reach the position where the ball can enter the specific entry portion from the predetermined height position is longer. Because the game ball distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means is set longer than the period required to reach the position where the ball can enter the special entry portion from the predetermined height position. It is possible to secure a long period of time from when the game ball enters the special entry section until the game ball reaches the specific entry section. As a result, when the special entry section is in the first state, the game ball is supplied to the specific entry section after the special entry section is in the second state based on the entry into the special entry section. It becomes possible to generate a game ball into a specific ball entry section in a situation where the special entry section is in the second state. Further, since the above-mentioned entry period is set by the passage configuration from the distribution means to the specific entry portion and the passage configuration from the distribution means to the special entry portion, the game ball by the distribution means can be used. It is possible to produce the above-mentioned effects while keeping the distribution mode constant.

Feature B20. A specific guide passage portion (fourth guide rail 156) for guiding the game ball distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means to the specific entry portion, and
A predetermined guide passage portion (second guide rail 153) for guiding the game ball distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means to the special entry portion, and
Equipped with
The passage length dimension from the predetermined height position in the specific guide passage portion to the specific ball entry portion is larger than the passage length dimension from the predetermined height position to the special entry portion in the predetermined guide passage portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features B17 to B19, which is characterized in that it is set to a large size.

According to the feature B20, the passage length dimension from the predetermined height position in the specific guide passage portion to the specific entry portion is larger than the passage length dimension from the predetermined height position in the predetermined guide passage portion to the special entry portion. By setting, the period required for the game ball distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means to reach the position where the ball can enter the specific entry portion from the predetermined height position is allocated. It is possible to make the period required for the game ball distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means to reach a position where the ball can enter the special entry portion from a predetermined height position. As a result, when the special entry section is in the first state, the game ball is supplied to the specific entry section after the special entry section is in the second state based on the entry into the special entry section. It becomes possible to generate a game ball into a specific ball entry section in a situation where the special entry section is in the second state. Further, according to this configuration, it is possible to produce the above-mentioned effects only by adjusting the passage length dimension of the specific guide passage portion and the predetermined guide passage portion.

Feature B21. The gaming machine according to feature B19 or B20, wherein the specific number is one.

According to the feature B21, the game ball supplied to the distribution means is supplied to the specific ball entry section with respect to the game ball supplied to the special entry section. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary game balls from being generated from the time when the game ball is supplied to the special ball entry section to the time when the game ball is supplied to the specific ball entry section. In this case, by providing the configuration of the above-mentioned feature B19 or B20, the game ball distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means can enter the specific entry portion from a predetermined height position. The period required to reach the position is the period required for the game ball distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means to reach the position where the ball can enter the special entry portion from the predetermined height position. Can be longer than.

Feature B22. The second distribution direction is a direction vertically downward from the distribution means.
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B21, wherein the first distribution direction is a direction from the distribution means toward a side different from the vertically downward direction.

According to the feature B22, since the special entry section is provided at the position where the game ball distributed vertically downward by the distribution means is supplied, the entry is triggered by the entry into the specific entry section. It is possible to smoothly supply the game ball to the special plumb bob that is possible. As a result, even though the special entry section is in the first state due to the entry into the specific entry section, the movement of the game ball distributed toward the special entry section by the distribution means is in the middle. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event such that the special entry portion is in the second state before the entry into the special entry portion occurs.

Feature B23. An acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S1101 in the MPU 112) for acquiring predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special entry portion, and
The game rotation control means (step S1006 in the MPU 112) that controls the game rotation execution means (second special figure display unit 45b) so that the game rotation operation is executed based on the acquisition of the predetermined information by the acquisition means. -Function to execute the process of step S1008) and
Equipped with
The game times control means is
The first operation period (fixed short period) shorter than the shortest ball entry cycle when the game ball enters the special ball entry portion is executed so that the game rotation operation is executed. 1 Control means (function to execute the process of step S1905 in MPU 112) and
A second control means (a function of executing the process of step S1906 in the MPU 112) for executing the game rotation operation over a second operation period (fixed long period) equal to or longer than the shortest ball entry cycle.
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B22.

According to the feature B23, in the situation where the game rotation operation is executed over the first operation period, the period is shorter than the shortest ball entry cycle when the game ball enters the special entry section. Since the game rotation operation is completed, it is difficult for the event that the predetermined information is not acquired even though the game ball has entered the special ball entry portion. On the other hand, in the situation where the game rotation operation is executed over the second operation period, the game rotation is performed over a period equal to or longer than the shortest ball entry cycle when the game ball enters the special entry section. Since the operation continues, it is possible to create a situation in which the player pays attention to the game rotation operation.

Feature B24. The gaming machine according to feature B23, wherein the first operation period is only one type.

According to the feature B24, since the first operation period is only one type, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity for storing the operation period.

Feature B25. A predetermined information storage means (second special figure holding area 134) that stores the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number, and
When the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means, the grant determination means (step S1103 and step S in MPU 112) for executing the grant determination as to whether or not the predetermined information is the grant correspondence information corresponding to the grant of the privilege. Function to execute the processing of S1105) and
Equipped with
The game rotation control means is intended to execute the game rotation operation when the grant determination is executed by the grant determination means.
The first control means does not correspond to the given correspondence information in a situation where the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means separately from the predetermined information that triggers the execution of the game rotation operation. The gaming machine according to feature B23 or B24, wherein when the gaming rotation operation triggered by information is executed, the gaming rotation operation is executed over the first operation period. ..

According to the feature B25, in a situation where a plurality of predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means, when the game rounding operation is executed by the predetermined information that does not correspond to the assigned correspondence information, the special ball entry is performed. The game rotation operation is executed in a period shorter than the shortest ball entry cycle when the game ball enters the section. As a result, the possibility that a game ball is newly entered into the special entry portion is reduced even though a predetermined number of predetermined information is already stored in the predetermined information storage means. Therefore, it is difficult for the event that the predetermined information is not acquired even though the game ball has entered the special ball entry portion.

Feature B26. A predetermined information storage means (second special figure holding area 134) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number is provided.
The game rotation control means is intended to execute the game rotation operation when the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means.
The gaming machine according to any one of features B23 to B25, wherein the second operation period is a period equal to or greater than the product of the shortest ball entry cycle and the predetermined number.

According to the feature B26, when the game rotation operation is executed over the second operation period, a predetermined number of predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means in the situation where the game rotation operation is executed. It becomes possible to do so. This makes it possible to create a situation in which a predetermined number of predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means.

Feature B27. The second operation period is a period equal to or greater than the product of the shortest ball entry cycle and the predetermined number, and a period less than the product of the shortest ball entry cycle and the number obtained by adding 1 to the predetermined number. The gaming machine according to the feature B26.

According to the feature B27, when another predetermined information is not stored in the predetermined information storage means and the game rotation operation is executed over the second operation period with the predetermined information as an execution trigger, the game rotation is performed. While it is possible to store a predetermined number of predetermined information in the predetermined information storage means in the situation where the operation is being executed, the special entry section is in the situation where the game rotation operation is being executed. It is possible to prevent a larger number of game balls from entering than a predetermined number.

Feature B28. When the second control means executes the game rotation operation in a situation where the predetermined information is not stored in the predetermined information storage means separately from the predetermined information that triggers the execution of the game rotation operation. The gaming machine according to feature B26 or B27, wherein the gaming rotation operation is executed over the second operation period.

According to the feature B28, when the game rotation operation is executed by the predetermined information as an execution trigger in the situation where another predetermined information is not stored in the predetermined information storage means, the game rotation operation is the shortest entry ball. It is executed over a second operation period, which is a period equal to or greater than the product of the period and a predetermined number. As a result, when the predetermined information storage means does not store the predetermined information that is not the execution target of the game rotation operation, the predetermined information storage means stores the predetermined number of predetermined information. It becomes possible to do.

Feature B29. A predetermined information storage means (second special figure holding area 134) that stores the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number, and
When the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means, the grant determination means (step S1103 and step S in MPU 112) for executing the grant determination as to whether or not the predetermined information is the grant correspondence information corresponding to the grant of the privilege. Function to execute the processing of S1105) and
Equipped with
The game rotation control means is intended to execute the game rotation operation when the grant determination is executed by the grant determination means.
The predetermined control means does not correspond to the given correspondence information in a situation where the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means separately from the predetermined information that triggers the execution of the game rotation operation. When the game rounding operation is executed by using the information as an execution trigger, the game rounding operation is executed over the first operation period.
When the second control means executes the game rotation operation in a situation where the predetermined information is not stored in the predetermined information storage means separately from the predetermined information that triggers the execution of the game rotation operation. The game rounding operation is executed over the second operation period.
When the game ball is supplied to the distribution means in the shortest supply cycle in the predetermined game state, and the game rotation operation triggered by the predetermined information that does not correspond to the given correspondence information is repeatedly executed. Until the game rotation operation is executed a predetermined number of times, the game rotation operation according to the first operation period is executed, and in the next execution time, the game rotation operation according to the second operation period is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features B23 to B28, wherein the first operation period and the second operation period are set.

According to the feature B29, the game ball is supplied to the distribution means in the shortest supply cycle in the predetermined game state, and the game rotation operation triggered by the predetermined information that does not correspond to the assigned correspondence information is repeatedly executed. In this case, the situation in which the game rotation operation in the first operation period is executed a predetermined number of times and then the game rotation operation in the second operation period is executed once repeatedly occurs. As a result, in a configuration in which the execution efficiency of the game rounding operation is improved in order to prevent the situation where the predetermined information is not acquired even though the ball has entered the special ball entry section, the game rounding operation is performed. It is possible to periodically generate a situation in which is executed over a certain long period of time, and it is possible to make the execution mode of the effect preferable accordingly.

Feature B30. It is provided with means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2105 to S2110 in the MPU 123) to execute a predetermined effect when the gaming rotation operation is executed over the second operation period. The gaming machine according to the feature B29.

According to the feature B30, in a configuration in which the execution efficiency of the game rounding operation is improved in order to prevent the situation that the predetermined information is not acquired even though the ball has entered the special ball entry portion, the periodical operation is performed. It is possible to execute a predetermined effect.

Feature B31. When a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the distribution state by the distribution means makes one round.
Based on the winning by at least a part of each game ball distributed by the distribution means by the time the distribution state makes one round, the specified number or more of the game balls can be given to the player or can be used by the player. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B30, wherein a process for increasing the number of gaming balls by the specific number or more can be executed.

According to the feature B31, when a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the distribution state by the distribution means makes one round, so that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means. This makes it possible to repeatedly distribute the game balls in a certain manner. In this case, a specific number or more of game balls may be given to the player or used by the player based on the winning by at least a part of each game ball distributed by the distribution means by the time the distribution state makes one lap. A process for increasing the number of possible game balls by a specific number or more can be executed. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the game is performed so that the game balls are supplied toward the distribution means while the number of game balls that can be used by the player is not substantially reduced.

Feature B32. When each game ball distributed by the distribution means causes a ball to enter the special entry portion by the time the distribution state makes one round, the distribution means is used by the time the distribution state makes one round. Processing for increasing the number of game balls that can be given to the player or that can be used by the player based on the winning of at least a part of each game ball distributed by The gaming machine according to feature B31, characterized in that

According to the feature B32, when the game ball is supplied to the distribution means in a state where the ball can enter the special ball entry portion, the game balls are distributed by the distribution means by the time the distribution state makes one round. Based on the winning of at least a part of each game ball, a process for granting a specific number or more of the game balls to the player or increasing the number of game balls that can be used by the player is executed. As a result, when the game is played so that the game ball is supplied to the distribution means in a state where the ball can enter the special ball entry portion, the number of game balls that can be used by the player is substantially reduced. It is possible to play the game while not reducing it.

Feature B33. A special case in which a game ball distributed by the distribution means enters the special ball when the game ball distributed by the distribution means does not enter the special ball entry portion by the time the distribution state makes one round. Equipped with a ball entry section (special winning section 142)
Based on the fact that the corresponding number of game balls among the game balls distributed by the distribution means enter the special entry portion by the time the distribution state makes one round, the specific number or more of the game balls are played. The gaming machine according to feature B31 or B32, wherein a process for increasing the number of gaming balls given to a person or usable by a player is executed by the specific number or more.

According to the feature B33, even if the ball does not enter the special entry section, the game ball distributed by the distribution means enters the special entry section. Then, based on the corresponding number of game balls entering the special ball entry portion, a specific number or more of game balls are given to the player, or the number of game balls that can be used by the player is increased by a specific number or more. Processing is executed. As a result, even if the ball does not enter the special ball entry section, if the game is played so that the game ball is supplied to the distribution means, the number of game balls that can be used by the player is substantially reduced. It is possible to play a game while not reducing the number.

Feature B34. It is provided with a special entry section (special winning section 142) in which a game ball that is distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means but does not enter the special entry section is entered.
Processing for increasing the number of gaming balls that can be given to the player or that can be used by the player based on the fact that the gaming balls have entered the special entry portion. The gaming machine according to feature B31 or B32, wherein

According to the feature B34, the game ball distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means enters the special entry section even if it does not enter the special entry section. Then, based on the fact that the game balls have entered the special ball entry portion, a process for granting a specific number or more of the game balls to the player or increasing the number of game balls that can be used by the player by a specific number or more is performed. Will be executed. As a result, even if the ball does not enter the special ball entry section, if the game is played so that the game ball is supplied to the distribution means, the number of game balls that can be used by the player is substantially reduced. It is possible to play a game while not reducing the number.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features B1 to B34, any one or a plurality of the features A1 to A28, the features B1 to B34, the features C1 to C16, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, and the features F1 to F6 are configured. May be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the above-mentioned feature B group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is common to have an effect for making the player predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a lottery is performed based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry section provided in the game area, a variable display of the pattern is performed on the display device, and the winning result is obtained by the lottery. In the case of, it is known that the player shifts to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to make the flow mode of the gaming ball in the gaming area preferable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic C group>
Features C1. The first variable provided so as to be switchable between the first state in which the game ball flowing down the game area (game area PA) is possible and the second state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to enter. Ball entry means (1st special figure winning device 33) and
A second variable ball entry means (first) that can be switched between the first state in which the game ball flowing down the game area can be entered and the second state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to enter. 2 Special figure winning device 34) and
The lottery process is executed based on the occurrence of the game ball entering the first variable ball entry means, and the lottery process is performed based on the occurrence of the game ball entry into the second variable ball entry means. Is executed, and a lottery process executed based on the entry of a game ball into the first variable entry means and a lottery executed based on the entry of a game ball into the second variable entry means. A lottery execution means (a function of executing the processes of step S1001, step S1102, and step S1103 in the MPU 112) in which the execution mode of the lottery process differs depending on the process.
A predetermined entry portion (branch entrance 61) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and
A predetermined passage portion (branch passage 65) through which a game ball that has entered the predetermined entry portion flows down, and a predetermined passage portion (branch passage 65).
The game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion is guided to any one of a plurality of regions including the first region (downstream side of the first out-licensing region 65c) and the second region (second out-licensing region 65d). Guidance means (switching piece 67) and
When the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the first region, the first variable ball-entry means is brought into the first state (step S704, step S705 and step in MPU 112). Function to execute the processing of S908) and
A second granting means (step S804, step S805 and step in the MPU 112) that causes the second variable ball entry means to be in the first state when the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the second region. Function to execute the processing of S910) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature C1, the lottery process is executed based on the fact that the game ball enters the first variable ball entry means, and the lottery process is executed based on the game ball entering the second variable ball entry means. Will be executed. The execution mode of the lottery process is different between the former lottery process and the latter lottery process. As a result, it is possible to diversify the execution trigger of the lottery process, and it is also possible to diversify the execution mode of the lottery process in accordance with the execution trigger of the lottery process.

In this case, if the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the first region, the first variable ball entry means is in the first state, and if the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the second region, the second variable ball entering means is in the first state. The variable ball entry means is in the first state. As a result, the type of the variable ball entry means that is in the first state differs depending on the guidance mode by the guidance means, and the player determines to which region the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion is guided. It is possible to increase the degree of attention of.

Feature C2. When the lottery process is executed based on the occurrence of the entry of the game ball into the second variable entry means, the entry of the game ball into the first variable entry means has occurred. The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized in that it is more advantageous for the player than when the lottery process is executed based on the above.

According to the feature C2, it is more advantageous for the player that the game ball enters the second variable entry means than the game ball enters the first variable entry means. As a result, when the game ball enters the predetermined entry portion, the player expects the game ball to be guided to the second region, and the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion is in any region. It is possible to increase the player's attention to whether or not they are guided.

Feature C3. When the gaming state is the first gaming state (first high probability state), the probability that the gaming ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the first region or flows into the first region is the first region. Is a configuration that is higher than the probability of flowing into different areas,
When the gaming state is the second gaming state (second high probability state), the probability that the gaming ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the second region or flows into the second region is in the first region. The gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, which is characterized in that it has a configuration higher than the probability of inflow.

According to the feature C3, in the first gaming state, the probability that the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the first region or the first region is high, while in the second gaming state, the predetermined passage portion is The probability that the flowing game ball will flow into the second region or the second region will increase. As a result, the lottery process triggered by the game ball entering the first variable ball entry means is easily executed, and the lottery process triggered by the game ball entering the second variable ball entry means. It is possible to create a state in which is easy to execute.

Feature C4. Switching control means (variation in MPU 112) for switching and controlling the predetermined ball entry portion between the first state in which the game ball can enter and the second state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to enter. Equipped with a function to execute intermediate processing and processing during normal operation)
The situation in which the predetermined ball entry portion is in the first state is the first situation in which the game ball that has entered the predetermined ball entry section is guided to the first region, and the game in which the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry section. There is a second situation in which the sphere is guided to the second region.
In the first gaming state, in a situation where the game ball can enter the predetermined entry portion, the probability of becoming the first situation or the probability of becoming the first situation is higher than the probability of becoming the second situation. Is also a high composition,
In the second gaming state, in a situation where the gaming ball can enter the predetermined ball entry portion, the probability of the second situation or the probability of the second situation is higher than the probability of the first situation. The gaming machine according to feature C3, which is characterized by having a high configuration.

According to the feature C4, the predetermined ball entry portion cannot or is difficult to enter the game ball in the second state, and the game ball can enter the ball in the first state. As a result, the player who expects the game ball to enter the predetermined entry portion pays attention to whether or not the predetermined entry portion is in the first state. In this case, in the first situation, the game ball that has entered the predetermined entry section is guided to the first region, and in the first gaming state, the game ball can enter the predetermined entry section. In the situation, it becomes the first situation or tends to become the first situation. Further, in the second situation, the game ball that has entered the predetermined entry section is guided to the second region, and in the second game state, the game ball can enter the predetermined entry section. Is in the second situation or is likely to be in the second situation. As a result, the game ball is likely to flow into the first region in the situation where the predetermined ball entry portion is in the first state, and the game ball is in the second region in the situation where the predetermined ball entry portion is in the first state. It is possible to create a state in which is easy to flow in.

Feature C5. In the game area, a plurality of supplied game balls including a predetermined distribution direction and a specific distribution direction are provided on the upstream side of the predetermined ball entry unit, the first variable ball entry means, and the second variable ball entry means. Distribution means (first distribution mechanism 71, second distribution mechanism 72) that distribute to one of the types of distribution directions and sequentially change the distribution direction when the game ball is supplied. Prepare,
The first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are provided side by side in the flow direction of the game ball in the aggregation region, and are located upstream of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means. When the provided variable ball entry means is in the second state, the game ball that has flowed into the aggregation region can flow down toward the variable ball entry means provided on the downstream side.
When the distribution direction by the distribution means is the predetermined distribution direction, the game ball is supplied toward the predetermined ball entry portion, and the distribution direction by the distribution means is the specific distribution direction. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, wherein the gaming ball is supplied toward the aggregation region.

According to the feature C5, when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the predetermined distribution direction, the game ball is supplied toward the predetermined ball entry portion, and the distribution direction by the distribution means is the specific distribution direction. The game ball is supplied to the aggregation area provided with the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means. As a result, by playing the game so that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means, it becomes possible to supply the game balls to the predetermined ball entry portions in a predetermined order, and also to supply the game balls to the predetermined ball entry portions. Regardless of whether the game ball that has entered the ball is guided to either the first region or the second region, it is possible to supply the game ball to the variable ball entry means corresponding to the guided region.

In particular, the first variable entry means and the second variable entry means are provided side by side in the flow direction of the game ball in the aggregation region, and the upstream side of the first variable entry means and the second variable entry means. When the variable ball entry means provided in the above is in the second state, the game ball that has flowed into the aggregation region flows down toward the variable ball entry means provided on the downstream side. As a result, even if the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are not individually sorted by the distribution means, the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are used. It is possible to supply the game ball to the side of the means that is in the first state.

Feature C6. The gaming machine according to feature C5, wherein when a specific number of gaming balls are supplied to the sorting means, the sorting state by the sorting means makes one round.

According to the feature C6, when a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the distribution state by the distribution means makes one round, so that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means. This makes it possible to repeatedly distribute the game balls in a certain manner.

Feature C7. Only the game balls distributed in the predetermined distribution direction by the distribution means can enter the predetermined ball entry portion, and only the game balls distributed in the specific distribution direction by the distribution means are described. The gaming machine according to feature C5 or C6, wherein the ball can enter the side of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means in the first state.

According to the feature C7, only the game balls distributed by the distribution means can enter the predetermined ball entry unit, the first variable entry means, and the second variable entry means. This facilitates the design of the frequency of ball entry into the predetermined ball entry section, the first variable ball entry means, and the second variable ball entry means to a desired frequency.

Feature C8. Features C5 to C7 characterized in that the game balls supplied to the distribution means after a predetermined number are distributed in the specific distribution direction with respect to the game balls distributed in the predetermined distribution direction by the distribution means. The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the feature C8, the game balls supplied to the distribution means after a predetermined number are distributed in the specific distribution direction with respect to the game balls distributed in the predetermined distribution direction by the distribution means, so that the predetermined ball entry unit It is possible to secure a period from when the game ball enters the ball to when the game ball is supplied to the aggregation area of the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means.

Feature C9. Switching control means (variation in MPU 112) for switching and controlling the predetermined ball entry portion between the first state in which the game ball can enter and the second state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to enter. Equipped with a function to execute intermediate processing and processing during normal operation)
The switching control means is configured to execute the switching control based on the fact that the game ball has entered the specific ball entry unit (through winning unit 36).
A separate distribution direction is set as the distribution direction by the distribution means.
When the distribution direction by the distribution means is the separate distribution direction, the game ball is supplied toward the specific ball entry portion.
When the distribution means is in a state of distributing game balls in the specific distribution direction, a special number is set in the specific distribution direction until the distribution means is in a state of distributing game balls in the separate distribution direction. It is a composition that the game balls of
The gaming machine is
When the first variable ball entry means is in the first state triggered by the inflow of the game ball into the first region, the number of game balls that trigger the switching has entered the first variable ball entry means. A means for setting the first variable ball entry means to the second state (a function of executing the processes of steps S707 to S710 in the MPU 112) and
When the second variable ball entry means is in the first state triggered by the inflow of the game ball into the second region, the number of game balls that trigger the switching has entered the second variable ball entry means. A means for setting the second variable ball entry means to the second state (a function of executing the processes of steps S807 to S810 in the MPU 112) and
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features C5 to C8, wherein the special number is equal to or larger than the number of switching triggers.

According to the feature C9, the predetermined entry portion is in the first state, provided that the game ball has entered the specific entry portion at least one condition. As a result, the player who expects the game ball to enter the predetermined entry portion also pays attention to whether or not the game ball enters the specific entry portion. Further, when the distribution direction by the distribution means is a different distribution direction, the game ball is supplied to the specific ball entry unit, and when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the predetermined distribution direction, the predetermined ball entry is performed. The game ball is supplied toward the unit, and when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the specific distribution direction, the game ball is supplied toward the aggregation region. As a result, it is possible to sequentially supply the game balls to the respective entry points by playing the game so that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means.

In the above configuration, when the first variable entry means is in the first state, the distribution means is supplied with the number of game balls that trigger the switching toward the first variable entry means, and then the distribution means is distributed. When the division state is a state in which the game ball is distributed toward the specific ball entry portion and the second variable entry means is in the first state, the number of triggers for switching to the second variable entry means by the distribution means. After the game ball is supplied, the distribution state of the distribution means becomes a state in which the game ball is distributed toward the specific entry portion. As a result, when the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means is in the first state, the game ball is supplied to the specific ball entry section after the variable ball entry means is in the second state. It is possible to generate a game ball into a specific ball entry portion in a situation where the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are in the second state.

Feature C10. Switching control means (variation in MPU 112) for switching and controlling the predetermined ball entry portion between the first state in which the game ball can enter and the second state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to enter. Equipped with a function to execute intermediate processing and processing during normal operation)
The switching control means is configured to execute the switching control based on the fact that the game ball has entered the specific ball entry unit (through winning unit 36).
A separate distribution direction is set as the distribution direction by the distribution means.
When the distribution direction by the distribution means is the separate distribution direction, the game ball is supplied toward the specific ball entry portion.
The situation in which the predetermined ball entry portion is in the first state is the first situation in which the game ball that has entered the predetermined ball entry section is guided to the first region, and the game in which the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry section. There is a second situation in which the sphere is guided to the second region.
When the gaming state is the first gaming state (first high probability state), the first situation or the first situation is reached in a situation where the gaming ball can enter the predetermined entry portion. The configuration is such that the probability is higher than the probability of the second situation.
When the gaming state is the second gaming state (second high probability state), the second situation or the second situation is reached in the situation where the gaming ball can enter the predetermined entry portion. The configuration is such that the probability is higher than the probability of the first situation.
In the first situation, when the game balls are supplied to the distribution means in a predetermined supply cycle, after the predetermined number of the game balls distributed in the separate distribution direction by the distribution means. The game ball supplied to the distribution means and having entered the predetermined ball entry portion is guided to the first region.
In the second situation, when the game balls are supplied to the distribution means in the predetermined supply cycle, the predetermined number of the game balls distributed in the separate distribution direction by the distribution means. 4. The one according to any one of features C5 to C9, wherein the gaming ball that is later supplied to the sorting means and that has entered the predetermined entry portion is guided to the second region. Pachinko machine.

According to the feature C10, in the first situation, the game ball that has entered the predetermined entry section is guided to the first region, and in the first gaming state, the game ball can enter the predetermined entry section. In such a situation, it becomes the first situation or tends to be the first situation. Further, in the second situation, the game ball that has entered the predetermined entry section is guided to the second region, and in the second game state, the game ball can enter the predetermined entry section. Is in the second situation or is likely to be in the second situation. As a result, the game ball is likely to flow into the first region in the situation where the predetermined ball entry portion is in the first state, and the game ball is in the second region in the situation where the predetermined ball entry portion is in the first state. It is possible to create a state in which is easy to flow in.

In this case, when the game balls are supplied to the distribution means in a predetermined supply cycle, in the first situation, the distribution means is used after a predetermined number of the game balls supplied to the specific entry portion. The supplied game balls enter the predetermined ball entry section and are supplied to the first region, and in the second situation, the game balls supplied to the specific entry section are supplied to the distribution means after a predetermined number. The game ball enters the predetermined ball entry portion and is supplied to the second region. As a result, the game ball is supplied to the first region in the first situation and the game ball is supplied to the second region in the second situation, while the operation mode of the distribution means is a common mode. It will be possible. Further, while the number of game balls required from the time when the game ball is supplied to the specific entry part to the time when the game ball is supplied to the predetermined entry part is set to a common number, in the first situation, the game is played in the first area. The ball is supplied, and in the second situation, the game ball can be supplied to the second region.

Feature C11. When the timing at which the switching control is started is used as a reference, in the first period, the game ball is guided to the first region, and in the second period, the game ball is guided to the second region. It is provided with a guidance control means (a function of executing the processes of step S510, step S511, and steps S612 to S614 in the MPU 112) that controls the guidance means so as to be in a state.
In the first situation, when the game balls are supplied to the distribution means in the predetermined supply cycle, the predetermined number of the game balls distributed in the separate distribution direction by the distribution means. The switching control is performed so that the game ball that is later supplied to the distribution means and that has entered the predetermined ball entry portion passes through the guidance position by the guidance means and is in the first period. Start timing is set,
In the second situation, when the game balls are supplied to the distribution means in the predetermined supply cycle, the predetermined number of the game balls distributed in the separate distribution direction by the distribution means. The switching control is performed so that the second period occurs when the game ball that is later supplied to the distribution means and has entered the predetermined ball entry portion passes through the guidance position by the guidance means. The gaming machine according to feature C10, wherein the start timing of is set.

According to the feature C11, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as described in the above feature C10 only by adjusting the start timing of the switching control of the predetermined ball entry portion corresponding to each of the first situation and the second situation. It will be possible.

Feature C12. An operation executing means (normal figure display unit 46) for executing a pre-switching operation based on the fact that a game ball has entered the specific ball entry unit is provided.
When the switching control is executed, the switching control means is configured to start the switching control when the pre-switching operation started based on the entry of the game ball into the specific entry portion is completed. can be,
In the first situation, the gaming machine causes the operation executing means to perform the pre-switching operation for a period corresponding to the first situation, and in the second situation, during a period corresponding to the second situation. An operation control means for causing the operation execution means to perform the pre-switching operation (a function of executing the processes of steps S407 and S408 in the MPU 112 in the first embodiment, and steps S1211 and steps in the MPU 112 in the second embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature C11, which comprises a function of executing the process of S1212).

According to the feature C12, the excellent effect as described in the feature C10 can be obtained only by adjusting the period during which the pre-switching operation is executed in the operation executing means corresponding to each of the first situation and the second situation. It becomes possible.

Feature C13. When a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the distribution state by the distribution means makes one round.
Based on the winning by at least a part of each game ball distributed by the distribution means by the time the distribution state makes one round, the specified number or more of the game balls can be given to the player or can be used by the player. The gaming machine according to any one of features C5 to C12, wherein a process for increasing the number of gaming balls by the specific number or more can be executed.

According to the feature C13, when a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the distribution state by the distribution means makes one round, so that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means. By setting this, it becomes possible to repeatedly distribute the game balls in a certain manner. In this case, a specific number or more of game balls may be given to the player or used by the player based on the winning by at least a part of each game ball distributed by the distribution means by the time the distribution state makes one lap. A process for increasing the number of possible game balls by a specific number or more can be executed. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the game is performed so that the game balls are supplied toward the distribution means while the number of game balls that can be used by the player is not substantially reduced.

Feature C14. When each game ball distributed by the distribution means causes the ball to enter the predetermined ball entry portion by the time the distribution state makes one round, the distribution means is used by the time the distribution state makes one round. Processing for increasing the number of game balls that can be given to the player or that can be used by the player based on the winning of at least a part of each game ball distributed by The gaming machine according to feature C13, characterized in that

According to the feature C14, when the game ball is supplied to the distribution means in a state where the ball can enter the predetermined ball entry portion, the game balls are distributed by the distribution means by the time the distribution state makes one round. Based on the winning of at least a part of each game ball, a process for granting a specific number or more of the game balls to the player or increasing the number of game balls that can be used by the player is executed. As a result, when the game is played so that the game ball is supplied to the distribution means in a state where the ball can enter the predetermined ball entry portion, the number of game balls that can be used by the player is substantially reduced. It is possible to play the game while not reducing it.

Feature C15. A special case in which a game ball distributed by the distribution means enters when the game ball distributed by the distribution means does not enter the predetermined ball entry portion by the time the distribution state makes one round. Equipped with a ball entry section (special winning section 142)
Based on the fact that the corresponding number of game balls among the game balls distributed by the distribution means enter the special entry portion by the time the distribution state makes one round, the specific number or more of the game balls are played. The gaming machine according to feature C13 or C14, wherein a process for increasing the number of gaming balls given to a person or usable by a player is executed by the specific number or more.

According to the feature C15, even if the ball does not enter the predetermined entry portion, the game ball distributed by the distribution means enters the special entry portion. Then, based on the corresponding number of game balls entering the special ball entry portion, a specific number or more of game balls are given to the player, or the number of game balls that can be used by the player is increased by a specific number or more. Processing is executed. As a result, when the game is played so that the game ball is supplied to the distribution means even when the ball does not enter the predetermined ball entry portion, the number of game balls that can be used by the player is substantially reduced. It is possible to play a game while not reducing the number.

Feature C16. A special ball-entry section (special winning section 142) is provided, in which a game ball that is sorted in the predetermined distribution direction by the sorting means but does not enter the predetermined ball-entering section is inserted.
Processing for increasing the number of game balls that can be given to the player or that can be used by the player based on the fact that the game balls have entered the special ball entry portion. The gaming machine according to feature C13 or C14, wherein

According to the feature C16, the game ball distributed in the predetermined distribution direction by the distribution means enters the special entry portion even if it does not enter the predetermined entry portion. Then, based on the fact that the game balls have entered the special ball entry portion, a process for granting a specific number or more of the game balls to the player or increasing the number of game balls that can be used by the player by a specific number or more is performed. Will be executed. As a result, when the game is played so that the game ball is supplied to the distribution means even when the ball does not enter the predetermined ball entry portion, the number of game balls that can be used by the player is substantially reduced. It is possible to play a game while not reducing the number.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features C1 to C16, any one or a plurality of features A1 to A28, features B1 to B34, features C1 to C16, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, and features F1 to F6 are configured. May be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the above-mentioned feature C group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is common to have an effect for making the player predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a lottery is performed based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry section provided in the game area, a variable display of the pattern is performed on the display device, and the winning result is obtained by the lottery. In the case of, it is known that the player shifts to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic D group>
Feature D1. Distribution means (first embodiment) in which the game balls supplied in the game area are distributed to one of a plurality of types of distribution directions, and the distribution directions are sequentially changed when the game balls are supplied. The first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72, the first distribution mechanism 71 in the fourth embodiment, and the third distribution mechanism 161 and the fourth distribution mechanism 162 in the fifth embodiment are provided. ,
When a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the distribution state by the distribution means makes one round.
Based on the winning by at least a part of each game ball distributed by the distribution means by the time the distribution state makes one round, the specified number or more of the game balls can be given to the player or can be used by the player. A gaming machine characterized in that a process for increasing the number of gaming balls by the specific number or more can be executed.

According to the feature D1, by supplying the game ball to the distribution means, the game ball is sequentially supplied to each region corresponding to each distribution direction of the distribution means. Further, when a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the distribution state by the distribution means makes one round. Therefore, by supplying the game balls to the distribution means. It is possible to make it possible to repeatedly distribute the game balls in a certain manner. In this case, a specific number or more of game balls may be given to the player or used by the player based on the winning by at least a part of each game ball distributed by the distribution means by the time the distribution state makes one lap. A process for increasing the number of possible game balls by a specific number or more can be executed. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the game is performed so that the game balls are supplied toward the distribution means while the number of game balls that can be used by the player is not substantially reduced.

Feature D2. When the distribution direction by the distribution means is the predetermined distribution direction, the predetermined ball entry portion (branch inlet 61 in the first embodiment and the third embodiment, the fourth embodiment and the fifth embodiment) The game ball is supplied toward the second special figure winning device 34).
When the gaming ball distributed by the distribution means causes the ball to enter the predetermined ball entry portion by the time the distribution state makes one round, the distribution means makes one round of the distribution state. Based on the winning by at least a part of each distributed game ball, a process for giving the player a specific number or more of the game balls or increasing the number of game balls that can be used by the player by the specific number or more. The gaming machine according to feature D1, characterized in that it is executed.

According to the feature D2, when the game ball is supplied to the distribution means in a state where the ball can enter the predetermined ball entry portion, the game balls are distributed by the distribution means by the time the distribution state makes one round. Based on the winning of at least a part of each game ball, a process for granting a specific number or more of the game balls to the player or increasing the number of game balls that can be used by the player is executed. As a result, when the game is played so that the game ball is supplied to the distribution means in a state where the ball can enter the predetermined ball entry portion, the number of game balls that can be used by the player is substantially reduced. It is possible to play the game while not reducing it.

Feature D3. When the distribution direction by the distribution means is the predetermined distribution direction, the predetermined ball entry portion (branch inlet 61 in the first embodiment and the third embodiment, the fourth embodiment and the fifth embodiment) The game ball is supplied toward the second special figure winning device 34).
A special case in which a game ball distributed by the distribution means enters when the game ball distributed by the distribution means does not enter the predetermined ball entry portion by the time the distribution state makes one round. A ball entry section (special winning section 142 in the third embodiment, special winning section 155 in the fourth embodiment and the fifth embodiment) is provided.
Based on the fact that the corresponding number of game balls among the game balls distributed by the distribution means enter the special entry portion by the time the distribution state makes one round, the specific number or more of the game balls are played. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, wherein a process for increasing the number of gaming balls given to a person or usable by a player is executed by the specific number or more.

According to the feature D3, even if the ball does not enter the predetermined entry portion, the game ball distributed by the distribution means enters the special entry portion. Then, based on the corresponding number of game balls entering the special ball entry portion, a specific number or more of game balls are given to the player, or the number of game balls that can be used by the player is increased by a specific number or more. Processing is executed. As a result, when the game is played so that the game ball is supplied to the distribution means even when the ball does not enter the predetermined ball entry portion, the number of game balls that can be used by the player is substantially reduced. It is possible to play a game while not reducing the number.

Feature D4. When the distribution direction by the distribution means is the predetermined distribution direction, the predetermined ball entry portion (branch inlet 61 in the first embodiment and the third embodiment, the fourth embodiment and the fifth embodiment) The game ball is supplied toward the second special figure winning device 34).
A special entry section (in the third embodiment, the special winning section 142, the fourth embodiment) in which a game ball that is distributed in the predetermined distribution direction by the distribution means but does not enter the predetermined entry section enters. A special winning section 155) is provided in the embodiment and the fifth embodiment.
Processing for increasing the number of game balls that can be given to the player or that can be used by the player based on the fact that the game balls have entered the special ball entry portion. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, wherein

According to the feature D4, the game ball distributed in the predetermined distribution direction by the distribution means enters the special entry portion even if it does not enter the predetermined entry portion. Then, based on the fact that the game balls have entered the special ball entry portion, a process for granting a specific number or more of the game balls to the player or increasing the number of game balls that can be used by the player by a specific number or more is performed. Will be executed. As a result, when the game is played so that the game ball is supplied to the distribution means even when the ball does not enter the predetermined ball entry portion, the number of game balls that can be used by the player is substantially reduced. It is possible to play a game while not reducing the number.

Feature D5. It is equipped with a special ball entry means (special electric winning device 35) provided so as to be switchable between the first state in which the game ball can be entered and the second state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to enter.
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, wherein the sorting means is provided on the downstream side in the flow direction of the gaming ball with respect to the special ball entering means.

According to the feature D5, the game balls that have been supplied to the special ball entry means but have not entered the special ball entry means are supplied to the distribution means, and a specific number of the game balls are further supplied to the distribution means. A specific number or more of game balls are given to the player based on the winning by at least a part of each game ball distributed by the distribution means by the time the game balls are supplied and the distribution state of the distribution means makes one round. A process for increasing the number of game balls that can be granted or can be used by the player by a specific number or more can be executed. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the game is played so that the game balls are supplied to the special ball entry means while the number of game balls that can be used by the player is not substantially reduced. ..

Feature D6. A distribution guiding means (in the third embodiment, a guiding unit) that guides a gaming ball supplied to the special entering means but not into the special entering means to the distribution means. 141, the gaming machine according to feature D5, which comprises a guiding unit 151 in the fourth embodiment and a guiding unit 163) in the fifth embodiment.

According to the feature D6, it is possible to ensure that the game ball supplied to the special entry means but not entered into the special entry means is reliably supplied to the distribution means. Will be.

Feature D7. A means for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state in which the special ball-entry means is repeatedly switched between the first state and the second state based on the lottery result of the lottery process (MPU112). The gaming machine according to feature D5 or D6, which comprises a function of executing the process of step S1009 in the above.

According to the feature D7, even if the game ball supplied to the special ball entry means does not enter the special ball entry means in the special game state, the game ball is supplied to the distribution means. Then, based on the winning by at least a part of each game ball distributed by the distribution means by the time when a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means and the distribution state of the distribution means makes one round. A process for increasing the number of game balls that can be given to the player by a specific number or more or that can be used by the player can be executed. As a result, even if the game ball is supplied to the special ball entry means in the special game state but the game ball does not enter the special ball entry means, the game ball is substantially reduced by that amount. It is possible not to.

It should be noted that one or more of the features A1 to A28, the features B1 to B34, the features C1 to C16, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, and the features F1 to F6 are configured with respect to the configurations of the features D1 to D7. May be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic E group>
Features E1. A specific entry section (through winning section 36) where a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
Predetermined ball entry section where game balls flowing down the game area can enter (branch entrance 61 in the first and third embodiments, second special figure winning in the fourth and fifth embodiments) Device 34) and
In the game area, any of a plurality of types of distribution directions including the first distribution direction and the second distribution direction of the game ball provided on the upstream side of the specific entry portion and the predetermined entry portion. A distribution means (first distribution mechanism 71 in the fourth embodiment) that sequentially changes the distribution direction when the game ball is supplied, which distributes the crabs.
Equipped with
When the distribution direction by the distribution means is the first distribution direction, the game ball is supplied toward the specific ball entry portion, and the distribution direction by the distribution means is the second distribution direction. In this case, the game ball is supplied toward the predetermined ball entry portion.
The period required for the game ball distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means to reach a position where the ball can enter the specific entry portion from a predetermined height position is the distribution. The swing is longer than the period required for the gaming ball distributed in the second distribution direction by means to reach a position where the ball can enter the predetermined ball entry portion from the predetermined height position. A gaming machine characterized in that a passage configuration from the distribution means to the specific ball entry portion and a passage configuration from the distribution means to the predetermined ball entry portion are set.

According to the feature E1, by supplying the game ball to the distribution means, the game ball is sequentially supplied to each region corresponding to each distribution direction of the distribution means. In this case, the period required for the game ball distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means to reach the position where the ball can enter the specific entry portion from the predetermined height position is the distribution. Since the game ball distributed in the second distribution direction by the means is set longer than the period required to reach the position where the ball can enter the predetermined entry portion from the predetermined height position, the predetermined entry is made. It is possible to secure a long period of time from when the game ball enters the ball portion to when the game ball reaches the specific entry portion. Further, since the above-mentioned entry period is set by the passage configuration from the distribution means to the specific entry portion and the passage configuration from the distribution means to the predetermined entry portion, the game ball by the distribution means can be used. It is possible to produce the above-mentioned effects while keeping the distribution mode constant.

Feature E2. A specific guide passage portion (fourth guide rail 156) for guiding the game ball distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means to the specific entry portion, and
A predetermined guide passage portion (second guide rail 153) for guiding the game ball distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means to the predetermined entry portion, and
Equipped with
The passage length dimension from the predetermined height position to the specific ball entry portion in the specific guidance passage portion is larger than the passage length dimension from the predetermined height position to the predetermined ball entry portion in the predetermined guidance passage portion. The gaming machine according to feature E1, which is characterized by being set to a large size.

According to the feature E2, the passage length dimension from the predetermined height position in the specific guide passage portion to the specific ball entry portion is larger than the passage length dimension from the predetermined height position to the predetermined ball entry portion in the predetermined guide passage portion. By setting, the period required for the game ball distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means to reach the position where the ball can enter the specific entry portion from the predetermined height position is allocated. It is possible to make the game ball distributed in the second distribution direction longer than the period required to reach the position where the ball can enter the predetermined ball entry portion from the predetermined height position by the distribution means. As a result, when the predetermined entry section is in the first state, the game ball is supplied to the specific entry section after the predetermined entry section is in the second state based on the entry into the predetermined entry section. It is possible to generate a game ball into a specific ball entry section in a situation where the predetermined ball entry section is in the second state. Further, according to this configuration, it is possible to produce the above-mentioned effects only by adjusting the passage length dimension of the specific guide passage portion and the predetermined guide passage portion.

Feature E3. Feature E1 or a feature E1 characterized in that the game ball supplied to the distribution means is distributed in the first distribution direction after one with respect to the game ball distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means. The gaming machine described in E2.

According to the feature E3, the game ball supplied to the distribution means is supplied to the specific ball entry unit with respect to the game ball supplied toward the predetermined ball entry unit. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary game balls from being generated from the time when the game ball is supplied to the predetermined ball entry portion to the time when the game ball is supplied to the specific entry portion. In this case, by providing the configuration of the above feature E1, the game ball distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means can enter the specific entry portion from a predetermined height position. The period required to reach is longer than the period required for the game ball distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means to reach the position where the game ball can enter the predetermined entry portion from the predetermined height position. It can be lengthened.

Feature E4. The second distribution direction is a direction vertically downward from the distribution means.
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, wherein the first distribution direction is a direction from the distribution means toward a side different from the vertically downward direction.

According to the feature E4, a predetermined ball entry portion is provided at a position where the game balls distributed vertically downward by the distribution means are supplied, and the game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means are provided. By setting the period required to reach the predetermined ball entry section to be short, it is possible to smoothly supply the game ball to the predetermined ball entry section.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features E1 to E4, any one or a plurality of features A1 to A28, features B1 to B34, features C1 to C16, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, and features F1 to F6 are configured. May be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions related to the feature D group and the feature E group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is common to have an effect for making the player predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a lottery is performed based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry section provided in the game area, a variable display of the pattern is performed on the display device, and the winning result is obtained by the lottery. In the case of, it is known that the player shifts to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to make the flow mode of the gaming ball in the gaming area preferable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. A special ball entry section (second special figure winning device 34) in which a game ball flowing down the game area (game area PA) can enter.
An acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S1101 in the MPU 112) for acquiring predetermined information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the special entry portion, and
A predetermined information storage means (second special figure holding area 134) that stores the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number, and
When the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means, the grant determination means (step S1103 and step S in MPU 112) for executing the grant determination as to whether or not the predetermined information is the grant correspondence information corresponding to the grant of the privilege. Function to execute the processing of S1105) and
In the MPU 112, the game rotation control means (in the MPU 112) that controls the game rotation execution means (second special figure display unit 45b) so that the game rotation operation is executed in correspondence with the execution of the grant determination by the grant determination means. (Function to execute the process of step S1006 to step S1008) and
Equipped with
The game times control means is
In a situation where the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means separately from the predetermined information that triggers the execution of the game rotation operation, the predetermined information that does not correspond to the given correspondence information is used as the execution trigger. When the game rounding motion is executed, the game rounding operation is performed over a first motion period (fixed short period) shorter than the shortest ball entry cycle in the case where the game ball enters the special ball entry portion. A first control means (a function for executing the process of step S1905 in the MPU 112) for executing the operation, and
When the game rotation operation is executed in a situation where the predetermined information is not stored in the predetermined information storage means separately from the predetermined information that triggers the execution of the game rotation operation, the minimum ball entry cycle or more is required. A second control means (a function of executing the process of step S1906 in the MPU 112) for executing the game circulation operation over a second operation period (fixed long period), and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature F1, in a situation where a plurality of predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means, when the game rounding operation is executed by the predetermined information that does not correspond to the assigned correspondence information, the special ball entry is performed. The game rotation operation is executed in a period shorter than the shortest ball entry cycle when the game ball enters the section. As a result, the possibility that a game ball is newly entered into the special entry portion is reduced even though a predetermined number of predetermined information is already stored in the predetermined information storage means. Therefore, it is difficult for the event that the predetermined information is not acquired even though the game ball has entered the special entry portion. On the other hand, when the game rotation operation is executed with the predetermined information as an execution trigger in a situation where another predetermined information is not stored in the predetermined information storage means, the game rotation operation is equal to or longer than the shortest ball entry cycle. It is executed over a period of time. As a result, when the predetermined information storage means does not store the predetermined information that is not the execution target of the game rotation operation, the predetermined information storage means stores the second reserved information. It becomes possible.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the first operation period is only one type.

According to the feature F2, since the first operation period is only one type, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity for storing the operation period.

Feature F3. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, wherein the second operation period is a period equal to or greater than the product of the shortest ball entry cycle and the predetermined number.

According to the feature F3, when the game rotation operation is executed over the second operation period, a predetermined number of predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means in the situation where the game rotation operation is executed. It becomes possible to do so. This makes it possible to create a situation in which a predetermined number of predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means.

Features F4. The second operation period is a period equal to or greater than the product of the shortest ball entry cycle and the predetermined number, and a period less than the product of the shortest ball entry cycle and the number obtained by adding 1 to the predetermined number. The gaming machine according to the feature F3.

According to the feature F4, when another predetermined information is not stored in the predetermined information storage means and the game rotation operation is executed over the second operation period with the predetermined information as an execution trigger, the game rotation is performed. While it is possible to store a predetermined number of predetermined information in the predetermined information storage means in the situation where the operation is being executed, the special entry section is in the situation where the game rotation operation is being executed. It is possible to prevent a larger number of game balls from entering than a predetermined number.

Feature F5. When a game ball is supplied to the special ball entry portion in a predetermined game state with the shortest supply cycle, and the game rotation operation triggered by the predetermined information that does not correspond to the given correspondence information is repeatedly executed. Until the game rotation operation is executed a predetermined number of times, the game rotation operation according to the first operation period is executed, and in the next execution time, the game rotation operation according to the second operation period is executed. As described above, the gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F4, wherein the first operation period and the second operation period are set.

According to the feature F5, the game ball is supplied to the distribution means in the shortest supply cycle in the predetermined game state, and the game rotation operation triggered by the predetermined information that does not correspond to the assigned correspondence information is repeatedly executed. In this case, the situation in which the game rotation operation in the first operation period is executed a predetermined number of times and then the game rotation operation in the second operation period is executed once occurs repeatedly. As a result, in a configuration in which the execution efficiency of the game rounding operation is improved in order to prevent the situation where the predetermined information is not acquired even though the ball has entered the special ball entry section, the game rounding operation is performed. It is possible to periodically generate a situation in which is executed over a certain long period of time, and it is possible to make the execution mode of the effect preferable accordingly.

Feature F6. It is provided with means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2105 to S2110 in the MPU 123) to execute a predetermined effect when the gaming rotation operation is executed over the second operation period. The gaming machine according to the feature F5.

According to the feature F6, in a configuration in which the execution efficiency of the game rounding operation is improved in order to prevent a situation in which the predetermined information is not acquired even though the ball has entered the predetermined ball entry portion, the periodical operation is performed. It is possible to execute a predetermined effect.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features F1 to F6, any one or a plurality of features A1 to A28, features B1 to B34, features C1 to C16, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, and features F1 to F6 are configured. May be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the above-mentioned feature F group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is common to have an effect for making the player predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a lottery is performed based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry section provided in the game area, a variable display of the pattern is performed on the display device, and the winning result is obtained by the lottery. In the case of, it is known that the player shifts to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary that the game progresses favorably, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The following shows the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or is applied to each feature.

Pachinko gaming machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and grants a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a picture display device that variably displays a plurality of pictures, the variable display of the plurality of pictures is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which the variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped after a lapse of a predetermined time, and a privilege is given to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 33 ... 1st special figure winning device, 34 ... 2nd special drawing winning device, 35 ... special electric winning device, 36 ... through winning section, 46 ... normal drawing display section, 61 ... branch entrance, 65 ... branch Passage, 65c ... 1st derivation area, 65d ... 2nd derivation area, 66a ... branch winning detection sensor, 67 ... switching piece, 71 ... 1st distribution mechanism, 72 ... 2nd distribution mechanism, 107 ... payout control device, 112 ... MPU, 123 ... MPU, 134 ... 2nd special drawing reservation area, 142 ... special winning section, 151 ... guiding section, 153 ... second guiding rail, 155 ... special winning section, 156 ... 4th guiding rail, 161 ... Third distribution mechanism, 162 ... Fourth distribution mechanism, 163 ... Induction unit, PA ... Game area.

Claims (1)

Launch operation means operated to launch a game ball toward the game area,
A first variable ball entry means provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered and a second state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to enter. ,
A second variable ball entry means provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered and a second state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to enter. ,
A predetermined ball entry portion where a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and
A predetermined passage portion through which a game ball that has entered the predetermined entry portion flows down, and a predetermined passage portion.
A predetermined detection means for detecting a game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion, and
A predetermined granting means for giving a privilege to a player when a game ball is detected by the predetermined detecting means, and a predetermined granting means.
A game ball provided in the predetermined passage portion on the downstream side of the detection region by the predetermined detection means, and the game ball passing through the detection region is guided to any one of a plurality of regions including the first region and the second region. Guidance means to make it so
When the game ball flows into the first region, the first variable ball entering means is brought into the first state, and the first giving means.
When the game ball flows into the second region, the second variable ball entering means is brought into the first state, and the second giving means.
Equipped with
The predetermined ball entry unit, the first variable ball entry means, and the second variable ball entry means are located in a region where the game ball can flow down when the launch operation means is operated with the maximum operation amount in the game area. A gaming machine characterized by being provided .

Images